TM 10-5411-248-13P

TM 10-5411-248-13&P
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST
FOR
CARGO BED COVER (CBC) TYPE IVA1,
5 TON CARGO TRUCK, MTV, AND
MTV TRAILER
(NSN 5411-01-559-8738) (CAMOUFLAGE)
(NSN 5411-01-559-8741) (SAND)
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A – Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
01 OCTOBER 2011
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
WARNING SUMMARY
This warning summary contains general safety warnings and hazardous materials warnings that must be
understood and applied during operation and maintenance of this equipment. Failure to observe these
precautions could result in serious injury or death to personnel. Also included are explanations of safety and
hazardous materials icons used within the technical manual.
FIRST AID DATA
For First Aid information, refer to FM 4-25.11, First Aid.
EXPLANATION OF SAFETY WARNING ICONS
HEAVY OBJECTS - heavy object on human figure shows that heavy parts present a
danger to life or limb.
FALLING PARTS - arrow bouncing off human shoulder and head shows that falling
parts present a danger to life or limb.
SUFFOCATION DANGER - person with deflated lungs shows that there is a danger
of an inability to breathe and a potential for suffocation.
FLYING PARTICLES - arrows bouncing off face shows that particles flying through
the air will harm face.
.
HEAVY PARTS - Heavy object pinning human figure against wall shows that heavy,
moving parts present a danger to life or limb.
GENERAL SAFETY WARNINGS DESCRIPTION
WARNING
Do not lift the Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) in its retracted (lowered) position.
Do not use the lift rings to lift a CBC with an installed payload greater than 1100 pounds (499 kg).
Make sure to use handling equipment rated for the equipment it will be lifting.
Do not raise the upper portion of the CBC past the warning mark on the side wall of the CBC.
a
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
GENERAL SAFETY WARNINGS DESCRIPTION - Continued.
WARNING
Be sure to support the lift/locking assembly with a free hand before removing the clevis pin that
secures the assembly to the roof mounted stowage block.
WARNING
The Personnel Door to the Cargo Bed Cover must remain open while occupied. Failure to do so
may result in suffocation.
WARNING
Safety goggles must be worn during repair to protect eyes from flying metal chips.
WARNING
Methylethylketone is flammable and toxic and shall be used only in a well-ventilated area away
from all sparks or open flame.
WARNING
To avoid injury or death to personnel, no smoking is allowed when working with flammable
materials.
b
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
WARNING
Do not lift the CBC in its height-retracted (lowered), condition. The CBC must be in its height-
extended (fully-raised) condition prior to using the lift rings for lifting. Failure to adhere to this
warning may result in injury or death.
Whenever lifting the CBC off the ground, have guide personnel using guide lines to prevent the
CBC from swinging eratically. Injury or death to the operator or observers could occur if guide
lines are not used.
Personnel should stand clear of the CBC while it is being lifted and moved. Failure to do so could
cause injury or death.
Personnel attaching the lifting sling to the lift rings or working on the roof of the CBC should use ladders
or wear approved safety lines or both to prevent falls; injury or death could occur if proper safety
equipment is not used.
WARNING
The CBC is not a shelter system and is not to be used to transport personnel or sentry dogs.
There is a suffocation hazard. Personnel can only work inside the CBC when the unit is
deployed and the ventilators and doors are open. Failure to comply may result in injury or
death to personnel.
WARNING
Ensure the ladder is secure and on level ground before stepping on it. Failure to do so could
cause the ladder to fall and injure personnel stepping on it.
Ensure the vehicle is on level ground and the wheels are chocked before deploying the ladder. Failure to
do so could cause the ladder to disengage and cause injury to personnel using it.
c
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
WARNING
A maximum of no less than 7/16 thread exposure when installing the turnbuckles. If more thread
is exposed than 7/16 it could cause the wire rope assembly to fail. Failure to adhere to this
EXPLANATION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ICONS
CHEMICAL - drops of liquid on hand shows that the material will cause burns or irritation to
human skin or tissue.
POISON - skull and crossbones shows that a material is poisonous or is a danger to life.
FIRE - flame shows that a material may ignite and cause burns.
FLYING PARTICLES - arrows bouncing off face shows that particles flying through the air will
harm face.
HEAVY PARTS - hand with heavy object on top shows that heavy parts can crush and harm.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DESCRIPTION
WARNING
METHYLETHYLKETONE, ASTM D-740
from all sparks or open flame. Gloves and safety goggles should be worn during use.
materials.
d
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DESCRIPTION - Continued.
WARNING
EPOXY COATING KIT, MIL-PRF-22750
Two-part epoxy adhesive is flammable and toxic and shall be used only in a well-ventilated area
away from all sparks or open flame. Gloves and safety goggles should be worn during use.
WARNING
ALODINE, MIL-C-5541
Alodine is flammable and toxic and shall be used only in a well-ventilated area away from all
sparks or open flame. Gloves and safety goggles should be worn during use.
WARNING
SEALANT, MIL-S-8802, TYPE II, CLASS 8
Sealant is flammable and toxic and shall be used only in a well-ventilated area away from all
WARNING
LUBRICATING OIL, MACHINE TOOL, A-A-59113
Lube Oil is neither flammable nor toxic. Rubber/Neoprene gloves and splash goggles should be
worn during use.
e
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
WARNING
ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND, P/N 1279K31
Anti-Seize Compound is used for equipment lubrication, lubricant for threaded connections or
slides. It is neither flammable nor toxic. Gloves and safety goggles should be worn during use.
WARNING
LUBRICANT, SOLID FILM, MIL-L-23398
Spray Lube is flammable and toxic and shall be used only in a well-ventilated area away from all
sparks or open flame. Gloves and safety goggles should be worn during use. Respirator may be
required if TLV/TWA limits are exceeded.
WARNING
PRIMER, EPOXY, MIL-P-53022
Primer, Epoxy Coating is flammable and toxic and shall be used only in a well-ventilated area or
in an approved spray booth away from all sparks or open flame. Respirator, impervious gloves
and chemical worker goggles should be worn during use.
WARNING
POLYURETHANE COATING, MIL-DTL-53039
Polyurethane is flammable and toxic and shall be used only in a well-ventilated area away from
all sparks or open flame. Self-contained breathing apparatus should be worn to protect against
toxic and irritating vapors. Gloves and safety goggles should be worn during use.
f
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
WARNING
RTV ADHESIVE, MIL-A-46146
RTV Silicon Adhesive is irritating to eyes and skin and shall be used only in a well-ventilated
area. Do not induce vomiting if ingested – obtain medical attention. Flammable above 200° F
(93.3° C). Gloves and safety goggles should be worn during use.
WARNING
CARC paint dust is a health hazard. Wear protective eyewear, mask, and goggles when sanding
CARC paint surfaces. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury.
WARNING
Personnel need to maintain three points of contact when climbing onto and moving around on top
of the CBC. Failure to follow this warning can lead to serious injury or death to personnel.
g/h blank
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES

NOTE: Zero in the “Change No.” column indicates an original page or work package
Date of issue for original manual is:
Original 01 OCTOBER 2011
TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES FOR FRONT AND REAR MATTER IS 44 AND TOTAL
NUMBER OF WORK PACKAGES IS 57 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:
Page/WP No. Change No. Page/WP No. Change No.

Front Cover 0 WP 0033 (6 pgs) 0
Warning Summary (8 pgs) 0 WP 0034 (10 pgs) 0
i-xiii/ xiv blank 0 WP 0035 (8 pgs) 0
Chp 1 Title Page 0 WP 0036 (6 pgs) 0
WP 0001 (8 pgs) 0 WP 0037 (12 pgs) 0
WP 0002 (6 pgs) 0 WP 0038 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0003 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0039 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0004 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0041 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0005 (38 pgs) 0 WP 0042 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0006 (8 pgs) 0 Chp 6 Title Page 0
WP 0007 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0043 (6 pgs) 0
Chp 3 Title Page 0 WP0044 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0008 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0045 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0009 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0046 (6 pgs) 0
WP 0010 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0047 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0011 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0048 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0012 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0049 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0013 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0050 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0014 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0051 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0015 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0052 (4 pgs) 0
Chp 4 Title Page 0 Chp 7 Title Page 0
WP 0016 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0053 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0017 (10 pgs) 0 WP 0054 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0018 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0056 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0019 (16 pgs) 0 WP 0057 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0020 (22 pgs) 0 INDEX-1 - INDEX-4 0
WP 0021 (22 pgs) 0 Inside Back Cover 0
WP 0022 (16 pgs) 0 Back cover 0
WP 0023 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0024 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0025 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0026 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0027 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0029 (24 pgs) 0
WP 0030 (4 pgs) 0
WP 0031 (2 pgs) 0
WP 0032 (8 pgs) 0
A/B blank
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D.C. 01 October 2011
TECHNICAL MANUAL
INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST
FOR

5 TON CARGO TRUCK, MTV, AND MTV TRAILER
(NSN 5411-01-559-8738) (CAMOUFLAGE)
(NSN 5411-01-559-8741) (SAND)
REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS

You can help improve this publication. If you find any errors, or if you would like to recommend
any improvements to the procedures in this publication, please let us know. The preferred
method is to submit your DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank
Forms) through the Internet on the TACOM Unique Logistics Support Applications (TULSA) Web
site. The Internet address is https://tulsa.tacom.army.mil. Access to all applications requires
CAC authentication, and you must complete the Access Request form the first time you use it.
The DA Form 2028 is located under the TULSA Applications on the left-hand navigation bar. Fill
out the form and click on SUBMIT. Using this form on the TULSA Web site will enable us to
respond more quickly to your comments and to better manage the DA Form 2028 program. You
may also mail, e-mail, or fax your comments or DA Form 2028 directly to the U.S. Army TACOM
Life Cycle Management Command. The postal mail address is U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle
Management Command, ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS, MS 727, 6501 E. 11 Mile
Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000. The e-mail address is tacomlcmc.daform2028@us.army.mil.
The fax number is DSN 786-1856 or Commercial (586) 282-1856. A reply will be furnished to you.
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A – Approved for public release. Distribution is unlimited.
i
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL xxii-xiii/xiv blank
CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION, AND THEORY OF OPERATION
General Information .............................................................................................................. WP 0001
Figure 1. Cargo Bed Cover (CBC)................................................................................. WP 0001-1
Figure 2. CBC Mounting Plates ..................................................................................... WP 0001-2
Table 1. Nomenclature Cross-Reference List ............................................................... WP 0001-4
Table 2. List of Abbreviations and Acronyms ................................................................ WP 0001-4
Equipment Description and Data .......................................................................................... WP 0002
Figure 1. Location of Major Components ...................................................................... WP 0002-4
Table 1. Equipment Specification Data ......................................................................... WP 0002-5
Theory of Operation .............................................................................................................. WP 0003
Figure 1. CBC With M923, 5 Ton Cargo Truck ............................................................. WP 0003-1
Figure 2. CBC MTV and MTV Trailer Configurations .................................................... WP 0003-2
Figure 3. CBC Operational Concept .............................................................................. WP 0003-4
CHAPTER 2 - OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS
Description and Use of Operator Controls and Indicators .................................................... WP 0004
Figure 1. Personnel Door Controls ................................................................................ WP 0004-1
Table 1. Personnel Door Controls ................................................................................. WP 0004-1
Figure 2. Winch and Lift/Locking Assembly Controls .................................................... WP 0004-2
Table 2. Winch and Lift/Locking Assembly Controls .................................................... WP 0004-2
Operation Under Usual Conditions ....................................................................................... WP 0005
Figure 1. Securing Ladder on CBC ............................................................................... WP 0005-2
Figure 2. Winch Location Inside CBC ........................................................................... WP 0005-3
Figure 3. Installing the Ratchet Handle ......................................................................... WP 0005-3
Figure 4. Warning Mark ................................................................................................. WP 0005-4
Figure 5. Locating the Lift/Locking Assembly ................................................................ WP 0005-5
Figure 6. Lowering the Lift/Locking Assembly ............................................................... WP 0005-5
Figure 7. Stowage Block ................................................................................................ WP 0005-6
Figure 8. Rotating the Lift/Locking Assembly ................................................................ WP 0005-6
Figure 9. Align Pins in the Lift/Locking Assembly.......................................................... WP 0005-7
Figure 10. Locking the Handle of the Lift/Locking Assembly ........................................ WP 0005-7
Figure 11. Removing the Personnel Door Assembly (Lower) ....................................... WP 0005-9
ii
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued.

Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 12. Remove Hinge from Personnel Door Assembly (Lower) ............................. WP 0005-9
Figure 13. Install Hinge on Personnel Door Assembly (Lower) .................................... WP 0005-10
Figure 14. Install Personnel Door Assembly (Lower) .................................................... WP 0005-11
Figure 15. Secure Personnel Door Assembly (Lower) .................................................. WP 0005-12
Figure 16. Lower Door Latch Rod Installation Stowage Position .................................. WP 0005-13
Figure 17. Lower Door Latch Rod Installation Operational Position. ............................ WP 0005-14
Figure 18. Exterior Handle Position Open ..................................................................... WP 0005-15
Figure 19. Exterior Handle Position Closed .................................................................. WP 0005-16
Figure 20. Door Latch Assembly Operation ................................................................... WP 0005-17
Figure 21. Outside Door Handle Locked Position ......................................................... WP 0005-18
Figure 22. Creating Secondary Exit on the CBC ........................................................... WP 0005-20
Figure 23. Door Stop/Hold Open Device ....................................................................... WP 0005-21
Figure 24. Door Stop/Hold Open Device Operation ...................................................... WP 0005-21
Figure 25. Power and Signal Line Port .......................................................................... WP 0005-22
Figure 26. Blockout Panel ............................................................................................. WP 0005-23
Figure 27. Hoisting the CBC Using the Lift Rings ......................................................... WP 0005-25
Figure 28. Gaining Access to the Roof of the CBC ....................................................... WP 0005-27
Figure 29. Removing the Personnel Door Assembly (Lower) ....................................... WP 0005-28
Figure 30. Personnel Door Assembly (Lower) Hand Knobs ......................................... WP 0005-29
Figure 31. Personnel Door Assembly (Lower) .............................................................. WP 0005-30
Figure 32. Removal of Lower Door Hinge ..................................................................... WP 0005-30
Figure 33. Installation of Lower Door Hinge .................................................................. WP 0005-31
Figure 34. Installation of Personnel Door Assembly (Lower) ........................................ WP 0005-32
Figure 35. Stowing Each Lift/Locking Assembly ........................................................... WP 0005-33
Figure 36. Stowing the Lift/Locking Assembly............................................................... WP 0005-34
Figure 37. Lowering the Upper Extendable Portion of the CBC.................................... WP 0005-36
Decals and Instruction Plates ......................................................................................... WP 0006
Figure 1. Outside View of Forward End Wall Decal/Instruction Plate ........................... WP 0006-1
Table 1. Outside View of Forward End Wall Decal/Instruction Plate ............................ WP 0006-1
Figure 2. Outside View of Rear End Wall Decal/Instruction Plate................................. WP 0006-2
Table 2. Outside View of Rear End Wall Decal/Instruction Plate .................................. WP 0006-2
Figure 3. Unit Identification Plate Details ...................................................................... WP 0006-3
Table 3. Unit Identification Plate Details........................................................................ WP 0006-3
iii
TM 10-5411-248-13&P

Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 4. Outside View of Road Side and Curb Side Walls .......................................... WP 0006-4
Table 4. Outside View of Road Side and Curb Side Walls .......................................... WP 0006-4
Figure 5. Decal/Instruction Plate for Inside View of Rear End Wall .............................. WP 0006-5
Table 5. Decal/Instruction Plate for Inside View of Rear End Wall ............................... WP 0006-5
Figure 6. Inside View of Side Wall (Road Side) Decal/Instruction Plates ..................... WP 0006-6
Table 6. Inside View of Side Wall (Road Side) Decal/Instruction Plates....................... WP 0006-6
Figure 7. Inside Top Assembly Caution Decal Detail .................................................... WP 0006-7
Table 7. Inside Top Assembly Caution Decal Detail ..................................................... WP 0006-7
Figure 8. Lift/Locking Assembly Decal Detail ................................................................ WP 0006-7
Table 8. Lift/Locking Assembly Decal Detail ................................................................. WP 0006-7
Operation Under Unusual Conditions ................................................................................... WP 0007
CHAPTER 3 - TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Troubleshooting Index........................................................................................................... WP 0008
Operator Troubleshooting Procedures
Top Assembly Troubleshooting Procedures ......................................................................... WP 0009
Personnel Door Assembly Troubleshooting Procedures ...................................................... WP 0010
CBC Mounting Kit Troubleshooting Procedures ................................................................... WP 0011
Field Maintenance Troubleshooting Procedures
Top Assembly Troubleshooting Procedures ......................................................................... WP 0012
Bottom Assembly Troubleshooting Procedures .................................................................... WP 0013
Personnel Door Assembly Troubleshooting Procedures ...................................................... WP 0014
CBC Mounting Kit Troubleshooting Procedures ................................................................... WP 0015
CHAPTER 4 - PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) Introduction ................................... WP 0016
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS)....................................................... WP 0017
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) for Cargo Bed Cover WP 0017-1
Figure 1. CBC “Before Operation” PMCS (Sheet 1 of 2) .............................................. WP 0017-5
Figure 1. CBC “Before Operation” PMCS (Sheet 2 of 2) .............................................. WP 0017-6
Figure 2. CBC “During Operation” PMCS ..................................................................... WP 0017-7
Figure 3. CBC “After Operation” PMCS ......................................................................... WP 0017-9
Lubrication Requirements ..................................................................................................... WP 0017-9
Figure 4. CBC Lubrication Point Locations ................................................................... WP 0017-10
iv
TM 10-5411-248-13&P

Page No.
WP Sequence No.
CHAPTER 5 - FIELD MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Service Upon Receipt .......................................................................................................... WP 0018
Table 1. Inspection Criteria for Packaging .................................................................... WP 0018-2
Table 2. Vehicle Type and Mounting Kit Reference ...................................................... WP 0018-3
Figure 1. Lifting the CBC from the Pallet ....................................................................... WP 0018-3
Mounting Kit for M923, 5 Ton Cargo Truck Installation Service Upon Receipt .................... WP 0019
Figure 1. Lifting CBC onto Vehicle ................................................................................ WP 0019-2
Figure 2. Determining Mounting Position ...................................................................... WP 0019-3
Figure 3. Drilling Hole Locations ................................................................................... WP 0019-4
Figure 4. Hand-Operated Insert Installation Tools ........................................................ WP 0019-6
Figure 5. Threading the Threaded Insert Fastener ....................................................... WP 0019-6
Figure 6. Threading Insert into Hole in CBC Panel ....................................................... WP 0019-6
Figure 7. Installing Threaded Insert ............................................................................... WP 0019-7
Figure 8. Removal of the Threaded Insert Installation Tool ......................................... WP 0019-7
Figure 9. CBC Rubber Strip Installation ........................................................................ WP 0019-9
Figure 10. Identifying Gaps Between the CBC and the Vehicle Bed ............................ WP 0019-11
Figure 11. CBC Fastener Installation ............................................................................ WP 0019-13
Figure 12. CBC Fastener Size Locations ...................................................................... WP 0019-14
Figure 13. RTV Adhesive Application ............................................................................ WP 0019-15
Mounting Kit for M1083, 5 Ton MTV Installation Service Upon Receipt............................... WP 0020
Figure 2. CBC Layout Orientation ................................................................................. WP 0020-5
Figure 3. Installing the Front Mounting Plate Section ................................................... WP 0020-6
Figure 4. Installing Rear, Road Side, and Curb Side Mounting Plate Sections ............ WP 0020-10
Figure 5. Tie-Down Post Assembly Installation ............................................................. WP 0020-12
Figure 6. Initial Installation of Clamp Plate Channel ..................................................... WP 0020-13
Figure 7. MTV Bed Plug Removal ................................................................................. WP 0020-14
Figure 8. Lowering the CBC onto the Vehicle Bed ........................................................ WP 0020-16
Figure 9. Identifying Gaps Between the CBC and the Vehicle Bed .............................. WP 0020-18
Figure 10 Applying RTV Silicone Adhesive ................................................................... WP 0020-19
Figure 11. RTV Adhesive Application after Lowering CBC into Place ......................... WP 0020-20
Figure 12. Securing the Tie-Down Post Assemblies ..................................................... WP 0020-21
Figure 13. Final Installation of Clamp Plate Assembly .................................................. WP 0020-22
v
TM 10-5411-248-13&P

Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Mounting Kit for M1095, 5 Ton MTV Trailer Installation Service Upon Receipt ................... WP 0021
Figure 2. Rubber Strip Installation for Mounting Components ...................................... WP 0021-5
Figure 3. Mounting Gusset Plates to Front Mounting Plate .......................................... WP 0021-6
Figure 4. Installing the Front Mounting Plate Section ................................................... WP 0021-7
Figure 5. Rear, Road Side, and Curb Side Mounting Plates ......................................... WP 0021-11
Figure 6. Initial Installation of Clamp Plate Channel...................................................... WP 0021-12
Figure 7. Lowering the CBC onto the Trailer Bed ......................................................... WP 0021-14
Figure 8. Identifying Gaps Between the CBC and the Trailer Bed ................................ WP 0021-16
Figure 9. RTV Adhesive Application for the CBC Gusset Plates ................................. WP 0021-18
Figure 10. RTV Adhesive Application for the CBC Threshold Area .............................. WP 0021-20
Figure 11. Final Installation of Clamp Plate Assembly .................................................. WP 0021-21
Mounting Kit For M923 5 Ton Cargo Truck Ladder Installation Service Upon Receipt……..WP 0022
Figure 1. M923 Tailgate Ladder in Stowed and Deployed Positions ............................ WP 0022-2
Table 1. Parts Listing Entry Ladder Kit for M923........................................................... WP 0022-2
Figure 2. Entry Ladder Kit for M923 .............................................................................. WP 0022-3
Figure 3. Tailgate Position References ......................................................................... WP 0022-4
Figure 4. Mounting Ladder Stowage Brackets 1 ........................................................... WP 0022-4
Figure 10. Mounting Ladder Stowage Brackets 7 ......................................................... WP 0022-6
vi
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 13. Mounting Ladder Stowage Brackets 10 ....................................................... WP 0022-7
Figure 14. Mounting Strap Assemblies for Ladder Stowage 1 ...................................... WP 0022-8
Figure 22. Mounting Ladder Deployment Brackets 1 .................................................... WP 0022-11
Figure 31. Ladder Deployment ...................................................................................... WP 0022-15
Figure 32. Ladder Stowage ........................................................................................... WP 0022-16
Handle, Bail, Replace............................................................................................................ WP 0023
Figure 1. Bail Handle Fitting .......................................................................................... WP 0023-2
Assembly, Ring, Lift, Replace ............................................................................................... WP 0024
Figure 1. Lift Ring Assembly Fitting ............................................................................... WP 0024-2
Pad, Filter, Air Cooler, Replace ............................................................................................ WP0025
Figure 1. Air Cooler Filter Pad Replacement................................................................. WP 0025-2
Step, Folding, Upper and Middle, Replace ........................................................................... WP 0026
Figure 1. Folding Step Replacement ............................................................................. WP 0026-2
Lift/Locking, Assembly, Replace ........................................................................................... WP 0027
Figure 1. Lift/Locking Assembly Replacement .............................................................. WP 0027-2
Step, Folding, Lower, Replace .............................................................................................. WP 0028
Figure 1. Folding Step (Lower Roof Access) Replacement .......................................... WP 0028-2
vii
TM 10-5411-248-13&P

Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Rope Assembly, Wire, Replace ............................................................................................ WP 0029
Figure 1. Hoisting the CBC Using the Lift Rings ........................................................... WP 0029-3
Figure 2. Inside Supports for Wire Rope Assembly Repair ........................................... WP 0029-4
Figure 3. Wire Rope Assembly Cover Removal ............................................................ WP 0029-5
Figure 4. Wire Rope Assembly End Ball and Keyhole Slot ............................................ WP 0029-6
Figure 5. Winch Corner Assembly Replacement .......................................................... WP 0029-7
Figure 6. Winch Corner Wire Rope Assembly Components ......................................... WP 0029-9
Figure 7. Attaching Wire Rope Assembly Ball End to Keyhole ..................................... WP 0029-10
Figure 8. Corner Wire Rope Assembly Installation ....................................................... WP 0029-11
Figure 9. Corner Pulley Removal .................................................................................. WP 0029-12
Figure 10. Wire Rope Assembly Retaining Block Removal .......................................... WP 0029-13
Figure 11. Turnbuckle Location ..................................................................................... WP 0029-14
Figure 12. Turnbuckle Removal .................................................................................... WP 0029-14
Figure 13. Threading Wire Rope Assembly Over Pulleys ............................................. WP 0029-16
Figure 14. Installing/Attaching Terminal Ends ............................................................... WP 0029-17
Figure 15. Installing Wire Rope Assembly Ball End ...................................................... WP 0029-18
Figure 16. Removing Slack from Wire Rope Assembly ................................................ WP 0029-19
Figure 17. Inside Supports for Wire Rope Assembly Repair ......................................... WP 0029-21
Figure 18. Turnbuckle Adjustment................................................................................. WP 0029-22
Figure 19. Installing Turnbuckle Locking Clips .............................................................. WP 0029-23
Figure 20. Installing Winch Cover.................................................................................. WP 0029-24
Winch, Drum, Hand-Operated, Service, Replace ................................................................. WP 0030
Figure 1. Hand-Operated Drum Winch .......................................................................... WP 0030-3
Figure 2. Hand-Operated Drum Winch Detail ............................................................... WP 0030-4
Angles, Carrier, Mounting, Replace ...................................................................................... WP 0031
Figure 1. Carrier Mounting Angle Replacement ............................................................ WP 0031-2
Door, Personnel Assembly, Replace, Inspect, Repair .......................................................... WP 0032
Figure 1. Personnel Door Assembly (Upper and Lower) Replacement ........................ WP 0032-3
Figure 2. Personnel Door Assembly Rubber Strip Replacement .................................. WP 0032-7
M923, 5 Ton Cargo Truck Mounting Kit, Remove, Repair .................................................... WP 0033
Figure 1. CBC Fastener Removal ................................................................................. WP 0033-1
Figure 2. CBC Fastener Size Locations ........................................................................ WP 0033-2
Figure 3. RTV Adhesive Removal ................................................................................. WP 0033-3
viii
TM 10-5411-248-13&P

Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 4. Lifting the CBC from Vehicle Bed................................................................... WP 0033-4
Mounting Kit, M1083, 5 Ton MTV, Remove, Repair ............................................................. WP 0034
Figure 1. Clamp Plate Assembly Removal .................................................................... WP 0034-2
Figure 2. Removing Vehicle Bed Plug ........................................................................... WP 0034-3
Figure 3. Removing the Tie-Down Post Assembly ........................................................ WP 0034-4
Figure 5. Lifting the CBC from the Vehicle Bed............................................................. WP 0034-6
Figure 6. Removing the Rear, Road Side, and Curb Side Mounting Plate Sections .... WP 0034-8
Figure 7. Removing the Front Mounting Plate Section ................................................. WP 0034-9
Mounting Kit, M1095, 5 Ton MTV Trailer, Remove, Repair .................................................. WP 0035
Figure 1. Removal of Clamp Plate Assembly ................................................................ WP 0035-2
Figure 2. CBC Gusset Plats Removal ........................................................................... WP 0035-2
Figure 4. Lifting the CBC from the Trailer Bed .............................................................. WP 0035-4
Figure 5. Removing the Rear, Road Side, and Curb Side Mounting Plate Sections .... WP 0035-6
Figure 6. Removing the Front Mounting Plate Section ................................................. WP 0035-6
Dented Skins and Core, Repair ............................................................................................ WP 0036
Figure 1. Inserting Adhesive, Two-part Epoxy in Drilled Holes ..................................... WP 0036-3
Figure 2. Using Putty Knife to Fill Dent ......................................................................... WP 0036-4
Punctured Skins and Core, Repair ....................................................................................... WP 0037
Figure 1. Repairs to Small Punctures with Minimal Core Damage ............................... WP 0037-4
Figure 2. Damage to Single Skin Repair ....................................................................... WP 0037-6
Figure 3. Puncture Through Both Skins ........................................................................ WP 0037-11
Blind Rivet, Replace .............................................................................................................. WP 0038
Figure 1. Blind Rivet Replacement ................................................................................ WP 0038-3
Manually Extending the Upper Section of the CBC .............................................................. WP 0039
Figure 1. Manually Extending the Upper Section of the CBC ....................................... WP 0039-2
ix
TM 10-5411-248-13&P

Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Threaded Inserts Non-Potted (Non-Adhesive Encapsulated), Repair .................................. WP 0040
Table 1. Insert Drill Sizes............................................................................................... WP 0040-1
Figure 1. Non-Potted (Non-Adhesive Encapsulated) Insert Replacement .................... WP 0040-2
Figure 2. Hand-Operated Insert Installation Tools ........................................................ WP 0040-2
Figure 3. Threading the Threaded Insert Fastener ....................................................... WP 0040-3
Figure 4. Inserting Threaded Insert into Hole in CBC Panel ......................................... WP 0040-3
Table 2. Thread Sizes ................................................................................................... WP 0040-4
Figure 5. Installing Threaded Insert ............................................................................... WP 0040-4
Figure 6. Removal of Threaded Insert Installation Tool ................................................ WP 0040-4
Caulked Sections, Repair...................................................................................................... WP 0041
Figure 1. Caulking Repaired Section ............................................................................. WP 0041-2
Paint and Refinishing Repair ................................................................................................ WP 0042
Table 1. Paint Data for Cargo Bed Covers .................................................................... WP 0042-1
CHAPTER 6 - PARTS INFORMATION
Repair Parts and Special Tools List (RPSTL) Introduction ................................................... WP 0043
Table 1. SMR Code Explanation .......................................................................................... WP 0043-2
GROUP 00 Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Type IVA1 ................................................................. WP 0044
Figure 1.Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Type IVA1 (Sheet 1 of 2) .......................................... WP 0044-1
Figure 1. Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Type IVA1 (Sheet 2 of 2) ........................................ WP 0044-2
GROUP 01 Assembly, Top .................................................................................................. WP 0045
Figure 2. Assembly, Top (Sheet 1 of 2) ......................................................................... WP 0045-1
Figure 2. Assembly, Top (Sheet 2 of 2) ......................................................................... WP 0045-2
GROUP 02 Assembly, Bottom ............................................................................................. WP 0046
Figure 3. Assembly, Bottom (Exterior) (Sheet 1 of 4).................................................... WP 0046-1
Figure 3. Assembly, Bottom (Interior)(Sheet 2 of 4) ...................................................... WP 0046-2
Figure 3. Assembly, Bottom (Corner Assembly) (Sheet 3 of 4) .................................... WP 0046-3
Figure 3. Assembly, Bottom (Carrier Mounting Angle and Blockout Panel) (Sheet 4 of 4)..........
………………………………………………………………………………………………….WP 0046-4
GROUP 03 Assembly, Door, Personnel .............................................................................. WP 0047
Figure 4. Assembly, Door, Personnel (Sheet 1 of 2) ..................................................... WP 0047-1
Figure 4. Assembly, Door, Personnel (Sheet 2 of 2) ..................................................... WP 0047-2
GROUP 04 Mounting Kit, M923, 5 Ton Cargo Truck ........................................................... WP 0048
Figure 5. Mounting Kit, M923, 5 Ton Cargo Truck ........................................................ WP 0048-2
GROUP 05 Mounting Kit, M1083, 5 Ton MTV ..................................................................... WP 0049
Figure 6. Mounting Kit, M1083, 5 Ton MTV ................................................................... WP 0049-2
x
TM 10-5411-248-13&P

Page No.
WP Sequence No.
GROUP 06 M1095, 5 Ton MTV Trailer Mounting Kit........................................................... WP 0050
Figure 7. M1095, 5 Ton MTV Trailer Mounting Kit ........................................................ WP 0050-2
National Stock Number Index ............................................................................................... WP 0051
Part Number Index ................................................................................................................ WP 0052
CHAPTER 7 - SUPPORTING INFORMATION
References ............................................................................................................................ WP 0053
Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) Introduction ................................................................ WP 0054
Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC).................................................................................... WP 0055
Table 1. MAC for Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Type IVA1 ................................................. WP 0055-1
Table 2. Tools and Test Equipment for Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Type IVA1 ............... WP 0055-4
Table 3. Remarks for Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Type IVA1 ........................................... WP 0055-5
Components of End Item (COEI) and Basic Issue Items (BII) List ....................................... WP 0056
Table 1. Components of End Item List .......................................................................... WP 0056-2
Table 2. Basic Issue Items List ...................................................................................... WP 0056-4
Expendable and Durable Items List ...................................................................................... WP 0057
Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List ................................................................ WP 0057-1
xi
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO OBTAIN TECHNICAL MANUALS
When a new system is introduced to the Army inventory, it is the responsibility of the receiving units to notify and
inform the Unit Publications Clerk that a Technical Manual is available for the new system. Throughout the life
cycle of the new system, the Distribution Center DOL-W will also provide updates and changes to the Technical
Manual.
To receive new Technical Manuals or change packages to existing Technical Manuals (TM) for fielded equipment,
provide the Unit Publications Clerk the full Technical Manual number, title, date of publication, and number of
copies required. The Unit Publications Clerk will justify the request through the Unit Publications Officer. When
the request is approved, the Unit Publications Clerk will use DA Form 12-R to order the series of Technical
Manuals from the Army Publishing Directorate (APD).
Instructions for Unit Publications Clerk
Obtain DA Form 12-R and request a publications account from the APD Web site at http://www.apd.army.mil.
Once on the Website, click on the “Orders/Subscriptions/Reports” tab. From the dropdown menu, select
“Establish an Account,” then select “Tutorial” and follow the instructions in the tutorial presentation.
Complete information for obtaining Army publications can be found in DA PAM 25-33.
ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL

This Manual contains General Information, Operating Instructions, Operator Preventive Maintenance Checks and
Services (PCMS), Troubleshooting, and Maintenance/Repair instructions for the Cargo Bed Cover (CBC), Type
IVA1, 5 Ton Cargo Truck, MTV, and MTV Trailer.
Manual Content and Coverage.
Chapter 1 contains introductory information on the CBC and its associated equipment as well as a theory of
operation. Chapter 2 includes operating instructions under usual and unusual conditions. Chapter 3 contents
include operator troubleshooting. Chapter 4 contains Operator Maintenance instructions including PMCS
procedures. Chapter 5 contains Field Maintenance instructions. Chapter 6 contains the Repair Parts and Special
Tools List (RPSTL) which identifies those parts or tools which are unique to the operation and maintenance of this
equipment. Chapter 7 contains references and other supporting information.
Manual Organization and Page Numbering System.
The Manual is divided into five major chapters that detail the topics mentioned above. Within each chapter are
work packages covering a wide range of topics. Each work package is numbered sequentially starting at page 1.
The work package has its own page numbering scheme and is independent of the page numbering used by other
work packages. Each page of a work package has a page number of the form XXXX YY-ZZ where XXXX is the
work package number (e.g. 0010 is work package 10) and YY is reserved to permit unlimited expansion of the TM
to incorporate new configuration data without affecting the WP sequence numbers already assigned, and to
permit adding one or more WPs between any two existing WPs during any revision cycle. ZZ represents the
number of the page within that work package. A page number such as 0010 00-1/2 blank means that page 1
contains information but page 2 of that work package has been intentionally left blank.
xii
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
Text and Illustrations.

Descriptive text and procedures are always accompanied by one or more illustrations. The text or procedure will
be annotated with find numbers such as “(1)” that correspond to a specific callout on the illustration. In this
technical manual, the descriptive text or procedure will always precede the illustration. Therefore, when reading a
section in the manual, always look for the accompanying illustration to follow the section.
Finding Information.
The Table of Contents permits the reader to find information in the manual quickly. The reader should start here
first when looking for a specific topic. The Table of Contents lists the topics contained within each chapter and the
Work Package Sequence Number where it can be found.
Example: If the reader were looking for instructions on “Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services,” which is
an Operator Maintenance topic, the Table of Contents indicates that Operator Maintenance information can be
found in Chapter 4. Scanning down the listings for Chapter 4, “Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services”
information can be found in WP 0017 (i.e. Work Package 0017).
The Repair Parts and Special Tools List (RPSTL) is used in the performance of maintenance. The list also
includes parts which must be removed for replacement of the authorized parts. Work Package (WP) 0043
provides detail instructions on how to use the RPSTLs contained in this manual while WPs 0044 through 0053
provide the RPSTLs, to include a National Stock Number (NSN) and Part Number Indexes.
There is not a Glossary at the back of this Manual.
An Alphabetical Index can be found at the back of the Manual. It lists specific topics with the corresponding work
package.
xiii/xiv blank
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION, AND

THEORY OF OPERATION
FOR
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0001
OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE

GENERAL INFORMATION
SCOPE
This Technical Manual contains instructions for the operation, as well as installation, preventive/corrective
maintenance for the CBC, Type IVA1, M923, 5 Ton Cargo Truck, M1083, Medium Tactical Vehicle (MTV), and
M1095, MTV Trailer (Figure 1, Item 1), as well as its installation mounting plates (Figure 2, Item 1) and (Figure 2,
Item 2) used when the CBC is installed on the M1083, 5 Ton MTV or M1095, 5 Ton MTV Trailer.
Type of Manual: Operator and Field Maintenance Manual (including Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists).
Equipment Nomenclature and National Stock Numbers: Cargo Bed Cover (CBC), Type IVA1, NSN 5411-01-559-
8738 (Camouflage), NSN 5411-01-559-8741 (Sand).
WARNING
The CBC is not a shelter system and is not to be used to transport personnel or sentry dogs.
There is a suffocation hazard. Personnel can only work inside the CBC when the unit is deployed
and the ventilators and doors are open. Failure to comply may result in injury or death to
personnel.
Purpose of Equipment: The CBC, Type IVA1, 5 Ton Cargo Truck, MTV, and MTV Trailer is a hard shell enclosure
designed to provide a secure and weather tight enclosure for equipment and is offered in either camouflage or
sand color configurations. The CBC features a built-in mechanism to raise or lower the upper section, which can
be accomplished by a team of two in 20 minutes.
Points of Reference: The CBC is mounted to the bed of the vehicle using mounting plates (Figure 2) so that the
rear door of the CBC is located at the tailgate of the vehicle. The front of the CBC is the end opposite the door
and mounts on the vehicle bed so that it is directly behind the cab of the vehicle. In this technical manual, the
term “road side” will refer to the left side (Figure 1) of the CBC as the operator faces the rear door. The term
“curb side” will refer to the right side of the CBC as the operator faces the rear door. It is assumed that the
vehicle is equipped with a steering wheel on the left side as the driver is sitting in the vehicle.
ROAD FRONT
SIDE
Figure 1. Cargo Bed Cover (CBC), Points of Reference.

CURB
SIDE
REAR
Figure 1. Cargo Bed Cover (CBC).
0001-1
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0001
VEHICLE MOUNTING PLATE

FOR M1083, 5 TON MTV
VEHICLE MOUNTING PLATE

FOR M1095, 5 TON MTV
TRAILER
Figure 2. CBC Mounting Plates.
0001-2
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0001
MAINTENANCE FORMS, RECORDS, AND REPORTS
Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance will be those prescribed by DA
PAM 750-8, The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual.
REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS (EIRs)
If your CBC needs improvement, let us know. Send us an EIR. You, the user, are the only one who can tell us
what you don’t like about your equipment. Let us know why you don’t like the design or performance. If you have
Internet access, the easiest and fastest way to report problems or suggestions is to go to
https://aeps.ria.army.mil/aepspublic.cfm (scroll down and choose the “Submit Quality Deficiency Report” bar).
The Internet form lets you choose to submit an Equipment Improvement Recommendation (EIR), a Product
Quality Deficiency Report (PQDR) or a Warranty Claim Action (WCA). You can send your SF 368 via e-mail,
regular mail, or facsimile using the addresses/facsimile numbers specified in DA PAM 750-8, the Army
Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual. We will send you a reply.
CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL (CPC)
Corrosion Prevention and Control (CPC) of Army materiel is a continuing concern. It is important that any
corrosion problems with this item be reported so that the problem can be corrected and improvements can be
made to prevent the problem in future items.
Corrosion specifically occurs with metals. It is an electrochemical process that causes the degradation of metals.
It is commonly caused by exposure to moisture, acids, bases, or salts. An example is the rusting of iron.
Corrosion damage in metals can be seen, depending on the metal, as tarnishing, pitting, fogging, surface residue,
and/or cracking.
Plastics, composites, and rubbers can also degrade. Dehydration is caused by thermal (heat), oxidation
(oxygen), or photolytic (light, typically UV) processes. The most common exposures are excessive heat or light.
Damage from these processes will appear as cracking, softening, swelling, and/or breaking.
SF 368, Product Quality Deficiency Report should be submitted to the address specified in DA PAM 750-8, The
Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual.
DESTRUCTION OF ARMY MATERIEL TO PREVENT ENEMY USE
For procedures to destroy this equipment to prevent its use by the enemy, refer to TM 750-244-3, Procedures for
Destruction of Army Equipment to Prevent Enemy Use (Mobility Equipment Command).
PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT
Administrative Storage. The upper section of the CBC should be extended for storage or shipment. When the
CBC is to be transported such that the top needs to be retracted, it will be extended after transportation and
before storage or operations. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) will be performed before
equipment issued to and used by Army activities enters administrative storage. When equipment is removed from
administrative storage, PMCS should be performed to ensure operational readiness.
CAUTION
The CBC is not to be stacked on top of one another when being stored or shipped. This could
cause damage to the system and prevent normal operations of the CBC.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
The CBC, Type IVA1 is warranted for 12 months. The warranty starts on the date found in block 23 of DA Form
2408-9, Equipment Control Record. Report all defects to your supervisor, who will take appropriate action.
0001-3
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0001
NOMENCLATURE CROSS-REFERENCE LIST
Table 1. Nomenclature Cross-Reference List.
Common Name Official Nomenclature
CBC Cargo Bed Cover (CBC), Type IVA1, 5 Ton Cargo Truck, MTV, and MTV
Trailer
Folding Step Pole Step

Mounting Plate Vehicle Mounting Plate
M1083, 5 Ton MTV 5 Ton Medium Tactical Vehicle
M1095, 5 Ton MTV Trailer 5 Ton Medium Tactical Vehicle Trailer

Roof Handhold Bail Handle
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS
Table 2. List of Abbreviations and Acronyms.
Abbreviation/Acronym Meaning Abbreviation/Acronym Meaning
Additional
AAL Authorization Cm centimeter
List
American
Component of
ASTM Standard COEI
End Item
Test Method
Corrosion
Basic Issue
BII CPC Prevention
Item
Control
Commercial
and
CAGEC Cu ft. Cubic Foot
Government
Entity Code
Chemical
Active Degree(s)
CARC °C
Reactive Celsius
Coating
Cargo Bed
CBC DECON Decontamination
Cover
Chemical, Equipment
Biological, Improvement
CBRN EIR Recommendation
Radiological,
Nuclear
0001-4
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0001
List of Abbreviations/Acronyms - Continued.
Table 2. List of Abbreviations and Acronyms - Continued.
Degree(s)
°F Lbs Pounds
Fahrenheit
Line Replaceable
Fig. Figure LRU
Unit
Functional
Medium Tactical
FGC Group MTV
Vehicle
Code
In
IAW Accordance m3 Cubic Meters
With
Maintenance
In. Inch(s) MAC
Allocation Chart
Joint Table
JTA of MEK Methylethylketone
Allowances
Kg Kilogram(s) Mm Millimeter
Material Safety
Lbs Pounds MSDS
Data Sheet
Modified Table of
Degree(s)
°F MTOE Organization and
Fahrenheit
Equipment
Next Higher
Fig. Figure NHA
Assembly
Functional
FGC Group NO. Number
Code
In
National Stock
IAW Accordance NSN
Number
With
Preventive
Maintenance
In. Inch(s) PMCS
Checks and
Services
Joint Table
JTA of P/N Part Number
Allowances
0001-5
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0001
List of Abbreviations/Acronyms - Continued.

Table 2. List of Abbreviations and Acronyms - Continued.
Petroleum,
Kg Kilogram(s) POL Oil, and
Lubricant
Threshold
Limit Value-
Quantity
Qty. Req. TLV/TWA Time
Required
Weighted
Average
Table of
Repair Parts
Organization
RPSTL and Special TOE
and
Tools List
Equipment
Room
Unit of
RTV Temperature U/M
Measure
Vulcanizing
Source, Unique
Maintenance Identifier/
SMR UID
&
Recoverability Identification
Unified
Specialized
SRA UNC Course
Repair Activity
Thread
Unified Fine
T Ton(s) UNF
Thread
The Army
Maintenance Usable On
TAMMS UOC
Management Code
System
To Be Unit Under
TBD UUT
Determined Test
Table of
Distribution Work
TDA WP
and Package
Allowances
TMDE Test,
Measurement,
Diagnostic
Equipment
0001-6
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0001
SAFETY, CARE, AND HANDLING
When working with the CBC, always pay attention to Warnings, Cautions, and Notes appearing throughout the
manual. They will appear prior to applicable procedures. Failure to read, understand, and follow these
precautions may result in serious injury or death to personnel, or damage to equipment.
COMMON TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
For authorized common tools and equipment, refer to the Modified Table of Organization and Equipment (MTOE),
CTA 50-970, Expendable/Durable Items (Except: Medical, Class V, Repair Parts, and Heraldic Items), or CTA 8-
100, Army Medical Department Expendable/Durable Items, as applicable to your unit.
Repair parts are listed and illustrated in the repair parts and special tools list located in Work Packages (WPs)
0043 through 0050.
Tools and test equipment associated with the CBC are listed in the Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) in WP
0055.
There are no special tools, Test, Measurement, Diagnostic Equipment (TMDE), and support equipment required
for the operation of the CBC.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0001-7/8 blank
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0002

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA
EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES, AND FEATURES
The Cargo Bed Cover, Type IVA1 is a truck or trailer mounted CBC which contains: an Expandable Upper
Section, Lower Stationary Section, Personnel Access Door, and Vehicle Mounting Plate. The CBC walls are
constructed of light-weight, high-strength sandwich panels utilizing aluminum facing sheets bonded to aluminum
honeycomb core. The Upper section lowers for travel/storage. The Personnel Access Door operates in height-
extended and retracted mode. The CBC carrier mounting provisions require specific mounting kits and are simple
to install and remove.
The CBC is capable of internal air transport on vehicle and can also be air transported externally by use of hoist
fittings. Two helicopter sling cable rub strips are mounted along the full length of the CBC roof to protect the
cable and the CBC during external air transport. The door hardware permits opening from the inside of the CBC,
even if outside is padlocked.
The CBC provides security for installed contents, environmental protection of cargo space, and is chemical agent
resistant. There is a ventilation opening provided on both sides of the CBC for air circulation.
The roof access steps and handhold provide access to the non-skid roof. External power and signal entry ports
are provided for power and signal cable access into the CBC.
When the outside door handle (Figure 21, Item 2) is in the horizontal position, it may be padlocked (Figure 21,
Item 3) from the outside. If the personnel door assembly (Figure 21, Item 1) is, for any reason, padlocked with
personnel inside, they may exit the CBC by using the inner door handle (Figure 20, Item 2) of the personnel door
assembly. The inner door handle (Figure 20, Item 2)has a center case latch with an override feature which
permits the handle to be rotated from the inside of the CBC, even if the outside door handle (Figure 21, Item 2)is
padlocked.
If the personnel are padlocked inside the CBC and the tailgate of the vehicle is up, a secondary exit can be
created by separating the lower door panel from the upper door panel and rotating the inner door handle. In this
case, the lower door panel is removed from the door as detailed in the section entitled “USING THE
SECONDARY EXIT IF LOWER DOOR SECTION IS BLOCKED OR CANNOT BE OPENED FROM THE
INTERIOR OF THE CBC.”
The personnel door may also be opened and closed from the inside of the CBC. When in the closed and locked
position, the inner door handle (Figure 20, Item 2) is rotated counterclockwise and will point up at approximately a
45° angle from horizontal.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS
Expandable Upper Section
The expandable upper section (Figure 1, Item 1) of the CBC, Type IVA1, 5 Ton Cargo Truck, Medium Tactical
Vehicle (MTV), and MTV Trailer can be extended while in operational mode or can be in a height-retracted mode
for air transport.
Ventilation Openings
Two ventilation ports (Figure 1, Item 2) mounted on the outside of the CBC provide flow-through air circulation
through the CBC. Air filters help to keep dust, dirt, and other debris from entering the CBC.
Lower Stationary Section
The lower section (Figure 1, Item 3) of the CBC remains stationary and is mounted to the cargo truck bed (or
vehicle mounting plate) by means of the carrier mounting angles.
0002-1
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0002
Location and Description of Major Components - Continued.
Helicopter Cable Rub Strip
Two helicopter sling cable rub strips (Figure 1, Item 4) are mounted along the full length of the CBC roof to protect
the cable and the CBC during external air transport.
Power and Signal Ports
The two power and signal ports (Figure 1, Item 5) on the front sidewall surfaces of the CBC permit power and
signal cables to be routed into and out of the CBC. Cover plates can be installed over the power and signal ports
when not in use.
Bail Handle
The roof handhold (Figure 1, Item 6) permits access to the roof of the CBC when using the roof access steps.
Roof Access Steps
Two upper and one lower roof access steps (Figure 1, Item 7) have hinged footpads that swing down to permit
personnel to climb the rear of the CBC and gain access to the roof.
Door Latch
The personnel door latch (Figure 1, Item 8) locks in place by rotating the center handle to a horizontal position.
The latch can be padlocked from the outside, protecting the internal contents of the CBC. Personnel who may be
inside a locked CBC can exit using the interior door handle.
Personnel Door Assembly
The personnel door assembly has an upper and lower portion that mate through a tongue-and-groove bracket,
and are secured with three threaded studs with hand knobs. When in height-retracted mode, the upper portion of
the personnel door acts as a secondary exit.
• The personnel door assembly upper (top) section (Figure 1, Item 13) provides a mounting base for the
door latch and is not normally removed.
• The personnel door assembly lower (bottom) section (Figure 1, Item 9) of the personnel door is removed
before the upper section of the CBC is lowered. This section is stowed in zee brackets mounted on the
underside of the CBC roof.
Winch/Cable System
The winch and cable system (Figure 1, Item 10) is mounted on the inside of the CBC and is accessed through the
personnel door. The winch mechanism permits the upper extendable section of the CBC to be raised to its
operating mode.
Lift/Locking Assemblies
Four upper section lift/locking assemblies (Figure 1, Item 11) are positioned in each of the four corners of the
CBC. They are used to provide rigid support of the upper section in its raised and deployed mode. They are also
used as jacks to raise the upper section to its final operational position.
Door Stop/Hold Open Device
Pivoting arm (Figure 1, Item 12) on the outside of the personnel door assembly that permits the door to be locked
in an open position.
0002-2
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0002
Location and Description of Major Components - Continued.
Lift Ring
There are four lift rings (Figure 1, Item 14) that permit the CBC to be hoisted for transport, movement, or
installation on the vehicle bed.
Carrier Mounting Angles
The carrier mounting angles are mounted to the front and rear lower walls of the CBC and have a series of holes
that interface with threaded inserts in the truck bed or holes in the vehicle mounting plate. A weather seal is
installed between the CBC and the truck bed or between the CBC and the mounting plate that prevents water
from entering the CBC when mounted to a vehicle. (Not illustrated)
Zee Mounting Plates
Zee mounting plates are mounted to the right and left lower walls of the CBC and have a series of holes that
interface with threaded inserts in the truck bed or holes in the vehicle mounting plate. A weather seal is installed
between the CBC and the truck bed or between the CBC and the mounting plate that prevents water from
entering the CBC when mounted to a vehicle. (Not illustrated)
0002-3
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0002
Location And Description Of Major Components - Continued.
ROAD SIDE VIEW

1 OF CBC
CURB SIDE VIEW

OF CBC
2
3 4
14
5
5 13
6
12
9 8
11
10
Figure 1. Location of Major Components.
0002-4
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0002
EQUIPMENT DATA
Table 1 provides technical and identification data pertaining to the CBC and its installation hardware.
Table 1. Equipment Specification Data.
CBC TARE WEIGHT:

Cargo Bed Cover ……………………………………………………………………….772 lbs (350.17 kg)
M923, 5 Ton Cargo Truck Configuration (See Note 1) .................................... 803 lbs (364.23 kg)
M1083 5 Ton MTV Configuration (See Note 1) ............................................... 912 lbs (413.68 kg)
M1095 5 Ton MTV Trailer Configuration (See Note 1) .................................... 897 lbs (406.87 kg)
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS (L x W x H):
Height-extended Mode……………...............154.00 x 87.00 x 74.87 to 75.25 inches (See Note 2)
Height-retracted Mode………………………………….154.00 x 87.00 x 39.44 inches (See Note 2)
INTERNAL DIMENSIONS (L X W X H):
Height-extended Mode.................................... 148.7 x 81.7 x 73.33 to 73.71 inches (See Note 2)
Height-retracted Mode .................................... 148.7 x 81.7 x 37.51 to 37.89 inches (See Note 2)
USABLE INTERIOR VOLUME:
Height-extended Mode...................................................................................... 516 cu ft (14.6 m3)
Height-retracted Mode ....................................................................................... 264 cu ft (7.5 m3)
Note 1: Weight of the production unit (including carrier mounting kit) is shown. The M1083 mounting kit
includes entry ladder.
Note 2: Special mounting plates for MTV configurations allow for use of existing mounting provisions on carrier
and increase height by their thickness.
COLOR CONFIGURATIONS:
Camouflage ……………………………………………………………………………NSN 5411-01-559-8738
Sand............……………………………………………………………………………NSN 5411-01-559-8741
INTERNAL AIR TRANSPORT:
C-130, C-17, C-5 ................................................................... Drive-on/Back-off; Back-on/Drive-off
STANDARD EQUIPMENT:
Carrier mounting provisions (requires specific mounting plates), secondary personnel exit, power and signal
entry ports, hoist fittings, two ventilation openings, environmental protection of cargo space, roof access steps
and handhold, personnel access door
CONSTRUCTION:
Light-weight, high-strength sandwich panels utilizing aluminum facing sheets bonded to aluminum honey-
comb
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0002-5/6 blank
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0003
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
THEORY OF OPERATION
GENERAL
The CBC is a light-weight, rigid cover which can be mounted to the cargo bed area of the M923, 5 Ton Cargo
Truck; as well as the M1083, 5 Ton Medium Tactical Vehicle (MTV), and M1095, 5 Ton MTV Trailer and provides
environmental protection and physical security for equipment carried by the vehicle.
CBC CONFIGURATIONS
The CBC (Figure 1, Item 1) mounts to the bed of the M923 5 T Cargo Truck, Cargo Truck (Figure 1, Item 2) by
means of plain nut blind rivets that are installed in the truck bed (Figure 1, Item 3). Carrier mounting angles and
door threshold installed around the base of the lower stationary section of the CBC are used to bolt the CBC to
the bed of the cargo truck.
Figure 1. CBC With M923, 5 Ton Cargo Truck.
0003-1
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0003
CBC Configurations - Continued.
When the CBC is to be installed on the M1083, 5 Ton MTV (Figure 2, Item 2) or M1095, 5 Ton MTV Trailer
(Figure 2, Item 1), a vehicle-specific mounting plate (Figure 2, Item 3) must be installed on the bed of the MTV or
MTV Trailer. The mounting plate is designed in such a way as to not require permanent modifications to the
M1083, 5 Ton MTV or M1095, 5 Ton MTV Trailer. Once the mounting plate is installed on the bed of the M1083,
5 Ton MTV or M1095, 5 Ton MTV Trailer, the CBC is mounted to the vehicle mounting plate via the carrier
mounting angles and door threshold.
3
3
CBC with M1083, 5 Ton MTV

CBC with M1095, 5 Ton MTV Trailer
Figure 2. CBC MTV and MTV Trailer Configurations.

Operational Concept
The CBC (Figure 3, Item 1) consists of an upper extendable section (Figure 3, Item 4) and a lower stationary
section (Figure 3, Item 5). It is the lower stationary section (Figure 3, Item 5) that is mounted to the truck bed or
vehicle mounting plate. The upper extendable section (Figure 3, Item 4) can be lowered for air transport or
extended for operational use.
The CBC (Figure 3, Item 1) is extended by means of a winch and cable system (Figure 3, Item 16) installed inside
the CBC (Figure 3, Item 1). It is locked in the extended position and supported by four lift/locking assemblies
(Figure 3, Item 11) and cable tension.
0003-2
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0003
WARNING
The CBC should not be entered prior to raising the upper section. Access to the winch handle
should be from the outside of the CBC only. Failure to adhere to this warning may result in injury
or death to personnel.
To extend the upper extendable section (Figure 3, Item 4) of the CBC (Figure 3, Item 1), access the winch handle
through the upper portion (Figure 3, Item 20) of the personnel door assembly. Once a person has accessed the
winch handle through the upper portion (Figure 3, Item 20) of the personnel door assembly, the upper extendable
section (Figure 3, Item 4) of the CBC (Figure 3, Item 1) is extended using the ratcheting handle (Figure 3, Item
12) attached to the winch and cable assembly (Figure 3, Item 13). As the handle is turned, the upper extendable
section (Figure 3, Item 4) extends upward. The upper extendable section (Figure 3, Item 4) is raised until the
mark (Figure 3, Item 15) stenciled on the inside wall of the upper extendable section (Figure 3, Item 4) is visible.
When the upper extendable section (Figure 3, Item 4) has been raised to the stenciled warning mark (Figure 3,
Item 15), a second person removes the cotter pin (Figure 3, Item 10) and clevis pin (Figure 3, Item 9) that secures
the lift/locking assemblies (Figure 3, Item 11) in each corner of the CBC to the ceiling of the upper extendable
section (Figure 3, Item 4). A cotter pin (Figure 3, Item 17) that secures the handle (Figure 3, Item 18) to the main
body of the lift/locking assembly (Figure 3, Item 11) is also removed. The handle (Figure 3, Item 18) is positioned
so that it is 90° from the main body of the lift/locking assembly.
Each lift/locking assembly (Figure 3, Item 11) is then swung down from its stowed position on the ceiling and
rotated 180° counterclockwise into position over the lower section corner fitting pulley assembly (Figure 3, Item
16) located in each corner of the CBC. The base (Figure 3, Item 14) at the bottom of the lift/locking assembly
(Figure 3, Item 11) is positioned over the corner fitting pulley assembly (Figure 3, Item 16) on the lower section.
Pins (Figure 3, Item 8) protruding from the base (Figure 3, Item 14) of the lift/locking assembly (Figure 3, Item 11)
are aligned with slots located in the interlocking extrusion at the corner fitting pulley assembly (Figure 3, Item 16).
The handle (Figure 3, Item 18) is then swung up and locked into position using the cotter pin (Figure 3, Item17)
removed earlier.
The CBC (Figure 3, Item 1) is now in its fully-extended and locked position. The personnel door assembly (lower)
(Figure 3, Item 19) is stored in an area on the inside ceiling surface when the CBC (Figure 3, Item 1) is in the
retracted mode. The lower panel is installed when the CBC (Figure 3, Item 1) is fully extended.
Once the CBC (Figure 3, Item 1) is in its fully-extended and operational position, the personnel door assembly
(lower) (Figure 3, Item 19) must have its hinge relocated from its stowed position before installing the personnel
door assembly (lower) (Figure 3, Item 19) below the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 3, Item 20) using
three hand knob screws (Figure 3, Item 21), completing the personnel door assembly (Figure 3, Item 3). A door
stop/hold open device (Figure 3, Item 2) is provided on the outside of the personnel door to lock the door into an
open position, if desired.
Ventilation ports (Figure 3, Item 23) are provided on the left and right sidewalls of the CBC (Figure 3, Item 1)
permitting air to enter the interior.
Signal and power entry ports (Figure 3, Item 22) are provided on the sidewalls of the CBC (Figure 3, Item 1) that
permit power and signal cables to enter and/or exit from the CBC (Figure 3, Item 1). Block out panels on the
inside of the CBC (Figure 3, Item 1) are provided that allow the ports to be covered when not in use.
Three roof access steps (Figure 3, Item 7) are located to the right of the personnel door assembly at the rear of
the CBC (Figure 3, Item 1) to provide a foothold for personnel climbing to the roof of the CBC (Figure 3, Item 1). A
handhold (Figure 3, Item 6) is installed on the top of the CBC (Figure 3, Item 1) to assist personnel in climbing
onto the roof. Lift rings (Figure 3, Item 24) are provided on each corner of the roof to permit the CBC (Figure 3,
Item 1) to be lifted into position or removed from the bed of the M923, 5 Ton Cargo Truck, the M1083, 5 Ton MTV
or M1095, 5 Ton MTV Trailer.
0003-3
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0003
1 2
4
REAR VIEW
OF CBC WITH
PERSONNEL
5
DOOR
24 CLOSED
23
22 6
21
20
19
11
8
18 15
9
17
11
16 14
10
13
INSIDE VIEW OF CBC
12 SHOWING LIFT/LOCKING
ASSEMBLY STOWAGE
LOCATION ON CEILING
Figure 3. CBC Operational Concept.

END OF WORK PACKAGE
0003-4
CHAPTER 2
OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0004
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
INTRODUCTION
The following tables and illustrations provide the description and use of the controls and indicators pertaining to
personnel door, winch and lift/locking assemblies, and labels/instruction plates of the Cargo Bed Cover (CBC).
Controls
1
5
4
3 2
Figure 1. Personnel Door Controls.
Table 1. Personnel Door Controls.
KEY CONTROL FUNCTION
Allows the door to be pulled closed from the vehicle bed to

1 PULL STRAP
permit grasping the inside door latch handle.
Fasten the upper section of the personnel door to the lower

2 HAND KNOB SCREWS
section personnel door.
Permits the personnel door to be opened or closed from the

3 INSIDE DOOR LATCH HANDLE
inside of the CBC.
Permits the personnel door to be opened or closed from the

4 OUTSIDE DOOR LATCH HANDLE
outside of the CBC.
DOOR STOP/HOLD OPEN

5 Allows the personnel door to be locked in an open position.
DEVICE
0004-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0004
INTRODUCTION - Continued. 1
2
1 3
8
6
Figure 2. Winch and Lift/Locking Assembly Controls.
Table 2. Winch and Lift/Locking Assembly Controls.
KEY CONTROL FUNCTION
Used to secure the CBC in its extended operating

1 LIFT/LOCKING ASSEMBLY
position.
Used to lock the lift/locking assembly in a vertical

2 LIFT/LOCKING ASSEMBLY HANDLE
position.
LIFT/LOCKING ASSEMBLY BASE PLATE Engage in the interlock extrusion on the lower section of
3
ALIGNMENT PINS the CBC to lock and align the lift/locking assembly.
LIFT/LOCKING ASSEMBLY ROOF Provides a docking mechanism for the lift/locking

4
STOWAGE BLOCK assembly when the CBC is in retracted mode.
Controls winch assembly and is used to raise and lower

5 RATCHET HANDLE
upper expandable section of CBC.
Engages with the corner fitting pulley assembly on the

6 LIFT/LOCKING ASSEMBLY BASE PLATE
lower section to align the lift/locking assembly.
Engages the base of the lift/locking assembly to support

7 CORNER FITTING PULLEY ASSEMBLY
and align.
LIFT/LOCKING ASSEMBLY HANDLE Used to release the handle from the main body tube of
8
RELEASE COTTER PIN the lift/locking assembly.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0004-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required References
Operator (91B) (2) WP 0007
Crane Operator (21F) (1) WP 0017
WP 0018
EXTENDING THE CBC TO AN OPERATIONAL POSITION
Instructions for the installation of the CBC and Vehicle Mounting Plate (if required) on the bed of a vehicle are
covered in WP 0018 entitled “Service Upon Receipt.”
All instructions for normal operations covered in WP 0005 pertain to the M923 Cargo Truck, M1083 MTV, and
1095 MTV trailer. Only the M923 Cargo Truck is illustrated.
CAUTION
Any excess snow or ice should be cleared from the roof of the CBC before the CBC is raised or
lowered. Excess snow or ice will increase the weight of the top assembly of the CBC and place
excessive strain on the lift/lowering components.
The CBC cannot be raised or lowered while ice remains on the sidewalls. All ice should be
removed from the sidewall before the CBC is raised or lowered. Failure to follow this caution may
result in equipment damage.
1. Lower the tailgate (Figure 1, Item 6) on the M923 5 Ton Cargo Truck (Figure 1, Item 1).
2. Remove the ladder (Figure 1, Item 7) from its storage area on the inside surface of the tailgate (Figure 1, Item
6) of the cargo truck (Figure 1, Item 1) or under the cargo bed of the trailer.
WARNING
Ensure the ladder is secure and on level ground before stepping on it. Failure to do so could
cause the ladder to fall and injure personnel stepping on it.
Ensure the vehicle is on level ground and the wheels are chocked before deploying the ladder.
Failure to do so could cause the ladder to disengage and cause injury to personnel using it.
3. Install the ladder hooks (Figure 1, Item 2) in position on the rear of the cargo truck (Figure 1, Item 1) or trailer.
4. Stand on the ladder (Figure 1, Item 7).
5. Rotate the outside door handle (Figure 1, Item 5) fully clockwise and then back to a horizontal position.
6. Open the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 1, Item 5) of the CBC (Figure 1, Item 8).
0005-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
Extending the CBC to an Operational Position - Continued.
WARNING
The CBC top assembly should not be entered prior to raising the top assembly. Access to the
winch handle should be from the outside of the CBC only. Failure to adhere to this warning may
result in severe injury to personnel. If winch is inoperable, CBC upper section can be extended
by using a hoist/sling.
7. Access the winch (Figure 1, Item 3) through the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 1, Item 5).
7 1
6
3
2
Figure 1. Securing Ladder on CBC.
0005-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
8. Locate the winch assembly (Figure 2, Item 2) located inside the left side of the personnel door assembly
(Figure 2, Item 1).
Figure 2. Winch Location Inside CBC.

9. Install the ratchet handle (Figure 3, Item 4) by engaging the male portion (Figure 3, Item 3) of the handle with
the female socket (Figure 3, Item 2) located just inside the round opening in the winch cover (Figure 3, Item
1).
10. Move the lever on the back of the ratchet handle (Figure 3, Item 4) so that the handle engages positively
when turned in a clockwise direction.
Figure 3. Installing the Ratchet Handle.
0005-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
WARNING
Do not raise the upper portion of the CBC more than one inch past the warning mark on the
sidewall of the CBC. Raising the upper portion one inch beyond this mark will cause undue
stress to the cables and may cause the cables to snap and the top assembly of the CBC to drop.
Failure to stop at the warning mark, when extending the CBC, may result in severe injury to
personnel.
11. Begin turning the ratchet handle (Figure 3, Item 4) in a clockwise direction until the upper extendable section
(Figure 4, Item 3) of the CBC begins to rise.
12. Continue to raise the upper portion of the CBC until the warning mark line (Figure 4, Item 2) is visible on the
sidewall of the CBC, just to the right of the winch assembly.
13. Stop turning the ratchet handle as soon as the warning mark (Figure 4, Item 2) is visible.
14. Leave the ratchet handle (Figure 3, Item 4) in place on the winch.
Figure 4. Warning Mark.

END OF TASK
0005-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
POSITIONING THE LIFT/LOCKING ASSEMBLIES
WARNING
Be sure to support the lift/locking assembly with a free hand before removing the clevis pin that
secures the assembly to the ceiling mounted stowage block. Removing the clevis pin without
supporting the lift/locking assembly will permit the assembly to swing down freely, causing a
possible injury to personnel.
1. Locate the lift/locking assembly (Figure 5, Item 1) nearest the winch, located in its stowed position on the
underside of the ceiling (Figure 5, Item 2).
2. Remove the cotter pin (Figure 5, Item 5) that secures the lift/locking assembly (Figure 5, Item 1) to the
stowage block (Figure 5, Item 4) installed on the ceiling (Figure 5, Item 2) of the upper extendable section
while supporting the lift/locking assembly (Figure 5, Item 1) with a free hand.
3. Pull the clevis pin (Figure 5, Item 3) out.
2
5 3
Figure 5. Locating the Lift/Locking Assembly.

4. Allow the lift/locking assembly (Figure 6, Item 1) to swing down and come to rest.
1
2
Figure 6. Lowering the Lift/Locking Assembly.

0005-5
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
Positioning the Lift/Locking Assemblies - Continued.
5. Replace the clevis pin (Figure 7, Item 3) in the stowage block (Figure 7, Item 2).
6. Install the cotter pin (Figure 7, Item 1).
1
3
Figure 7. Stowage Block.

7. Rotate the lift/locking assembly (Figure 8, Item 1) 180° from its stowed position.
8. Remove the cotter pin (Figure 8, Item 3) that secures the handle (Figure 8, Item 2) to the main body of the
lift/locking assembly (Figure 8, Item 1).
9. After rotating 180°, swing the handle (Figure 8, Item 2) down until it forms a 90° angle with the main body of
the lift/locking assembly (Figure 8, Item 1).
Figure 8. Rotating the Lift/Locking Assembly.

10. Install the cotter pin (Figure 8, Item 3) in the clevis pin that secures the handle (Figure 8, Item 2).
11. Place the base (Figure 9, Item 1) of the lift/locking assembly (Figure 8, Item 1) over the corner fitting pulley
assembly (Figure 9, Item 2) on the lower section of the CBC (Figure 8, Item 3).
0005-6
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
NOTE
It may be necessary to move the handle (Figure 9, Item 2) up and down in a wiggling motion to
get the base (Figure 9, Item 3) of the lift/locking assembly (Figure 9, Item 1) into the desired
position.
12. Align pins (Figure 9, Item 4)protruding from base (Figure 9, Item 1) of the lift/locking assembly (Figure 9, Item
2) with slots located in the interlock extrusion at the corner fitting pulley assembly (Figure 9, Item 3).
4
3
Figure 9. Align Pins in the Lift/Locking Assembly.
CAUTION
Ensure that the pins protruding from the base line up with the slots on the interlock extrusion. If
the pins are outside or on top of the interlock extrusion, it could damage the CBC.
13. Engage the pins (Figure 9, Item 4) on the base (Figure 9, Item 1)of the lift/locking assembly (Figure 9, Item 2)
in the slots located in the interlock extrusion at the corner fitting pulley assembly (Figure 9, Item 2).
14. Remove the cotter pin (Figure 10, Item 3) that secures the handle (Figure 10, Item 2).
CAUTION
Do not force the handle of the lift/locking assembly into place. Forcing the handle up could
damage the CBC.
15. Swing the handle (Figure 10, Item 2) up.
Figure 10. Locking the Handle of the Lift/Locking Assembly.

0005-7
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
16. Lock it into position by positioning the hole in the handle (Figure 10, Item 2) over the portion of the clevis pin
protruding from the main body tube of the lift/locking assembly (Figure 10, Item 1).
17. Replace the cotter pin (Figure10, Item 3) removed earlier to secure the handle (Figure 10, Item 2).
18. Repeat the above sequence moving clockwise inside the CBC for each of the remaining three lift/locking
assemblies in each corner of the CBC.
19. Once all four lift/locking assemblies are locked in position, the CBC will be in its fully-extended and locked
position
END OF TASK
16B
ASSEMBLING THE PERSONNEL DOOR ASSEMBLY
Removing the Personnel Door Assembly (Lower) from its Storage Position
NOTE
Before the CBC is retracted, the lower section of the personnel door panel is separated from the
upper personnel door and stowed. Once the CBC is in its fully-extended position, the personnel
door assembly (lower) (Figure 11, Item 1) must be installed under the upper personnel door
assembly (upper).
The lower personnel door panel (Figure 11, Item 1) is stowed just inside the door opening on the
inside ceiling surface (Figure 11, Item 2) of the CBC.
Two personnel will be need to assemble the personnel door assembly (lower)
1. Stand inside the CBC facing the door opening while under the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 11,
Item 1).
WARNING
Be sure to support the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 11, Item 1) with a free hand
before removing the three hand knobs with threaded studs (Figure 11, Item 4) that secure the
personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 11, Item 1) to its stowage bracket on the inside ceiling
surface (Figure 11, Item 2) of the CBC. Removing the hand knobs with threaded studs (Figure
11, Item 4) without supporting the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 11, Item 1) will permit
the assembly to fall freely, causing a possible injury.
2. Support the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 11, Item 1) with a free hand.
3. Remove the three hand knobs with threaded studs (Figure 11, Item 4) that secure the top edge (Figure 11,
Item 5) of the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 11, Item 1) to the left hand zee bracket (Figure 11,
Item 6).
4. Lower the top edge (Figure 11, Item 5) of the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 11, Item 1) until the
lower edge (Figure 11, Item 7) of the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 11, Item 1) can be removed
from the right hand zee bracket (Figure 11, Item 8).
0005-8
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
Assembling the Personnel Door Assembly - Continued.

5. Lower the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 11, Item 1) from its stowage location and set near the
door opening along with the three hand knobs with threaded studs (Figure 11, Item 4).
7
6
1 2
4 3
8
5
Figure 11. Removing the Personnel Door Assembly (Lower).

END OF TASK
Installing the Personnel Door Assembly (Lower) to the Personnel Door Assembly (Upper)
CAUTION
Always use two personnel when assembling or installing the door or door panels. Personnel may
be injured if a door panel drops on an installer.
NOTE
The personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 12, Item 1) must be lowered from its stowage
location to perform the following steps.
1. Remove the two hex head bolts, two lockwashers, and two washers (Figure 12, Item 3) that are used to store
the lower door hinge (Figure 12, Item 2) of the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 12, Item 1) on the
inside surface of the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 12, Item 1). Discard old lockwashers.
2. Remove the lower door hinge (Figure 12, Item 2).
Figure 12. Remove Hinge from Personnel Door Assembly (Lower).
0005-9
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
3. Install the lower door hinge (Figure 13, Item 3) in its permanent location on the lower left corner (Figure 13,
Item 1) of the outside surface of the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 13, Item 2).
4. Rotate personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 13, Item 2) 180° so the lower door hinge (Figure 13, Item 3)
is on the outside.
5. Place the lower door hinge (Figure 13, Item 3) in position so that the pivot pin (Figure 13, Item 5) is outside
the edge of the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 13, Item 2).
6. Install the two hex head bolts (Figure 13, Items 6 and 7), two lockwashers ( Figure 13, Item 5), and two
washers (Figure 13, Item 4) removed earlier (lockwashers need to be replaced). The longer hex head bolt
(Figure 13, Item 7) goes closest to the pivot pin (Figure 13, Item 8) of the lower door hinge (Figure 13, Item 3).
8 2
4
5
3
7
6 5 4
Figure 13. Install Hinge on Personnel Door Assembly (Lower).

7. Open the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 14, Item 1).
8. Place the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 14, Item 3) and the three hand knobs with threaded studs
and lockwashers (both removed earlier) near the door opening and within easy reach.
0005-10
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005

9. Place the lower personnel door panel hinge pin (Figure 14, Item 4) in the hinge pivot block (Figure14, Item 5)
located at the lower left corner of the personnel door assembly opening (Figure 14, Item 2).
4 3
Figure 14. Install Personnel Door Assembly (Lower).
NOTE
When properly installed, the tabs (Figure 15, Item 5) on the personnel door assembly (lower)
(Figure 15, Item 2) will fit into the cutouts (Figure 15, Item 6) of the personnel door assembly
(upper) (Figure 15, Item 1).
Two people are required to perform the following steps:

10. Mate the tabs (Figure 15, Item 5) on the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 15, Item 2) into the cutouts
(Figure 15, Item 6) of the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 15, Item 1).
0005-11
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
CAUTION
When using the three hand knobs, avoid cross threading. Damage to threaded studs may occur.
11. Secure the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 15, Item 2) to the personnel door assembly (upper)
(Figure 15, Item 1) with the three hand knobs with threaded studs (Figure 15, Item 3) and three washers
(Figure 15, Item 4).
5 2
4 3
Figure 15. Secure Personnel Door Assembly (Lower).

END OF TASK
16B
2B
Installing the Lower Door Latch Rod
To install the lower door latch rod (Figure 16, Item 4) in its operational position, the following steps should be
conducted:
NOTE
When the CBC has been retracted and the lower door panel is in its stowage location, the lower
door latch rod (Figure 16, Item 4) is stored on the inside surface of the upper door panel (Figure
16, Item 2).
1. Remove the two cotter pins (Figure 16, Item 1) that secure the door handle (Figure 16, Item 5) to the door
latch mechanism.
2. Remove the door handle (Figure 16, Item 5) and remove the lower door latch rod (Figure 16, Item 4) from
behind the door handle (Figure 16, Item 5).
0005-12
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005

3. Slide the lower door latch rod (Figure 16, Item 4) out of its storage guide (Figure 16, Item 3) on the personnel
door assembly (upper) (Figure 16, Item 2).
2
1
4 3
Figure 16. Lower Door Latch Rod Installation Stowage Position.

4. Install the lower door latch rod (Figure 17, Item 4) in its operational position by sliding it down through the two
door-latch rod guides (Figure 17, Item 5) located on the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 17, Item 3).
5. Engage the upper hole (Figure 17, Item 6) of the lower door latch rod (Figure 17, Item 4) onto the door handle
pin (Figure 17, Item 8) of the door handle (Figure 17, Item 7).
6. Attach the door handle (Figure 17, Item 7) over the upper hole (Figure 17, Item 6) of the lower door latch rod
7. Secure the door handle (Figure 16, Item 5) in place using a cotter pin (Figure 16, Item 1).
0005-13
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
CAUTION
To minimize door latch operating failures, insert the cotter pin (Figure 17, Item 1) fully. Failure to
adhere to this caution may result in damage to the CBC.
8. Install the cotter pin (Figure 17, Item 1) to secure the lower door latch rod (Figure 17, Item 4).
2
1
5
8
4
Figure 17. Lower Door Latch Rod Installation Operational Position.

9. Test the action of the door latch assembly (Figure 17, Item 9) by opening and closing the personnel door
assembly.
10. Ensure that the door closes properly, that the door latch rods at the upper and lower edges of the door
engage properly in their contact points, and that the center case latch engages the strike plate properly.
11. Ensure that the door operates freely and that the weather seal surrounding the door is positioned properly to
block all openings.
NOTE
If the personnel door does not operate smoothly, check to make sure that the lower panel of the
personnel door has been installed correctly and that the tabs and cutouts on the inside surface of
the personnel door are aligned correctly.
12. Ensure that the three hand knobs with threaded studs are securely tightened.
END OF TASK
0005-14
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
OPERATING THE PERSONNEL DOOR
WARNING
The Personnel Door to the CBC must remain open while occupied. Failure to do so may result in
suffocation or heat stress.
WARNING
The Personnel Door to the CBC must be locked in the fully-open position or secured in the closed
position at all times. If not secured, wind gusts may cause the door to close or open violently
resulting in damage to the CBC and injury to personnel.
NOTE
Once the CBC is in its fully-extended position, entry to the CBC can be gained through the
Personnel Door (Figure 18, Item 1).
Remove the ladder from the MTV and the MTV trailer when operating the personnel door
assembly.
1. Open the personnel door assembly (Figure 18, Item 1) by rotating the door handle (Figure 18, Item 2) upward
to a vertical position.
Figure 18. Exterior Handle Position Open.
0005-15
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
Operating the Personnel Door - Continued.
NOTE
In the vertical position (Figure 18, Item 2), the door latch rods on the inside of the door are
released from their contact points at the top and bottom of the door and the center case latch
near the door handle and releases from its contact point.
2. The door latching mechanism locks in place by rotating the door handle (Figure 19, Item 1) downward to a
vertical position (Figure 19, Item 2).
Figure 19. Exterior Handle Position Closed.
0005-16
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
NOTE
In the downward vertical position (Figure 19, Item 2), the door latch assembly (Figure 20, Item 5)
on the inside of the personnel door assembly engages at the top (Figure 20, Item 1) and bottom
(Figure 20, Item 4) of the personnel door assembly and the center case latch (Figure 20, Item 3)
near the door handle (Figure 20, Item 2) engages into its contact point.
If personnel are locked inside the CBC and the tailgate of the vehicle is up, a secondary exit can
be created by separating the lower door panel from the upper door panel and rotating the inner
door handle. In this case, the lower door panel is removed from the door as detailed in the
section entitled “Using the Secondary Exit.”
The personnel door may also be opened and closed from the inside of the CBC. When in the
closed and locked position, the inner door handle (Figure 20, Item 2) is rotated counterclockwise
and will point up at approximately a 45° angle from horizontal.
3. To open the door, the inside door handle (Figure 20, Item 2) is rotated clockwise and points down at
approximately a 45° angle.
Figure 20. Door Latch Assembly Operation.
0005-17
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005

4. Turn the door handle (Figure 21, Item 2) to the closed position then to the horizontal position, to allow a
padlock (Figure 21, Item 3) to be installed from the outside.
Figure 21. Outside Door Handle Locked Position.
When the outside door handle (Figure 21, Item 2) is in the horizontal position, it may be
padlocked (Figure 21, Item 3) from the outside. If the personnel door assembly (Figure 21, Item
1) is, for any reason, padlocked with personnel inside, they may exit the CBC by using the inner
door handle (Figure 20, Item 2) of the personnel door assembly. The inner door handle (Figure
20, Item 2) has a center case latch with an override feature which permits the handle to be
rotated from the inside of the CBC, even if the outside door handle (Figure 21, Item 2) is
padlocked.
If the personnel are padlocked inside the CBC and the tailgate of the vehicle is up, a secondary
exit can be created by separating the lower door panel from the upper door panel and rotating the
inner door handle. In this case, the lower door panel is removed from the door as detailed in the
section entitled “USING THE SECONDARY EXIT IF LOWER DOOR SECTION IS BLOCKED OR
CANNOT BE OPENED FROM THE INTERIOR OF THE CBC.”
The personnel door may also be opened and closed from the inside of the CBC. When in the
closed and locked position, the inner door handle (Figure 20, Item 2) is rotated counterclockwise
and will point up at approximately a 45° angle from horizontal.
END OF TASK
0005-18
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
EXITING THE CBC FROM THE INSIDE WHEN THE DOOR HAS BEEN PADLOCKED
The CBC personnel door may be opened from the inside even if it has been padlocked from the outside. This
provides any personnel that may locked inside a means of emergency exit.
Open the personnel door from the inside of the CBC by grasping the handle on the inside of the personnel door
and rotate in a counterclockwise direction.
END OF TASK
EMERGENCY EXIT PROCEDURES
Create the Second Exit from the Interior of the CBC
NOTE
The secondary exit (Figure 22, Item 1) may only be used if the CBC is in its fully-extended
position. It permits personnel to exit the interior of the CBC even if some blockage prohibits the
personnel door assembly (lower) from being opened, i.e., the tailgate of the vehicle is in the up
and locked position.
The secondary exit is created by separating the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 22,
Item 8) from the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 22, Item 7) from the inside of the CBC.
This creates a situation where the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 22, Item 8) can swing
open while the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 22, Item 7) remains in place, allowing
personnel to exit.
1. Remove the two cotter pins that secure the door handle to the door latch mechanism (Figure 22, Item 9).
2. Remove the door handle (Figure 22, Item 10).
3. Remove lower door latch rod (Figure 22, Item 5) from door latch mechanism (Figure 22, Item 9).
NOTE
Lower door latch rod (Figure 22, Item 5) should be placed with the bent portion facing outward
when attached to door latch mechanism (Figure 22, Item 9).
4. Slide lower door latch rod (Figure 22, Item 5) horizontally through the door-latch rod guides (Figure 22, Item
3) on the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 22, Item 8).
5. Place the door handle back on to the door latch mechanism (Figure 22, Item 9).
6. Install the two cotter pins (Figure 22, Item 2) removed earlier to secure the door handle on door latch
mechanism (Figure 22, Item 9).
7. Remove the three hand knobs with threaded studs (Figure 22, Item 4) that secure the personnel door
assembly (lower) (Figure 22, Item 7) to the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 22, Item 8).
8. Push inside door handle (Figure 22, Item 10) in the open position and open the door.
9. Remove the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 22, Item 7) from the hinge pin on the CBC, and place it
inside the CBC.
10. Exit the CBC through the opening (Figure 22, Item 1) created in the CBC.
0005-19
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
Create the Second Exit from the Interior of the CBC - Continued.
1
2
10
3
9
5
7
6
Figure 22. Creating Secondary Exit on the CBC.
END OF TASK
USING THE DOOR STOP/HOLD OPEN DEVICE
1. Pull the cotter pin (Figure 23, Item 5) on the right bracket (Figure 23, Item 4) of the door stop/hold open
device (Figure 23, Item 1).
2. Remove the clevis pin (Figure 23, Item 3). The cotter pin (Figure 23, Item 5) is attached to the door stop/hold
open device (Figure 23, Item 1) by means of a lanyard (Figure 23, Item 2).
0005-20
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
Using the Door Stop/ Hold Open Device - Continued.
1
2 3
Figure 23. Door Stop/Hold Open Device.

3. Swing the door stop/hold open device (Figure 24, Item 3) to the left.
4. Open the personnel door assembly (Figure 24, Item 2) until the hole at the end of the door stop/hold open
device (Figure 24, Item 3) is aligned with the hole in the bracket (Figure 24, Item 5), mounted to the left of the
personnel door assembly (Figure 24, Item 2).
WARNING
Do not install clevis pin from inside CBC.Use step device to perform the following steps from
exterior of CBC. Failure to adhere to this warning may result in injury to personnel.
5. Install the clevis pin (Figure 24, Item 1) through the holes in the door stop/hold open device (Figure 24, Item
3) and the bracket (Figure 24, Item 5), mounted to the left of the personnel door assembly (Figure 24, Item 2).
6. Install the cotter pin (Figure 24, Item 4) in the clevis pin (Figure 24, Item 5).
1 2
4
3
Figure 24. Door Stop/Hold Open Device Operation.
7. To release the door stop/hold open device (Figure 24, Item 3) and allow the personnel door assembly (Figure
24, Item 2) to close, perform the following procedures.
8. Remove the clevis pin (Figure 24, Item 1) from the holes in the door stop/hold open device (Figure 24, Item 3)
and the bracket (Figure 24, Item 5), mounted to the left of the personnel door assembly (Figure 24, Item 2).
9. Swing the door stop/hold open device (Figure 24, Item 3) to the right.
10. Place the clevis pin (Figure 24, Item 1) 1n the right bracket (Figure 23, Item 4) of the door stop/hold open
device (Figure 24, Item 3).
11. Install the cotter pin (Figure 24, Item 4) in the clevis pin (Figure 24, Item 4).
END OF TASK
0005-21
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
PREPARING THE POWER AND SIGNAL LINE PORTS FOR USE
There are two power and signal line ports (Figure 25, Items 2 and 3) on the lower stationary
section (Figure 25, Item 1) of the CBC. These ports are designed to permit power and signal
cables to enter and/or exit the interior of the CBC.
Both ports are located on the sidewalls of the CBC. One is the road side power and signal line
port (Figure 25, Item 3) at the forward end and the other is located on the curb side power and
signal line port (Figure 25, Item 2) toward the forward end of the CBC.
Each port is lined with an aluminum tube to protect the cables from cuts and abrasion. A square
blockout panel (Figure 26, Item 3) is provided that permits the port to be covered when not in use.
2
3
Figure 25. Power and Signal Line Port.
0005-22
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
Remove Blockout Panels
NOTE
If desired, move to the power and signal line port on the opposite side of the CBC and repeat the
procedure.
Once the blockout panels have been removed, the power and signal ports are ready for use. The
power and signal line port cover on a new CBC may adhere to the sidewall due to new paint. It
may require pushing the cover from the outside of the CBC to free the cover from the sidewall.
1. Enter the CBC.

2. Remove the four screws (Figure 26, Item 5), four lockwashers (Figure 26, Item 4), and four washers (Figure
26, Item 3) at each corner of the blockout panel (Figure 26, Item 6) that attach the blockout panel (Figure 26,
Item 6) to the sidewall (Figure 26, Item 7). Discard old lockwashers.
3. Place the blockout panel (Figure 26, Item 6) in position above the open port (Figure 26, Item 2).
4. Align the blockout panel (Figure 26, Item 6) with the four holes (Figure 26, Item 1) supplied above the open
port (Figure 27, Item 2).
5. Install the four screws (Figure 26, Item 5), four lockwashers (Figure 26, Item 4), and four washers (Figure 26,
Item 3) removed earlier. Replace the old lockwashers with new lockwashers.
END OF TASK
Re-Installing Blockout Panels

3B
1. Remove the four screws (Figure 26, Item 5), four lockwashers (Figure 26, Item 4), and four washers (Figure
26, Item 3) that attach the blockout panel (Figure 26, Item 6) to the sidewall(Figure 27, Item 7). Discard the
old lockwashers.
2. Place the blockout panel (Figure 26, Item 6) in place over the power and signal line port opening (Figure 26,
Item 3).
3. Install the four screws (Figure 26, Item 5), four lockwashers (Figure 26, Item 4), and four washers (Figure 26,
Item 3).
1
7
6 2
5 3
4
Figure 26. Blockout Panel.

END OF TASK
0005-23
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
HOISTING THE CBC USING THE LIFT RINGS
WARNING
Do not lift the CBC in its retracted (lowered) position. The CBC must be in its extended (fully-
raised) position prior to using the lift rings for lifting.
Do not use the lift rings to lift a CBC with an installed payload greater than 1100 pounds. Lift
rings should only be used to lift an empty CBC that is not mounted to a vehicle.
A CBC that has been installed on a vehicle should only be hoisted using the lifting points on the
vehicle.
Make sure to use handling equipment rated for the equipment it will be lifting. Do not use
handling equipment rated for less than the gross weight of the CBC when handled by itself or the
CBC plus the vehicle when the CBC has been installed on a vehicle.
Failure to follow these lift warnings may result in severe injury or death to personnel or damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Do not attach a hoisting sling to the CBC lift rings in such a way as to create an angle between
the cable and the CBC roof surface that is LESS THAN 45°. Attaching the cable at any angle
less than 45° will result in excessive strain on the lift rings which may result in damage to the
CBC.
NOTE
Lift rings (Figure 13, Item 1) are provided on the front and rear top edges of the CBC to allow it to
be lifted onto and off a vehicle bed. The lift rings must be used only to lift a CBC that is
mechanically detached from the vehicle.
To lift the CBC using the lift rings, the CBC must first be in its fully-extended and locked position.
1. Attach the hoisting sling (Figure 27, Item 2) to a crane or similar piece of equipment.
2. Attach the hooks (Figure 27, Item 1) from the hoisting sling to each of the lift rings (Figure 27, Item 3) making
sure that they are securely locked in place.
0005-24
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
Hoisting the CBC Using the Lift Rings - Continued.
NOTE
The angle created between each cable and the roof surface of the CBC must not be less than
45°.
Since the weight of the CBC is not distributed evenly, the CBC may tilt toward the rear when lifted
with the hoisting sling. To compensate for this condition and to ensure that the CBC is level,
additional weight, such as two 50-pound sandbags or other weight, should be placed toward the
front edge of the roof.
Guide ropes may be attached to the lift rings on the four corners of the CBC to help keep the
CBC straight and level when lowering the CBC on to the vehicle bed.
3. Hoist the CBC into the desired position.
THE ANGLE FORMED

1 BETWEEN THE
HOISTING CABLE AND
CBC ROOF SURFACE
MUST NOT BE LESS
THAN 45°.
≥ 45°
Figure 27. Hoisting the CBC Using the Lift Rings.

END OF TASK
0005-25
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
HOISTING A VEHICLE WITH AN INSTALLED CBC
WARNING
Do not use the lift rings to lift a CBC that is installed on a vehicle. Lift rings should be used to lift
an empty, non-vehicle-mounted CBC only.
A CBC that has been installed on a vehicle should be in a retracted condition. It should only be
hoisted using the lifting points on the vehicle.
handling equipment rated for less than the gross weight of the CBC when handled alone. When
the CBC has been installed on a vehicle the same precautions should be taken.
equipment.
NOTE
To hoist a CBC while it is installed on a vehicle, the CBC must be retracted. Helicopter rub strips
are provided along the length of the roofline to protect the CBC from cables that may rub against
the unit while the vehicle is being lifted.
1. Attach a hoisting sling rated to lift the combined gross weight of the vehicle, CBC, and payload.
2. Attach the end of the cables at the vehicle lifting points in accordance with the vehicle’s technical manual.
3. Attach the other end of the hoisting sling to a crane or equivalent equipment rated to lift the combined gross
weight of the vehicle, CBC, and payload.
4. Hoist the vehicle with installed CBC.
5. Move to the desired location.
END OF TASK
GAINING ACCESS TO THE ROOF OF THE CBC
WARNING
Be sure that three points of contact are maintained when accessing the roof of the CBC. Failure
to follow this warning may result in personnel falling from the CBC and cause severe injury or
death to personnel.
CAUTION
Be sure to return the lower roof access step to its upright, stowed position prior to retracting the
CBC. Failure to stow the lower roof access step will cause damage to the top assembly and the
step as the top assembly is lowered.
1. Flip the hinged footpads on the lower (Figure 28, Item 4) and upper (Figure 28, Item 3) roof access steps
down. They should be perpendicular to the wall of the CBC and locked in position.
2. Use the steps to reach the roof (Figure 28, Item 2) of the CBC.
0005-26
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
Gaining Access to the Roof of the CBC - Continued.
NOTE
A handhold (Figure 28, Item 1) is provided on the roof (Figure 28, Item 2) of the CBC to assist in
climbing on top of the CBC.
2
Figure 28. Gaining Access to the Roof of the CBC.

END OF TASK
RETRACTING THE CBC
CAUTION
Any excess snow or ice should be cleared from the roof, side walls, and personnel door hinges of
the CBC before the CBC is extended or retracted. Excess snow or ice will increase the weight of
the top assembly of the CBC and place excessive strain on the lift/lowering components.
Refer to WP 0007 entitled “Operation Under Unusual Conditions” for more information on raising
and lowering the CBC under conditions of excess snow and/or ice.
41B
Removing and Stowing the Personnel Door Assembly (Lower)
Before retracting the CBC, the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 29, Item 5) must be removed and stowed.
1. Remove both cotter pins (Figure 29, Item 1) that secure the lower door latch rod (Figure 29, Item 4) to the
door latch mechanism (Figure 29, Item 8).
0005-27
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
Removing and Stowing the Personnel Door Assembly (Lower) - Continued.
2. Remove the door handle (Figure 29, Item 7) off the door latch mechanism (Figure 29, Item 8) to access the
lower door latch rod (Figure 29, Item 4).
3. Slide the lower door latch rod (Figure 29, Item 4) up and out of the door-latch rod guides (Figure 29, Item 6)
on the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 29, Item 5).
4. Place the door handle (Figure 29, Item 7) back on the door latch mechanism (Figure 29, Item 8).
NOTE
Lower door latch rod (Figure 29, Item 4) should be placed with the bent portion facing outward
when attached to door latch mechanism(Figure 29, Item 8).
5. Slide the Lower door latch rod (Figure 29, Item 4) horizontally through the storage guide (Figure 29, Item 3)
on the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 29, Item 2).
6. Install the cotter pins (Figure 29, Item 1) removed earlier, in place on the door latch mechanism (Figure 29,
Item 8).
2
1
8
5
6
4
7
Figure 29. Removing the Personnel Door Assembly (Lower).
0005-28
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
WARNING
A second person is needed to support the personnel door assembly (lower) before removing the
three hand knobs with threaded studs that secure the lower door panel to the upper door panel.
Removing the hand knobs without supporting the door panel will permit the assembly to fall
freely, causing possible injury to personnel or damage to the lower door panel.
7. The second personnel shall support the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 30, Item 3).
8. Remove the three hand knobs with threaded studs (Figure 30, Item 2) that secure the personnel door
assembly (lower) (Figure 30, Item 3) to the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 30, Item 1). Retain the
three hand knobs with threaded studs (Figure 30, Item 2) for later use.
Figure 30. Personnel Door Assembly (Lower) Hand Knobs.

9. Swing personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 31, Item 1) open and out of the way.
10. Lift the lower personnel door assembly (lower) hinge pin (Figure 31, Item 2) up and out of the hinge pivot hole
(Figure 31, Item 3) located in the threshold at the lower left corner of the personnel door opening while being
supported by another personnel.
0005-29
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
Figure 31. Personnel Door Assembly (Lower).
NOTE
The lower door hinge (Figure 32, Item 2) on the outside surface of the personnel door assembly
(lower) (Figure 32, Item 1) is removed and stowed on the inside surface of the personnel door
assembly (lower) when the personnel door assembly (lower) is stowed on the underside of the
roof.
11. Set the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 32, Item 1) on a work surface and remove the two screws,
two lockwashers, and two washers (Figure 32, Item 3) that secure the lower door hinge (Figure 32, Item 2) to
the outside surface of the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 32, Item 1). Discard old lockwashers.
12. Remove the lower door hinge (Figure 32, Item 2).
Figure 32. Removal of Lower Door Hinge.
0005-30
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
13. Turn the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 33, Item 1) over so that the outside surface is face down.
14. Position the lower door hinge (Figure 33, Item 2) in its stowage location (Figure 33, Item 3) on the inside
surface of the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 33, Item 1).
15. Secure the lower door hinge (Figure 33, Item 2) in place using the two screws, two lockwashers, and two
washers (Figure 32, Item 3) removed in step 12.
Figure 33. Installation of Lower Door Hinge.
NOTE
The personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 34, Item 1) is stowed on the ceiling (the ceiling is
the underside of the roof) when the CBC is to be retracted.
Ensure that the side of the personnel door assembly with the hinge installed (inside surface of
door) is facing the floor of the CBC when installed in the bracket.
NOTE
The floor of the CBC is the truck or trailer bed. The CBC does not have a floor panel.
16. Stand under the two zee brackets (Figure 34, Items 1 and 4) installed just inside the personnel door assembly
opening.
17. Hold the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 34, Item 5) at an angle, as seen in illustration (Figure 34,
Item 5).
18. Slide the bottom edge (Figure 34, Item 3) of the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 34, Item 5) inside
the right hand zee bracket (Figure 34, Item 4), just to the right of the rubber strip installed on the ceiling
surface (Figure 34, Item 2).
0005-31
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
19. Hold the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 34, Item 5) in place in the right-hand zee bracket (Figure
34, Item 4).
20. Swing the upper edge of the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 34, Item 5) into position against the left
hand zee bracket (Figure 34, Item 1).
21. Align the holes on the door panel tabs (Figure 34, Item 8) with the threaded inserts installed in the left hand
zee bracket (Figure 34, Item 1).
CAUTION
When installing the three hand knobs, avoid cross threading. Failure to adhere to this caution
may result in damage to threaded studs.
22. Install the three hand knobs with threaded studs (Figure 34, Item 6) and lockwashers (Figure 34, Item 7) that
were removed when disassembling the personnel door.
2
3
1
4
8
7
6
5
Figure 34. Installation of Personnel Door Assembly (Lower).

END OF TASK
0005-32
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
STOWING EACH LIFT/LOCKING ASSEMBLY
CAUTION
Be sure that the wire rope assemblies do not have any slack prior to releasing and stowing the
four lift/locking assemblies. If the cables have slack, move the lever on the ratchet handle to the
right and turn the ratchet handle clockwise SLIGHTLY to take up the slack in the wire rope
assembly. Turn the ratchet handle just enough to take up any slack in the cables.
1. Remove the cotter pin (Figure35, Item 6) that secures the handle (Figure 35, Item 2). Retain cotter pin for
installation.
2. Swing the handle (Figure 35, Item 2) down so that it is approximately perpendicular to the main tube of the
3. Place the cotter pin (Figure 35, Item 6) removed in the first step back on the lift/locking assembly (Figure 35,
Item 1).
4. Move the handle (Figure 35, Item 2) slightly up and down as needed to disengage the base plate (Figure 35,
Item 5) with protruding pins (Figure 35, Item 4) from the slots (Figure 35, Item 3) formed by the interlock
extrusion.
2
6
3
Figure 35. Stowing Each Lift/Locking Assembly.
5. Swing the handle (Figure 35, Item 2) up until the hole in the handle clip slides over the clevis pin.
6. Replace the cotter pin (Figure 35, Item 6) in the clevis pin, locking the handle(Figure 35, Item 2) in place
against the lift/locking assembly (Figure 35, Item 1).
END OF TASK
0005-33
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
Stow Each Lift/Locking Assembly
1. Remove the cotter pin (Figure 36, Item 5) on the clevis pin (Figure 36, Item 4) installed on the roof stowage
block (Figure 36, Item 2).
2. Slide the clevis pin (Figure 36, Item 4) out of the stowage block (Figure 36, Item 2). Keep the cotter pin
(Figure 36, Item 5) and clevis pin (Figure 36, Item 3) close by.
3. Rotate the entire lift/locking assembly (Figure 36, Item 1) 180°.
4. Swing the lift/locking assembly (Figure 36, Item 1) up towards its stowage block (Figure 36, Item 2) on the
underside of the ceiling.
2
3
1
5
7
3
Figure 36. Stowing the Lift/Locking Assembly.
5. Swing base plate (Figure 36, Item 6) upward so protruding pins (Figure 36, Item 7) align with recessed holes
in ceiling.
6. Stow the lift/locking assembly (Figure 36, Item 1) so that the bracket (Figure 36, Item 3) straddles the stowage
NOTE
Force may be needed to align the holes in the bracket with the holes in the stowage block. This
may be accomplished by tapping on the lift/locking assembly by hand, to align the holes.
7. Ensure that the holes in the bracket (Figure 36, Item 3) are aligned with the holes (in the stowage block
(Figure 36, Item 2), and the protruding pins (Figure 36, Item 7) are inserted in the matching hole in the ceiling.
8. Install the clevis pin (Figure 36, Item 4) removed earlier through one side of the bracket (Figure 36, Item 3),
through the stowage block (Figure 36, Item 2), and out the opposite side of the bracket (Figure 36, Item 3).
9. Install the cotter pin (Figure 36, Item 5) removed earlier in the end of the clevis pin (Figure 36, Item 4).
10. Repeat these procedures for each of the three remaining lift/locking assemblies (Figure 36, Item 1) until all
are in their stowed positions against the ceiling.
END OF TASK
0005-34
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
LOWERING THE UPPER EXTENDABLE PORTION OF THE CBC
NOTE
Once all the lift/locking assemblies are in their stowed positions, the winch assembly must be
used to lower the upper extendable portion of the CBC to its full-retracted position.
While positioned in front of the winch assembly:
1. Install the ratchet handle (Figure 37, Item 6) (if not already in place).
2. Engage the male portion (Figure 37, Item 4) of the handle with the female socket (Figure 37, Item 3) located
just inside the round opening in the winch cover (Figure 37, Item 1).
3. Move the lever (Figure 37, Item 5) on the back of the ratchet handle (Figure 37, Item 6) so that the ratchet
handle (Figure 37, Item 6) engages positively when turned in a counterclockwise direction.
WARNING
Be sure to position the lever on the back of the ratchet handle so as to LOWER the upper portion
of the CBC. When turning the ratchet handle, if the CBC starts moving upward, STOP
IMMEDIATELY. Extending the upper portion of the CBC past the warning mark will cause undue
stress to the cables and may cause the cables to snap and the top assembly of the CBC to drop.
Failure to stop at the warning mark when extending the CBC may result in severe injury.
Do not enter the interior of the CBC while in the process of lowering the top assembly. Personnel
should be positioned outside the CBC and reach into the personnel door opening to operate the
winch. Standing inside the CBC while the top assembly is being lowered may result in severe
injury.
CAUTION
Be sure to return the lower roof access step to its upright, stowed position prior to retracting the
CBC. Failure to stow the lower roof access step will cause damage to the top assembly and the
step as the top assembly is lowered.
4. Turn the ratchet handle (Figure 37, Item 6) in a counterclockwise direction until the upper extendable section
(Figure 37, Item 2) of the CBC begins to lower.
0005-35
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
Lowering the Upper Extendable Portion of the CBC - Continued.

3
2
4
1
5
Figure 37. Lowering the Upper Extendable Portion of the CBC.

5. Lower the upper extendable section (Figure 37, Item 2) of the CBC until it stops.
6. Exit the personnel door opening.
7. Close and latch the remaining top assembly of the personnel door.
8. The CBC is now in its fully-retracted position.
END OF TASK
PREPARATION FOR MOVEMENT
1. When preparing to move from one field location to another for continued operation, the CBC can be left
installed on the vehicle. It may be left in either the extended or retracted position.
2. If the CBC is in the extended position prior to movement, any cables entering the power and signal line ports
on the sidewalls of the CBC should be removed and the ports covered as detailed earlier in this work
package.
3. The personnel door should be closed and locked securely.
4. The ladder should be stowed and secured in place at the rear of the vehicle.
END OF TASK
0005-36
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0005
PREPARATION FOR STORAGE
1. The CBC may be stored on or off the vehicle. Prior to going into storage, all “After Operation” PMCS
procedures, as outlined in WP 0017, should be completed. Reasonable steps should be taken to provide a
dry place for storage, protected from environmental extremes such as dust and rain.
2. If the CBC will be stored off vehicle, it should be left in its fully-extended position with the door closed and
locked.
3. If any CBC assemblies are in need of repair, the appropriate requests should be forwarded to Field
Maintenance as required.
4. All lubrication should be performed as detailed in WP 0017, paragraph “LUBRICATION REQUIREMENTS,”
prior to storage.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0005-37/38 blank
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0006
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES
DECALS AND INSTRUCTION PLATES
Outside View of Forward End Wall
Figure 1. Outside View of Forward End Wall Decal/Instruction Plate.
Table 1. Outside View of Forward End Wall Decal/Instruction Plate.
ITEM NUMBER DECAL/INSTRUCTION PLATE
1 “LIFT HERE ONLY WHEN CLOSURE IS RAISED”
0006-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0006
Decals and Instruction Plates - Continued.

2
Outside View of Rear End Wall 1
Figure 2. Outside View of Rear End Wall Decal/Instruction Plate.
Table 2. Outside View of Rear End Wall Decal/Instruction Plate.
1 “LIFT HERE ONLY WHEN CLOSURE IS RAISED”
2 “HAND HOLD” (with arrow pointing to roof)
3 “OPEN” (with sweeping curved arrow)
4 Unique Item Identifier (UII) Plate
5 CBC Identification Plate
6 “FOLD STEP INTO POCKET BEFORE LOWERING"
0006-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0006
Detail of Identification Plate
Figure 3. Unit Identification Plate Details.
Table 3. Unit Identification Plate Details.
ITEM
DECAL/INSTRUCTION PLATE FUNCTION
NUMBER
Provides important information regarding the CBC, such

as the Serial Number (Ser No.), contract number,
1 UNIT IDENTIFICATION PLATE
design account, Manufacturer (MFR), Part Number (Part
No.), and National Stock Number (NSN).
0006-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0006
1 2
Figure 4. Outside View of Road Side and Curb Side Walls.
Table 4. Outside View of Road Side and Curb Side Walls.
1 “VENT CLOSED”
2 “VENT OPEN”
0006-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0006
Inside View of Rear End Wall
Figure 5. Decal/Instruction Plate for Inside View of Rear End Wall.
Table 5. Decal/Instruction Plate for Inside View of Rear End Wall.
1 “OPEN” (with sweeping curved arrow)
2 “WARNING: SUFFOCATION HAZARD. DOOR MUST REMAIN OPEN WHILE

OCCUPIED.”
0006-5
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0006
Inside View of Side Wall (Road Side)

B
1
1
Figure 6. Inside View of Side Wall (Road Side) Decal/Instruction Plates.
Table 6. Inside View of Side Wall (Road Side) Decal/Instruction Plates.
1 CAUTION
“Ensure the (2) lift/locking base plate pins are in their slots before
rotating the lift/locking assy. handle to its final up position; otherwise,
damage may occur to the pulley retainer brackets.” (Refer to Figure 8)
2 “DO NOT RAISE ABOVE THIS LINE WITH WINCH”
3 “RAISE,” “LOWER” (with sweeping arrow)
0006-6
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0006
Inside Top Assembly Caution Decal Detail
Figure 7. Inside Top Assembly Caution Decal Detail.
Table 7. Inside Top Assembly Caution Decal Detail.
ITEM
NUMBER
Provides caution to operator, when top assembly of

1 CAUTION DECAL
CBC is being raised, to prevent damage to equipment.
Figure 8. Lift/Locking Assembly Decal Detail.
Table 8. Lift/Locking Assembly Decal Detail.
ITEM
NUMBER
1 CAUTION DECAL Provides caution to operator, when securing lift/locking

assembly handle, to prevent damage to equipment.
(Refer to Figure 6)
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0006-7/8 blank
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0007
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
INITIAL SETUP:
Operator (1) (91B) WP 0005 WP 0025
WP 0017 FM 3-11.5
GENERAL
NOTE
Refer to Operation Under Usual Conditions (WP 0005) for specific operating instructions, and use
this work package for further instruction if operating the CBC in unusual conditions. Read all
sections which apply to the conditions to which the CBC will be exposed.
If excessive sand, dust, wind, or water enters the CBC during unusual conditions, notify Field
Maintenance to reapply RTV adhesive as appropriate.
Operation in Dusty and Sandy Condition
When using the CBC in sandy or dusty conditions, it may be necessary to clean the exterior and interior of the
CBC more frequently to prevent sand or dust from getting into the CBC lifting mechanism as well as to protect the
payload from debris. Refer to Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) WP 0017 for cleaning
intervals.
It may be necessary to clean the air filter assembly. Check the condition of the air filter and clean in accordance
with PMCS. Replace the air filter if it is not possible to clean it sufficiently to ensure proper airflow. Refer to
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) WP 0017 for cleaning and interval replacement of filter.
Refer to WP 0025 for replacement procedures.
Operations in Snowy or Snow Covered Conditions
CAUTION
No attempt should be made to raise or lower the CBC until all excess snow and ice have been
removed. Failure to adhere to this caution may result in damage to the CBC.
Any excess snow or ice should be cleared from the roof, sidewalls, and personnel door hinges of
the CBC before the CBC is extended or retracted. Excess snow or ice will increase the weight of
the upper section of the CBC and place excessive strain on the lifting/lowering components.
CBRN – Decontamination Procedures
NOTE
During thorough DECON and reconstitution efforts, rubber/foam gaskets, adhesive sealants, and
wire rope cables may need to be replaced.
When the CBC is subjected to Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) contamination, perform
operational decontamination procedures in accordance with FM 3-11.5, until a thorough DECON
(Decontamination) can be performed.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0007-1/2 blank
CHAPTER 3
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
FOR
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0008

TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION

The operator troubleshooting procedures Work Packages (WPs) are designed to give general instruction for
resolving the most common problems associated with the CBC.
TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION
The troubleshooting procedures found in WP 0009, WP 0010, WP 0011, WP 0012, WP 0013, WP 0014, and WP
0015 list the symptoms, malfunctions, and corrective actions required to return the CBC to normal operation.
Perform all the steps in the order they appear in the WP. Troubleshooting procedures are listed according to
symptom, followed by the malfunction, then any corrective action(s). All necessary references to
procedure/instructions can be found within the Troubleshooting WP.
DO NOT START THE TASK UNTIL:
You understand the task
You have the tools and equipment you need
INTRODUCTION TO TROUBLESHOOTING
The Malfunction/Symptom Index lists common malfunctions that may occur during the inspection and operation of
the CBC.
Find the malfunction the CBC is experiencing in the index and go to the given troubleshooting procedure in the
following Work Packages (WPs).
MALFUNCTION/SYMPTOM INDEX
The malfunction/symptom index is a quick reference for locating troubleshooting procedures. Each
malfunction/symptom references a number representing a starting point in the troubleshooting procedures table.
Troubleshooting procedures are arranged based upon the location of the malfunction (i.e., engine, transmission,
or brakes).
Specific Troubleshooting Procedures
This manual cannot list all malfunctions that may occur, all tests or inspections and corrective actions. If a
malfunction is not listed in, or is not corrected by the listed corrective actions, notify your supervisor/contact Field
Maintenance.
SYMPTOM INDEX
The Symptom Index tells the operator what to do when a fault occurs. The index is arranged by Line Replaceable
Unit (LRU) or functional area. When a fault occurs, carefully inspect the equipment for abnormal indicator
responses to decide which Fault Indication to follow. Use the Action for a given Fault Indication in their order of
appearance. If the Action(s) does not solve the problem, choose another Fault Indication to resolve the problem.
Notify Unit Maintenance if you cannot solve the problem. The Fault Indication and Action apply to the CBC as
indicated.
0008-1
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0008
SYMPTOM INDEX - Continued.
OPERATOR
Malfunction/Symptom Work Package
TOP ASSEMBLY
Top assembly will not retract or extend..........................................................................................WP 0009-1
Winch assembly will not operate………………………………………..…………………………….…WP 0009-1
Top assembly is uneven or not even………………………………………..…………………………..WP 0009-2
Lift/locking assemblies will not operate properly………………………………………..……………...WP 0009-2
Lift/locking assemblies will not turn to stow or deploy………………………………………..……......WP 0009-2
Lift/locking assemblies will not lock into place in the deployed position...………..…..……………..WP 0009-2
Cannot manually extent the upper section of the CBC...................................................................WP 0009-3
Wire rope assembly preventing the CBC from being manually lifted..............................................WP 0009-4
Cannot hoist CBC............................................................................................................................WP 0009-4
Cannot connect lifting device to hoist the CBC................................................................................WP 0009-4
Cannot access Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) roof from the upper assembly..........................................WP 0009-4
Upper and middle folding steps will not deploy................................................................................WP 0009-4
Cannot access bail handle on top of the CBC..................................................................................WP 0009-4
PERSONNEL DOOR ASSEMBLY
Gaps can be seen around the door………………………………………………….………….………..WP 0010-1
Door will not close properly…………………….………………….………………………………….…...WP 0010-1
Door does not operate properly........................................................................................................WP 0010-2
Door binds on closing………………………………..……………………………………………………..WP 0010-2
Door latch will not engage properly………………..……………………………………………………...WP 0010-2
Strike rod does not engage in hole in threshold……………..………….………..……………….….....WP 0010-2
Door will not open…………………………………………………………..……….……………………...WP 0010-3
Turning door handle will not release door latch..………………………..……….……………………...WP 0010-3
0008-2
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0008
MAINTAINER
CBC MOUNTING KIT
Gaps between CBC and vehicle bed………………………………………………….………………...WP 0011-1
Evidence of accumulating water, dust, or sand detected inside CBC……..….………………..……WP 0011-1
CBC Leaking………………………………………………………………………………………………..WP 0011-1
Cracked or missing RTV adhesive around threshold area of the CBC………………………………WP 0011-1
D-rings not operating properly …………………………………………………………….……….…….WP 0011-2
Cannot access the D-rings for operation………………………………………………………………...WP 0011-2
TOP ASSEMBLY
Top Assembly will not retract or extend…………………………………………………….…………....WP 0012-1
Winch assembly will not operate………………………………………………………….……………....WP 0012-1
Top Assembly is uneven or not level……………………………………………………….………….…WP 0012-2
Lift/locking assemblies not properly deployed………………………………………………….………..WP 0012-2
Lift/locking assembly will not operate properly……………………………………………….……….....WP 0012-2
Lift/locking Assemblies will not turn to stow or deploy………………………………………….…….…WP 0012-2
Lift/locking assemblies will not lock into place in the deployed position…………………….…….…..WP 0012-3
CBC will not manually extend…………………………………………………………………….…….….WP 0012-3
Cannot connect lifting device to lift the CBC…………………………………………………….…….....WP 0012-3
Wire rope assembly preventing top of CBC from lifting…………………………………….…………...WP 0012-3
Cannot hoist the CBC…………………………………………………………………………………….…WP 0012-4
Cannot connect lifting device to hoist the CBC……………………………………………………….….WP 0012-4
Cannot access Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) roof from the upper assembly………………………….…..WP 0012-4
Upper and middle folding steps will not deploy…………………………………………………………..WP 0012-4
Cannot access bail handle on top of the CBC…………………………………………………………...WP 0012-4
0008-3
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0008

MAINTAINER
BOTTOM ASSEMBLY
Cannot raise Top Assembly………………………………………………………………………..........WP 0013-1
Winch assembly will not operate………………………………………………………………………...WP 0013-1
Cannot access Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) roof from the lower assembly…………………………….WP 0013-2
Lower folding step will not deploy……………………………………………………………………..…WP 0013-1
Gaps can be seen around the door……………………………………………………………...……...WP 0014-1
Door will not close properly…………………….………………….………………………………….….WP 0014-1
Upper and lower door latch will not engage properly………………………………………………….WP 0014-1
Lower door latch rod does not engage in hole in threshold…………………………………………..WP 0014-1
CBC MOUNTING KIT
Evidence of accumulating water, dust, or sand detected inside CBC..……………………...……...WP 0015-1
Gaps between CBC and vehicle bed……………………………………………………………………WP 0015-1
Vehicle mounting kit is damaged or missing parts……………………………………………………..WP 0015-1
CBC leaking………………………………………………………………………………………………...WP 0015-2
Cracked or missing RTV adhesive around threshold area of the CBC.……………………………...WP 0015-1
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0008-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0009
TOP ASSEMBLY TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
INITIAL SETUP:
Operator WP 0005
WP 0039
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
TOP ASSEMBLY
SYMPTOM
Top Assembly will not retract or extend.

MALFUNCTION
Winch assembly will not operate.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. If CBC cannot extend, lift the top section of the CBC with lifting device and visually
check if wire rope assemblies are damaged or broken. Refer to WP 0039 for lifting the
CBC manually.
a. If wire rope assemblies are damaged, cut, or have separated strands, notify Field
Maintenance.
b. If wire rope assemblies are not damaged, cut, or have separated strands, go to next
procedural step.
STEP 2. Check winch assembly for damaged or broken parts.
a. If winch assembly is damaged or broken, notify Field Maintenance.
b. If loose parts/assemblies are not found, go to next procedural step.
STEP 3. Turn ratchet to move winch.
a. If winch assembly does not move, notify Field Maintenance.
b. If winch assembly moves properly, go to next procedural step.
STEP 4. Check corner pulley assemblies for damage.
a. If corner pulley assemblies are damaged, notify Field Maintenance.
b. If symptoms continue, notify Field Maintenance.
END OF TASK
0009-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0009
TOP ASSEMBLY - Continued.
SYMPTOM
Top Assembly is uneven or not level.

MALFUNCTION
Lift/locking assemblies not properly deployed.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Check that the lift/locking assemblies are properly seated in the channel.
a. Properly seat lift/locking assemblies that are not seated properly. Refer to WP 0005
for instructions.
b. If problem corrected, return to normal operations.
c. If symptom continues, go to next procedural step.
STEP 2. Visually inspect lift/locking assemblies for damage.
a. If lift/locking assemblies are damage, notify Field Maintenance.
b. If symptom continues, notify Field Maintenance.
END OF TASK
SYMPTOM
Lift/locking assemblies will not operate properly.

MALFUNCTION
Lift/locking Assemblies will not turn to stow or deploy.

CORRECTIVE ACTION

a. If lift/locking assemblies are damaged, notify Field Maintenance.
MALFUNCTION
Lift/locking assemblies will not lock into place in the deployed position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION

a. If lift/locking assemblies are damaged, notify Field Maintenance.
b. If symptom continues, go to next procedural step.
0009-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0009

STEP 2. Inspect to see if top assembly is bowed away from the bottom assembly when trying to
engage the lift/locking assemblies.
a. Push on the center wall of the lower assembly and try to engage the upper assembly
and lower assembly interlocks.
b. If problem corrected, deploy the lift/locking assemblies for operation.
c. If symptoms continue, go to next procedural step.
NOTE
These procedures may require two personnel to perform tasks.
d. Perform the following steps:
1) Stow the lift/locking assemblies.
2) Lower the top assembly 12 inches using the corner winch.
3) Raise the top assembly using the corner winch and push on the wall that is
bowed of the lower assembly.
4) As the top assembly is raised near the line that indicates not to raise above the
line, ensure that enough force is used to ensure the interlocks of the upper
section and lower section come together.
5) If there is no bow in the side wall after the steps have been performed, put the
lift/locking assemblies in place.
6) Maintain pressure on the wall that was bowed until lift/locking assemblies are in
place. Use a second person for this step.
7) If problem corrected, return to normal operations.
e. If symptom continues, notify Field Maintenance.
END OF TASK
SYMPTOM
Cannot manually extend the upper section of the CBC.

MALFUNCTION
Cannot connect lifting device to extend the CBC.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Visually inspect the four lift rings on the top of the CBC for damage.
a. If lift rings are damaged, notify Field Maintenance.
MALUFUNCTION
Wire rope assembly preventing top of CBC from being manually lifted.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Visually inspect to see if wire rope assembly is visible from the outside of the CBC.
.
0009-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0009
a. If wire rope assembly is visible or hanging on the outside of the CBC, notify Field
Maintenance.
b. If wire rope assembly is not visible on the outside of the CBC, look on the inside to see
if it is out of the channel and preventing the top assembly from being manually
extended.
END OF TASK
SYMPTOM
Cannot hoist the CBC.

MALFUNCTION
Cannot connect lifting device to hoist the CBC.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
a. If lift rings are damaged, notify Field Maintenance.
END OF TASK
SYMPTOM
Cannot access Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) roof from the upper assembly.
MALFUNCTION
Upper and middle folding steps will not deploy.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Visually inspect to see if upper and middle folding steps are damaged or broken.
a. If the upper or middle step is broken, notify Field Maintenance.
b. If the upper or middle step is not broken, proceed to next procedure.
MALFUNCTION
Cannot access bail handle on top of the CBC.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Visually inspect to see if the bail handle is damaged or broken.

a. If the bail handle is broken, notify Field Maintenance.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0009-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0010
PERSONNEL DOOR ASSEMBLY TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
INITIAL SETUP:
Operator (1) WP 0005
WP 0017
SYMPTOM
Gaps can be seen around the door.

MALFUNCTION
Door will not close properly.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Inspect that nothing is blocking the door from operating properly.
a. Remove any objects or debris that may prevent door from closing properly.
b. If nothing is blocking the door, go to next procedural step.
STEP 2. Inspect door for damage or missing parts that do not allow for proper operation.
a. If door is damaged or missing parts, notify your supervisor/contact Field Maintenance.
b. If door is not damaged or missing parts, go to next procedural step.
STEP 3. Check that the lift/locking assemblies are working properly and in place.
a. Check that the pins at the base of the lift/locking assemblies in each corners are
properly seated.
STEP 4. Check door alignment.
a. Check that lower door panel mates to upper door panel.
STEP 5. Inspect to see if the three hand knobs are loose or missing.
a. Tighten the three hand knobs if they are loose.
b. Replace hand knob if missing.
c. If problem corrected, return to normal operations.
d. If symptoms continue, notify your supervisor.
END OF TASK
0010-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0010
PERSONNEL DOOR ASSEMBLY - Continued.
SYMPTOM
Door does not operate properly.
MALFUNCTION
Door binds on closing.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Check to ensure that the CBC is on a level surface.

a. Move the CBC to a level surface.
b. If CBC is on a level surface, go to next procedural step.
a. If lift/locking assemblies are not working properly, refer to STEP 3 of “Door will not
close properly” malfunction.
b. If lift/locking assemblies are working properly, go to next procedural step
STEP 3. Check door alignment.
a. Ensure that the lower door panel mates to upper door panel.
b. Ensure that the tongue-and-groove assembly mates are engaged.
c. If problem corrected, return to normal operations.
d. If symptoms continue, go to next procedural step.
STEP 4. Ensure that the hinges are cleaned of dirt or sand. Lubricate hinges, refer to WP 0017.
STEP 5. Be sure the three hand knobs are tightened securely. Refer to (WP 0005) for hinge
instructions.
STEP 6. Open and close door to make sure it operates and closes properly.
a. If problem corrected, return to normal operations.
b. If symptoms continue, notify your supervisor.
END OF TASK
SYMPTOM
Door latch will not engage properly.

MALFUNCTION
Strike rod does not engage in hole in threshold.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Check to ensure that hole in threshold is clear and free of debris.
a. Clear any debris or objects from the threshold that may prevent proper operation.
0010-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0010
a. Check that the pins at the base of the lift/locking assemblies in each corner are
properly seated in the channel.
b. If lift/locking assemblies are properly seated, go to next procedural step.
STEP 3. Ensure that the door latch rod is installed correctly and passes through the door rod
guides on the personnel door (WP 0005).
STEP 4. Ensure that all door latch cotter pins are installed and not missing.
a. If door latch cotter pins are missing, notify your supervisor.
b. If door latch cotter pins are installed properly, go to next procedural step.
STEP 5. Ensure that bolts on both door hinges are tightened securely and not damaged.
a. If hinges are not secure or damaged, notify your supervisor.
b. If hinges are not damaged and secure, go to next procedural step.
STEP 6. Check that lower door panel mates to upper door panel and that the tongue-and-groove
assembly mates correctly.
STEP 7. Be sure to tighten the three hand knobs securely.
a. If problem corrected, return to normal operations.
END OF TASK
SYMPTOM
Door will not open.

MALFUNCTION
Turning door handle will not release door latch.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Check to ensure that the CBC is on a level surface.

a. Move the CBC to a level surface.
b. If problem is corrected, return to normal operations.
c. If symptoms continue, notify your supervisor.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0010-3/4 blank
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0011
CBC MOUNTING KIT TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required
Operator
CBC MOUNTING KIT
SYMPTOM
Evidence of accumulating water, dust, or sand detected inside CBC.

MALFUNCTION
Gaps between CBC and vehicle bed.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Visually inspect for gaps between the CBC and vehicle bed in the area of accumulation.
a. Refer to Service Upon Receipt, “Identifying Gaps Between the CBC and the Vehicle
Bed,” to identify how much gap space there is.
b. If gaps are found between the CBC and vehicle bed, notify your supervisor.
c. If there are no gaps identified, go to next procedural step.
END OF TASK
SYMPTOM
CBC leaking.
MALFUNCTION
Cracked or missing RTV adhesive around threshold area of the CBC.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Check for cracked or missing RTV adhesive around threshold area at the rear of the
CBC.
a. If there are cracks or missing RTV adhesive around threshold area at the rear of the
CBC, notify Field Maintenance.
b. If CBC continues to leak, notify your supervisor.
END OF TASK
0011-1
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0011
CBC MOUNTING KIT - Continued
SYMPTOM
D-rings not operating properly.
MALFUNCTION
Cannot access the D-rings for operation.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Check for accumulation coming from D-rings in the bed of the carrier.
a. If accumulation is found coming from D-rings in the bed of the carrier, notify
your supervisor/contact Field Maintenance.
b. If problem continues, notify your supervisor.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0011-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0012
FIELD MAINTENANCE
TOP ASSEMBLY TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
INITIAL SETUP:
Maintainer WP 0013 WP 0029
WP 0024 WP 0030
WP 0026 WP 0039
WP 0027
TOP ASSEMBLY
SYMPTOM
Top Assembly will not retract or extend.

MALFUNCTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. If CBC cannot extend, lift the top section of the CBC with lifting device and visually
check if wire rope assembly is damaged or broken. Refer to WP 0039 for lifting the
CBC manually.
a. If cables are damaged, cut, or have separated strands, replace the wire rope
assembly. Refer to WP 0029.
b. If cables are not damaged, cut, or have separated strands, go to next procedural step.
STEP 2. Check winch assembly for damaged or broken parts.
a. If winch assembly is damaged or broken, replace the winch assembly. Refer to WP
0030.
b. If loose parts/assemblies are not found, go to next procedural step.
STEP 3. Check corner pulley assemblies for damage.
a. If corner pulley assemblies are damaged, notify your supervisor.
END OF TASK
0012-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0012

SYMPTOM
Top Assembly is uneven or not level.

MALFUNCTION
Lift/locking assemblies not properly deployed.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Visually inspect to see if lift/locking assembly is damaged or broken.

a. If the lift/locking assembly is damaged or broken, replace the lift/locking assembly.
Refer to WP 0027.
STEP 2. Visually inspect to see if corner fitting assembly is damaged so that the lift/locking
assembly will not fit in the channel around the corner fitting assembly.
a. If corner fitting assembly is damaged, notify supervisor.
b. If symptoms continue, go to next procedural step.
STEP 3. Perform cable adjustment. Refer to WP 0029 for adjustment procedures.
STEP 4. Refer to troubleshooting procedure “Winch Assembly Will Not Operate.” Refer to WP
0013.
STEP 5. If the prior procedure does not solve the problem, notify your supervisor.
END OF TASK
SYMPTOM
Lift/locking assemblies will not operate properly.

MALFUNCTION
Lift/locking assemblies will not turn to stow or deploy.

CORRECTIVE ACTION

a. If lift/locking assemblies are damaged, replace the lift/lock assembly. Refer to WP
0027.
b. If lift/locking assemblies are not damaged, perform the following steps:
1) Remove the shoulder screw and associated hardware from the lift/locking
assembly.
2) Add thread locker to the shoulder screw.
3) Reinstall the shoulder screw and associated hardware into lift/locking assembly.
Do not over tighten the shoulder screw when securing the lift/locking assembly.
c. If symptom continues, notify your supervisor.
0012-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0012
MALFUNCTION
Lift/locking assemblies will not lock into place in the deployed position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Visually inspect lift/locking assemblies for damage or missing parts.

a. If lift/locking assemblies are damaged or missing parts, replace the lift/locking
assembly. Refer to WP 0027.
b. If symptoms continue, go to next procedural step.
STEP 2. Perform cable adjustment. Refer to WP 0029 for adjustment procedures.
a. If symptom continues, notify your supervisor.
END OF TASK
SYMPTOM
Cannot manually extend the upper section of the CBC.

MALFUNCTION
Cannot connect lifting device to lift the CBC.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
a. If any of the four lift rings is damaged, replace the lift ring that is damaged. Refer to
WP 0024.
c. If the prior procedure does not solve the problem, notify your supervisor.
MALUFUCTION
Wire rope assembly preventing top of CBC from lifting.
STEP 1. Visually inspect to see if wire rope assembly is damaged.

a. Remove the wire rope assembly from the CBC. Refer to WP 0029 for removal
instructions.
END OF TASK
0012-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0012
SYMPTOM
Cannot hoist the CBC.

MALFUNCTION
Cannot connect lifting device to hoist the CBC.

a. If any of the four lift rings are damaged, replace the lift ring that is damaged. Refer to
WP 0024.
d. If problem is corrected, return to normal operations.
END OF TASK
SYMPTOM
Cannot access Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) roof from the upper assembly.
MALFUNCTION
Upper and middle folding steps will not deploy.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Visually inspect to see if upper or middle folding step is damaged or broken.
a. If the upper or middle step is damaged, replace the upper or middle step. Refer to WP
0026.
c. If symptom continues, notify your supervisor.
MALFUNCTION
Cannot access bail handle on top of the CBC.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Visually inspect to see if the bail handle is damaged or broken.

a. If the bail handle is broken, replace the bail handle. Refer to WP 0023.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0012-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0013
FIELD MAINTENANCE
BOTTOM ASSEMBLY TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
INITIAL SETUP:
Maintainer (1) WP 0028
WP 0029
WP 0030
BOTTOM ASSEMBLY
SYMPTOM
Cannot raise top assembly.

MALFUNCTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Visually inspect to see if wire rope assembly is damaged.

a. If cables are not damaged, cut, or have separated strands, go to next procedural step.
b. If cables are damaged, cut, or have separated strands, replace wire rope assembly.
Refer to WP 0029.
c. If symptoms continue, go to next procedural step
STEP 2. Inspect to see if hand-operated drum is damaged and will not operate.
a. If hand-operated drum is damaged, replace the hand-operated drum. Refer to WP
0030.
END OF TASK
0013-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0013
BOTTOM ASSEMBLY - Continued.
SYMPTOM
Cannot access Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) roof from the lower assembly.
MALFUNCTION
Lower folding step will not deploy.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Visually inspect to see if lower folding step is damaged or broken.

a. If the lower step is broken, replace the lower step. Refer to WP 0028.
c. If symptoms continue, notify your supervisor.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0013- 2
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0014
FIELD MAINTENANCE
PERSONNEL DOOR ASSEMBLY TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
INITIAL SETUP:
Maintainer (1) WP 0005
WP 0032
SYMPTOM
Gaps can be seen around the door.

MALFUNCTION
Door will not close properly.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Inspect the personnel door assembly for damage.

a. If personnel door assembly is damaged, replace personnel door assembly. Refer to
WP 0032.
b. If personnel door assembly is not damaged, go to next procedural step.
c. If problem corrected, return to normal procedures.
STEP 2. If symptoms continue, notify your supervisor.
END OF TASK
SYMPTOM
Upper and lower door latch will not engage properly.

MALFUNCTION
Lower door latch rod does not engage in hole in threshold.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Inspect lower door latch rod to see if door latch is damaged.
a. If lower door latch rod is damaged, replace lower door latch rod. Refer to WP 0005.
c. If lower door latch rod is not damaged, go to next procedural step.
0014-1
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0014
STEP 2. Inspect upper door latch rod to see if door latch is damaged.
a. If upper door latch rod is damaged, replace lower door latch rod. Proceed with steps
below:
1) Remove the two cotter pins that secure the door handle to the door latch
mechanism.
2) Remove the door handle and remove the upper door latch rod from behind the
door handle.
3) Insert a new upper door latch rod through the door-latch rod guide.
4) Attach the door handle over the upper hole of the upper door latch rod.
5) Secure the door handle in place using a cotter pin.
c. f lower door latch rod is not damaged, go to next procedural step
STEP 3. If symptom continues, notify your supervisor.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0014-2
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0015
FIELD MAINTENANCE
CBC MOUNTING KIT TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
INITIAL SETUP:
Maintainer WP 0033
WP 0034
WP 0035
CBC MOUNTING KIT
SYMPTOM
Evidence of accumulating water, dust, or sand detected inside CBC.

MALFUNCTION
Gaps between CBC and vehicle bed.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Check for gaps between the CBC and vehicle bed in the area of accumulation.
a. If there are no gaps identified, proceed to next malfunction.
b. If gaps are found along the front wall of the CBC, apply RTV adhesive to the area.
Refer to WP 0033, WP 0034, or WP 0035, depending on which vehicle mounting kit
being dealt with, for instructions on applying RTV.
c. If gaps are found along side walls or the rear of the CBC, apply RTV. Refer to WP
0033, WP 0034, or WP 0035, depending on which vehicle mounting kit being dealt
with, for instructions on applying RTV.
d. If symptoms continue, go to next procedural step.
MALFUNCTION
Vehicle mounting kit is damaged or missing parts.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Visually inspect to see if the vehicle mounting kit is damaged or missing parts.
a. If the vehicle mounting kit is damaged, replace the vehicle mounting kit. Refer to WP
0033, WP 0034, or WP 0035, depending on which vehicle mounting kit being dealt
with.
b. If the prior procedure does not solve the problem, notify your supervisor.
END OF TASK
0015-1
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0015
CBC MOUNTING KIT - Continued
SYMPTOM
CBC leaking.
MALFUNCTION
Cracked or missing RTV adhesive around threshold area of the CBC.

CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEP 1. Check for cracked or missing RTV adhesive around threshold area at the rear of the
CBC.
a. If there are cracks or missing RTV adhesive around threshold area at the rear of the
CBC, refer to WP 0033, WP 0034, or WP 0035, “Gaps Between the CBC and the
Vehicle Bed.”
b. If the prior procedure does not solve the problem, notify your supervisor.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0015-2
CHAPTER 4
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0016
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This section contains information needed to perform operator Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
(PMCS). Illustrated steps are included to help perform these procedures easily and quickly. PMCS consists of
scheduled maintenance items used to make sure the Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) is ready for operation at all times.
Inspect the system regularly and carefully to find any defects and correct or prevent them.
General
PMCS is performed to keep the equipment in operating condition. The checks are used to find, correct, or report
problems. Pay attention to WARNING and CAUTION statements. A WARNING indicates the possibility of injury
or death to personnel. A CAUTION means the equipment could be damaged.
• Before operation, perform “Before PMCS.”
• During operation, perform “During PMCS.”
• After operation, perform “After PMCS.”
Corrosion Definition
Component damage is caused when material has been dissolved or eaten away, especially by chemical action.
Rust Definition
Any various scaly or powdery reddish-brown or reddish-yellow materials that form on iron and iron-coated
materials in the presence of moisture, deteriorating as a result of disuse or neglect.
Deterioration Definition
Any condition that causes material to be impaired or lessens the quality or value of the material.
Cracking Definition
When material is found to be split or broken, either completely or partially.

Inspection
Always look for signs of problems or trouble. Most easily-fixed problems can be detected by feel, smell, or sound.
Be alert when around the CBC.
Inspect to ensure that all components are in good condition. Are they correctly assembled, stowed, or secured?
Are any components worn, corroded, or rusty? Correct any problems found or notify immediate supervisor.
There are common items that should be checked. These include the following:
• Bolts, clamps, screws, and nuts: Continuously inspect for looseness. Inspect for chipped paint, bare
metal, rust, or corrosion around bolt and screw heads and nuts. Replace as necessary. Tighten hardware
as required and if tools are not available, notify immediate supervisor.
• Inspect welds: Some components of the CBC set are welded. To inspect welds, look for chipped paint,
rust, corrosion, or gaps. When these conditions are noted, notify immediate supervisor.
0016-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0016
CLEANING AND LUBRICATION
Proper cleaning and lubrication can aid in avoiding possible problems or trouble. Make it a habit to do the
following:
CAUTION
Follow all cleaning and lubrication instructions carefully. Failure to do so could result in damage to
the equipment.
Under harsh environmental conditions, PMCS should be conducted more frequently.
Use only the recommended cleaning solutions and lubricants listed in the Expendable and Durable Items List (WP
0057).
EXPLANATION OF THE COLUMNS FOUND IN THE PMCS TABLE
Item No. The item number lists the checks and services in the order they are to be performed. This column will be
used as a source of item for the TM Number Column on DA Form 2404 or Form 5988E (electronic version),
Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet, in recording the result of the PMCS.
Interval. References when the PMCS should be performed.
Application/Explanation
Before an operation
During an operation
After an operation
Monthly
Quarterly
Semi-Annually
Annually
Man-hour. Specifies man-hours required to complete all prescribed lubrication services, stated to the nearest
tenth of an hour.
Item to be Checked or Serviced. Identifies the portion of the system to be inspected.
Procedures. Provides the procedures for performing the checks.
Equipment not Ready/Available if. Contains the criteria that will render the system incapable of performing its
primary mission. If system does not perform as required, refer to Chapter 3, Operator Troubleshooting
Procedures. If anything looks wrong and cannot be fixed, immediately report it to immediate supervisor and report
it on DA Form 2404.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0016-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0017
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) for Cargo Bed Cover.
ITEM INTERVAL ITEM TO BE PROCEDURE EQUIPMENT NOT

NO. CHECKED OR READY/
SERVICED AVAILABLE IF:
NOTE
Ensure CBC is in its extended
position. Refer to WP 0005.
1 Before Assembly, Door, a. Inspect to see that the personnel Personnel door
Personnel (Upper) door assembly (upper) (Figure 1, assembly (upper)
Item 1) is properly engaged. does not open or
close properly.
b. Verify that the three hand knobs The three hand

with screws (Figure 1, Item 3,) knobs with screws
that secure the personnel door are missing, and the
assembly (upper) (Figure 1, Item personnel door
1) and personnel door assembly assembly (upper)
(lower) (Figure 1, Item 7) are and personnel door
tightened securely. assembly (lower)
will not attach
together.
c. Verify that the cotter pins (Figure Door latch

1, Item 9) in the door latch mechanism does
mechanism (Figure 1, Item 10) not operate properly
are installed an not damaged. or cotter pin is
missing.
d. Verify that the pull strap (Figure 1, Pull strap is

Item 2) is undamaged. damaged or
missing.
e. Check for free and easy operation Door stop/hold open

of the personnel door latch device is damaged
mechanism (Figure 1, Item 10) or does not operate
and door stop/hold open device. properly.
f. Verify that door latch rods (Figure Door latch rods are
1, Item 5) are not damaged or missing or damaged
missing. to prevent
operation.
g. Inspect personnel door assembly Personnel door

(upper) for punctures that can assembly (upper) is
cause leaking. punctured and is
allowing leaking into
the CBC. Refer to
WP 0032 for repair
procedures.
0017-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0017
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) for Cargo Bed Cover - Continued.

Before Assembly, Door, h. Inspect personnel door assembly Inspect personnel

Personnel (Upper) - (upper) for dents. door assembly
Continued. (upper) is dented as
to prevent proper
operation. Refer to
WP 0032 for repair
procedures.
2 Before Assembly, Door, a. Inspect to see that the personnel Personnel door
Personnel (Lower) door assembly (lower) (Figure 1, assembly (lower)
Item 7) is properly engaged and does not attach
secured to the personnel door securely to the
assembly (upper) (Figure 1, Item personnel door
1). assembly (upper).
b. Inspect personnel door assembly Personnel door

(lower) for punctures that can assembly (lower) is
cause leaking. punctured and is
allowing leaking into
the CBC. Refer to
WP 0032 for repair
procedures.
c. Inspect personnel door assembly Inspect personnel

(lower) for dents. door assembly
(lower) is dented as
to prevent proper
operation. Refer to
WP 0032 for repair
procedures.
3 Before Step, Pole, Upper a. Inspect for free and easy Roof access steps
and Step, Pole, operation of the roof access are cracked,
Lower and Step, folding steps (Figure 1, Item 11). broken, or
Folding, Bottom otherwise damaged.
Roof access step
hardware is
missing.
4 Before Assembly, Ring, Lift a. Check for free and easy operation Lift rings cracked,
of lift rings (Figure 1, Item 14). broken, or
otherwise damaged.
b. Ensure that the lift rings (Figure 1, Lift rings do not

Item 14) operate properly. operate properly.
0017-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0017

Before Assembly, Ring, Lift - c. Check for any cracks or breaks in Area around lift
Continued. the assembly that would create an rings is damaged
unsafe condition. that would prevent
the lift rings from
operating properly.
d. Check for any loose or missing Lift rings hardware

attaching hardware (Figure 1, Item missing.
13) that would create an unsafe
condition.
5 Before Assembly, Locking, a. Inspect the condition of the Lift/locking

Lift lift/locking assemblies (Figure 1, assembly does not
Item 18). swing into position
properly.
6 Before Handle, Bail a. Inspect that the roof access step Roof access
handhold attaching hardware handhold attaching
(Figure 1, Item 17) is secure and hardware missing or
not missing (WP 0023). not secure.
7 Before Port, Ventilation a. Inspect to make sure that the Ventilation ports
ventilation ports (Figure 1, Item blocked or air cooler
15) are not blocked. filter pad dirty.
b. Ensure air cooler filter pad is not Air cooler filter pad
missing (Figure 1, Item 16) and is missing.
clean if necessary.
8 Before Assembly, Rope, a. Inspect the visible portion of the Cable damaged,
Wire cabling in the lower section cable frayed, or abraded.
channel.
9 Before Bolts, Mounting, a. Inspect that all carrier mounting Carrier hardware
Carrier hardware (Figure 1, Item 21) is missing or not
securely tightened. secure.
b. Ensure that all vehicle/trailer Vehicle/trailer

mounting kit hardware (Figure 1, mounting kit
Item 20) is tightened securely. hardware missing or
not secure.
10 Before Angles, Mounting, a. Visually inspect carrier mounting Carrier mounting

Carrier angles are not damaged or angles are
secured (Figure 1, Item 20). damaged.
0017-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0017

11 Before Mounting Kit a. Visually inspect that all pieces to Any part of the
the vehicle/trailer kit are in place. vehicle/trailer kit is
missing or
damaged.
b. Ensure that all vehicle/trailer Vehicle/trailer

mounting kit hardware (Figure 1, mounting kit
Item 20) is tightened securely. hardware missing or
not secure.
c. Visually inspect for gaps between Refer to Service

the CBC and the vehicle/trailer kit. Upon Receipt
“Identifying Gaps
Between the CBC
and the Vehicle
Bed.”
0017-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0017
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) for Cargo Bed Cover - Continued.
1 2
8 3
5
7
4
9 12
11
13
10
14
17
18
16
15
Figure 1. CBC “Before Operation” PMCS (Sheet 1 of 2).
0017-5
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0017
19
20
21
21
Figure 1. CBC “Before Operation” PMCS (Sheet 2 of 2).
0017-6
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0017

12 Before Assembly, Locking, a. Inspect that the lift/locking Lift/locking assemblies

Lift assemblies (Figure 2, Item 2) do not swing down or
operate smoothly and install in a lock properly in a
vertical and locked position (WP vertical position.
0027).
13 After Winch, Drum, Hand- a. Inspect winch mechanism Winch mechanism

Operated (Figure 3, Item 1) for damage to has damage to
worm gear or drum. worm gear or drum.
14 After Assembly, Door, a. Inspect hinges (Figure 3, Item 2) Door hinges are
Personnel on the upper and lower sections damaged or missing
of the personnel door for damage hardware.
or loose hardware.
Figure 2. CBC “During Operation” PMCS.
0017-7
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0017

15 After Strip, Rub, Cable, a. Inspect the condition of the Burrs on helicopter
Helicopter helicopter cable rub strip (Figure rub strip that would
3, Item 5) for burrs or any abrade or cut
damage that could cause helicopter airlift
damage to the helicopter cable cables.
during airlift.
16 After Surface, Interior, a. Inspect and clean the inside Cleaning is required
CBC (Figure 3, Item 4) of the CBC with to ensure normal
a rag and mildly soapy water. operation.
17 After Surface, Exterior, a. Inspect and wash the outside of Cleaning is required
CBC the CBC (Figure 3, Item 3) as to ensure normal
necessary. operation.
18 After Mounting Kit a. Visually inspect for gaps between Refer to Service
the CBC and the vehicle/trailer kit Upon Receipt
and vehicle/trailer bed. “Identifying Gaps
Between the CBC
and the Vehicle Bed.”
19 Quarterly Winch, Drum, Hand- a. Inspect and lubricate winch Winch mechanism
Operated mechanism (Figure 3, Item 1) in has not been
accordance with the lubrication lubricated according
schedule. to schedule or
exhibits evidence of
requiring additional
lubrication.
20 Quarterly Assembly, Door, a. Inspect and lubricate hinges Door hinges have not
Personnel (Figure 3, Item 2) on the upper been lubricated
and lower sections of the according to
personnel door in accordance schedule or exhibit
with the lubrication schedule. evidence of requiring
additional lubrication.
21 Annually Assembly, Door, a. Inspect that the winch mechanism Upper section of the
Personnel (Figure 2, Item 3) and the upper CBC CBC does not rise
section (Figure 2, Item 1) operates smoothly, or the winch
smoothly. Refer to (WP 0005). assembly appears to be
binding.
b. Inspect that no unusual effort is

required to operate the winch.
22 Annually Assembly, Rope, a. Inspect wire rope assembly for Perform wire rope
Wire proper cable adjustment. assembly adjustment.
Refer to WP 0029.
0017-8
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0017
3
1
4
Figure 3. CBC “After Operation” PMCS.

END OF TASK
LUBRICATION REQUIREMENTS
Personnel Door Assembly
The door hinges (Figure 4, Item 1) of the personnel door assembly should be lubricated with lithium based grease
every 3 months (quarterly) or if there is any resistance to casual movement of the door or if the door squeaks
when opened or closed.
1. Clean part with cotton cloth prior to lubricating.
2. Lubricate part, being careful not to over lubricate.
3. Wipe any excess lubricant from part.
END OF TASK
Folding Steps (Upper, Middle, and Lower)

The folding steps (Figure 4, Item 2) of the CBC should be lubricated with lithium based grease every 3 months
(quarterly) or if there is any resistance to casual movement when deploying the folding steps.
1. Clean part with cotton cloth prior to lubricating.

2. Lubricate part, being careful not to over lubricate.
3. Wipe any excess lubricant from part.
END OF TASK
0017-9
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0017
Hand-Operated Winch Drum Assembly
NOTE
The hand-operated winch cover assembly should be lubricated every 3 months (quarterly).
1. In order to lubricate the hand operated winch cover assembly, remove the winch cover assembly as
described in WP 0030.
2. Lubricate the worm gear where it contacts the drum gear (Figure 4, Item 3).
3. Check that the winch works smoothly.
4. Replace the winch cover assembly as described in WP 0030.
Figure 4. CBC Lubrication Point Locations.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0017-10
CHAPTER 5
FIELD MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

FOR
CARGO BED COVER (CBC) TYPE IIIA1,
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0018

SERVICE UPON RECEIPT
INITIAL SETUP:
Equipment Condition Personnel Required
CBC on shipping pallet in position near vehicle. Light-Wheel Vehicle Mechanic (91B) (2)
Tools and Special Tools References
General Mechanic Tool Kit (WP 0055, Table 2, Item DA Form 361
21)
DA PAM 750-8
Lifting Device (1 Ton minimum)
WP 0005
Gloves (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 12)
WP 0019
Goggles (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 12)
WP 0020
WP 0021
GENERAL
The Cargo Bed Cover is shipped mounted to a modified pallet that must be removed prior to installation. The
Field Maintenance technician should inspect the equipment before it is used. Following is a list of functions which
must be performed upon receipt of the CBC: procedures to remove straps for shipping purposes are below.
WARNING
Safety goggles must be worn during repair to protect eyes from flying metal chips. The metal
straps that secure the CBC to the shipping skid can cause severe damage or even death to
personnel if not removed with care. Be sure to follow the instructions when removing the metal
straps.
1. Hold the metal strap with one hand.
2. Using cutting shears, cut the metal strap.
3. Discard the metal strap.
4. Repeat for metal strap on each corner of the CBC.
CHECKING UNPACKED EQUIPMENT
Inspect the equipment for damage incurred during shipment. If the equipment has been damaged, report the
damage on DA Form 361, Transportation Discrepancy Report.
Check the equipment against the packing slip to see if the shipment is complete. Report all discrepancies in
accordance with applicable service instructions (e.g., for Army instructions, see DA PAM 750-8).
0018-1
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0018
Checking Unpacked Equipment - Continued.
Table 1. Inspection Criteria for Packaging.
COMPONENT ACCEPTABLE REPAIRABLE NONREPAIRABLE
Wooden Boxes and Crates
Metal Ends Minor rust, cracks, None. Perforations, excessive

indentations, or splits that rust, or ends which are
would not impair water crushed or not securely
proofing or serviceability crimped to body.
of container.
Body and Cap No leaks, cuts, or Cuts, tears, gouges not Cuts, tears, or gouges
gouges. closer than 1 inch to closer than 1 inch to
closure, less than 1/2 closure, more than 1/2
square inch in area, and square inch in area, or
impenetrable layers that through all impregnated
can be spot painted. layers.
Wood Splits less than 3 inches Splits more than 3 in. but Splits closer than 1 in to
(in) long, no closer than no closer than 1 in. to edge of board or
1 in. to edge of board or edge of board or adjoining split or over 1/2
adjoining split. The board adjoining split or 1/2 in. in. wide.
must be secured by at wide that can be repaired
least one nail on each by use of corrugated
side of the split when it fasteners.
extends to the end of the
board.
Hardware Operative and tight: Inoperative or loose: None.
Nails, screws, and Nails, screws, and
fasteners. fasteners.
Ends Free from damage. Broken or missing cleats Damage that requires
and handles. disassembly of box.
Box with hand socket Attached to skid with no None. None.
wrench inside on pallet. damage that would cause
leaking. Properly
functioning ratchet inside
box.
END OF TASK
PACKING LIST VERIFICATION
Check the equipment against the packing list, located inside the box containing the mounting kit, to see if the
shipment is complete. Report all discrepancies in accordance with DA PAM 750-8.
Pre-Operation Services
Service any damaged equipment, as necessary, using Field Maintenance procedures in Chapter 5 to restore
equipment to operable condition.
0018-2
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0018
REMOVING THE CARGO BED COVER FROM ITS WRAPPING AND SHIPPING PALLET
NOTE
If the CBC is not being mounted, leave it attached to shipping pallet for storage.
For mounting kit installation instructions, refer to Table 2. Vehicle Type and Mounting Kit Reference.
Table 2. Vehicle Type and Mounting Kit Reference.
Vehicle Type Mounting Kit Required TM Work Package Describing

Installation
M923, 5 Ton Cargo Truck 7045248 WP 0019
M1083, 5 Ton MTV 7045255 WP 0020
M1095, 5 Ton MTV Trailer 7045256 WP 0021
END OF TASK
REMOVAL OF THE CBC FROM THE SHIPPING PALLET
NOTE
CBC is on the pallet in the extended position.
1. Remove two hex head screws (Figure 17, Item 2) and two flat washers (Figure 17, Item 3) from the inside of
the CBC (Figure 17, Item 5) that secure the CBC (Figure 17, Item 5) to the pallet (Figure 17, Item 4).
2. Remove four hex head screws (Figure 17, Item 2) and four washers (Figure 17, Item 3) from the outside of
the CBC (Figure 17, Item 5) that secure the CBC (Figure 17, Item 5) to the pallet (Figure 17, Item 4).
1 1
4 3
Figure 1. Lifting the CBC from the Pallet.
0018-3
TM-10-5411-248-13&P 0018
Removal of the CBC from the Shipping Pallet - Continued.
WARNING
Whenever lifting the CBC off the ground have guide personnel using guide lines to prevent the
CBC from swinging eratically. Injury or death to the operator or observers could occurr if guide
lines are not used.
NOTE
Leave the CBC on the pallet until the mounting kit is ready to be mounted. This will keep the
CBC clean of debris.
3. Attach the proper lifting sling to the CBC lift rings (Figure 17, Item 1)
4. Lift the CBC (Figure 17, Item 5) from the pallet (Figure 17, Item 4) using the lifting device when installing the
mounting kit. Refer to WP 0005 entitled “HOISTING THE CBC USING THE LIFT RING.”
5. Install mounting kit to the bottom of the CBC (Figure 17, Item 5). Refer to Table 2, "Vehicle Type and
Mounting Kit Reference," for the correct mounting kit and installation reference.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0018-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0019
FIELD MAINTENANCE
MOUNTING KIT FOR M923, 5 TON CARGO TRUCK INSTALLATION
INITIAL SETUP:
Vehicle bed clean and free of debris. Operator (1)
CBC unpacked as detailed in WP 0018 and Light-Wheel Vehicle Mechanic (91B) (1)
positioned on pallet near the vehicle.
Crane Operator (21F) (1)
Mounting Kit unpacked and hardware organized
(WP 0018).
Tools and Special Tools Material/Parts
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0055, Table 2, Anti-seize Lubricant (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 5)
Item 21)
Adhesive, RTV-732 (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 1)
Dispenser, RTV adhesive (WP 0055 Table 2, Item 2)
Bag, Sand (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 6)
Four Wood Support Blocks 4x4x12 inches in length
5/16-18 UNC tap (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 28)
Riveter, Blind, Hand (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 16) Rubber strip, 3/8 inch thk x 1.00 inch wide x 25 feet
long, adhesive backed, color black, closed cell,
epdm sponge rubber strip. (WP 0057, Table 1, Item
Goggles (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 12) 20)
References
WP 0005
WP 0022
WP 0057
GENERAL
Before the CBC can be installed on the bed of the M923, 5 Ton Cargo Truck, the bed surface should be cleared
of any foreign matter or other debris that would interfere with the installation process. A mounting kit must be
installed to the truck bed that will allow the CBC to be secured to the vehicle. The lift rings should always be
pointed to the inside of truck bed for operation when CBC is mounted.
Unless it is already in an extended position, once the CBC has been separated from its shipping pallet and
prepared for installation as outlined in the “REMOVING THE CARGO BED COVER FROM ITS WRAPPING AND
SHIPPING PALLET,” paragraph of WP 0018, it must be extended to its operational position as outlined in WP
0005 paragraph “EXTENDING THE CBC TO AN OPERATIONAL POSITION.”
0019-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0019
LIFTING THE CBC INTO POSITION ONTO THE VEHICLE BED
WARNING
When the CBC (Figure 1, Item 1) is in its fully-extended position, it must be lifted into position
using the four Lift Rings (Figure 1, Item 2) positioned along the front and rear roof lines of the
CBC (Figure 1, Item 1). The CBC (Figure 1, Item 1) should be lifted into position over the vehicle
bed (Figure 1, Item 3) in accordance with the paragraph of WP 0005 entitled “HOISTING THE
CBC USING THE LIFT RINGS.”
Figure 1. Lifting CBC onto Vehicle.

END OF TASK
0019-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0019
DETERMINING CORRECT MOUNTING LOCATION
NOTE
In order to ensure that the tie-down rings are free to be used, place them in an upright position
prior to mounting the CBC to the truck bed.
1. Determine the proper mounting position for the CBC on the vehicle bed from front to back by lowering the
CBC into position on the vehicle bed so that the forward end of the top section (Figure 2, Item 2) is 1-1/2
inches back (3.0 inches from the bottom section) from the inside front wall of truck bed (Figure 2, Item 1) of
the vehicle. Do not remove the hoisting sling at this time since it will be necessary to remove the CBC from
the vehicle bed in a later step.
2. Position the CBC with respect to the vehicle bed from left to right, the CBC is centered on the bed of the
vehicle by ensuring that the distance from the CBC sidewalls (Figure 2, Item 3) to the outer edge of the
vehicle bed (Figure 2, Item 4) is equal at all four corners.
1-1/2 INCHES
POSITION THE CBC

ON THE VEHICLE
BED SO THAT EACH
SIDE OF THE CBC IS
TOP VIEW OF 5 TON THE SAME DISTANCE
TRUCK WITH CBC AWAY FROM THE
POSITIONED ON EDGE OF THE
REAR BED VEHICLE BED AT THE
FOUR CORNERS
Figure 2. Determining Mounting Position.

END OF TASK
0019-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0019
MARKING THE LOCATION OF THE CARRIER MOUNTING ANGLE HOLES
1. The bottom edge of the bottom section of the CBC is attached to the vehicle bed by means of a series of
carrier mounting angles (Figure 3, Item 1). These angles and threshold have a total of 27 predrilled mounting
holes where only 19 of the holes (Figure 3, Item 2) are used.
2. Transfer the position of the carrier mounting holes to the vehicle bed, use the 3/8 inch punch (Figure 3, Item
3) supplied with the mounting kit and mark the vehicle bed in 19 places. There are four holes each in the
carrier mounting angles at the front (Figure 3, Item 4), left (Figure 3, Item 5), and right sides (Figure 3, Item 6)
of the CBC. There are two holes in each of the two smaller carrier-mounting angles (Figure 3, Item 7) at the
rear of the CBC located on either side of the door opening and a total of three holes in the threshold.
3. Once all 19 hole positions (Figure 3, Item 2) have been marked, the CBC can be removed from the vehicle
bed and returned to its shipping pallet while the holes are drilled in the vehicle bed and blind rivet nuts
installed.
3(± 0.13) INCHES

VEHICLE CAB
2 CENTER
LINE OF
2 2 CBC AND
2 2
VEHICLE
1
4
CARGO
NOTE: ONLY THOSE BED
CARRIER MOUNTING COVER
5
ANGLE HOLES INDICATED BOTTOM
ON THIS FIGURE BY A SECTION
SHORT ARROW ON THE
M923 INSIDE OF THE CBC 6
TRUCK REQUIRE DRILLING. THE
BED ADDITIONAL EIGHT HOLES
2 SHOWN ON THE SIDE
CARRIER MOUNTING
ANGLES DO NOT REQUIRE 2
DRILLING AND BLIND 3
RIVET NUT INSTALLATION.
2 2 2
7
7
Figure 3. Drilling Hole Locations.

END OF TASK
0019-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0019
DRILLING THE MOUNTING HOLES AND INSTALLING BLIND RIVET NUTS IN THE VEHICLE BED
WARNING
Safety goggles or face shield must be worn during repair to protect eyes from flying metal chips.
WARNING
ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND
Anti-Seize Compound is use for equipment lubrication, lubricant for threaded connections or
slides. It is neither flammable nor toxic. Gloves and safety goggles should be worn during use.
CAUTION
Always apply anti-seize lubricant to bolt and screw threads before installation to prevent galling.
During the installation of blind rivet nuts, the threads inside the blind rivet nut can sometimes be
damaged by the installation tool and may result in the bolts and screws binding. If this occurs,
run a 5/16-18 UNC tap into the threaded area. This will clear and straighten the threads, making
for easier and faster assembly. Care should be taken using this method since the tap has the
ability to remove and/or cross thread existing threads. Be sure to work slowly and deliberately
when clearing the threads. Failure to adhere to this caution may result in thread damage.
NOTE
Drilling is made easier by starting with a smaller diameter drill bit. Increase the drill bit diameter in
steps until the required diameter is met.
All tools needed for installation are included in mounting kit.
Once the CBC has been removed from the vehicle bed to allow access to the hole positions
marked previously, blind rivet nut installation holes must be drilled at each of the 3/8 inch transfer
punch locations (19 total), to their final size using a letter “Z” (0.413 inch) diameter drill bit. Make
sure that the drill bit is positioned in the center of the punched mark.
1. When all holes are drilled, install blind rivet nuts in each of the 19 installation holes using the hand-operated
blind rivet nut installation tool (Figure 4, Item 1), hex key (Figure 4, Item 2), and 3/4 inch wrench (or 1 1/16
inch depending on header tool used).
0019-5
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0019
Drilling the Mounting Holes and Installing Blind Rivet Nuts in the Vehicle Bed - Continued.
2
1
Figure 4. Hand-Operated Insert Installation Tools.
NOTE
Before using the installation tool, inspect the condition of the jackscrew threads before use. If the
tool has been used previously, the jackscrew threads may require a few drops of light machine
oil. If this is the initial use of the tool, no additional lubrication will be required.
2. Apply anti-seize lubricant to the blind rivet nut threads before installation to prevent galling.
3. Thread the blind rivet nut fastener (Figure 5, Item 2) onto the threaded end (Figure 5, Item 3) of the
installation tool (Figure 5, Item 1).
4. Ensure that the end of the installation tool is tight against the head of the fastener.
2
3
Figure 5. Threading the Threaded Insert Fastener.

5. With the blind rivet nut (Figure 6, Item 2) installed on the installation tool (Figure 6, Item 1), insert the blind
rivet nut into the hole (Figure 6, Item 3) previously drilled in the vehicle bed (Figure 6, Item 4).
1
2
4
Figure 6. Threading Insert into Hole in CBC Panel.
0019-6
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0019
Drilling the Mounting Holes and Installing Blind Rivet Nuts in the Vehicle Bed - Continued.
6. Insert the hex key (Figure 7, Item 1) into the socket (Figure 7, Item 2) at the top of the installation tool (Figure
8, Item 3).
7. While holding the hex key (Figure 7, Item 1) stationary and the installation tool (Figure 8, Item 3) at a right
angle to the vehicle bed (Figure 7, Item 4), turn the installation tool (Figure 8, Item 3) in a clockwise direction
keeping track of the number of turns.
8. Turn the installation tool (Figure 8, Item 3) in a clockwise direction until firm resistance indicates that the
fastener is completely set. This will be approximately 1-1/2 to 2 turns.
9. Turn the wrench in a counter-clockwise direction to break its grip with the blind rivet nut.
10. Remove hex key and wrench from the installation tool.
1 2
Figure 7. Installing Threaded Insert.

11. Remove the blind rivet nut installation tool (Figure 8, Item 1) from the blind rivet nut (Figure 8, Item 2) by
turning the entire tool by hand in a counterclockwise direction.
12. Repeat steps for the remaining blind rivets.
Figure 8. Removal of Threaded Insert Installation Tool.

END OF TASK
0019-7
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0019
INSTALLING RUBBER STRIP ON THE CBC
WARNING
lines are not used.
NOTE
After verifying that the CBC (Figure 9, Item 1) has been raised to an operational position, the
CBC must be lifted approximately eight inches and placed on supporting blocks (Figure 9, Item 8)
in order to gain access to the lower edge of the CBC for the installation of the rubber strip. A
hoisting sling must be attached to lift the CBC in accordance with WP 0005.
When initially positioning the blocks, it is best to place them first at the front and rear ends to
allow access to the left and right sides of the CBC and then to move them to the left and right
sides to gain access to the front and rear ends.
Once the CBC has been safely blocked, the rubber strip can be installed. The thickness of
rubber strip is 3/8 inch and supplied in rolls of 25 feet.
1. On the zee brackets (Figure 9, Item 6) on the left and right side of the CBC, install the rubber strip (3/8 inch
thick x 1 inch wide) (Figure 9, Item 3) on the inside edge by removing the protective paper (Figure 9, Item
4) backing and pressing the adhesive side of the rubber strip (3/8 inch thick x 1 inch wide) (Figure 9, Item
3) in place on the zee bracket (Figure 9, Item 6).
2. In order to apply the rubber strip (Figure 9, Item 3) around the entire perimeter of the CBC (Figure 9, Item
1), it will be necessary to lift the CBC (Figure 9, Item 1) and reposition the blocks (Figure 9, Item 7).
NOTE
Do NOT apply the rubber strip (Figure 9, Item 3) to the bottom of the carrier mounting angles
(Figure 9, Item 2).
3. On the front and rear of the CBC (Figure 9, Item 1), install the rubber strip (3/8 inch thick x 1 inch wide)
(Figure 9, Item 3) where the threshold and outer CBC edge meet by removing the protective paper (Figure
9, Item 4) backing and pressing the adhesive side rubber strip (3/8 inch thick x 1 inch wide) (Figure 9, Item
3) in place. Rubber stripping is NOT applied to the carrier mounting angles (Figure 9, Item 2) at the front of
the CBC.
0019-8
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0019
Installing Rubber Strip on the CBC - Continued.
NOTE
The purpose of the extra rubber stripping is to fill the gaps where rubber stripping is missing from
where the zee bracket (Figure 9, Item 6) stops on the outside edge of the CBC (Figure 9, Item 1)
and the front and rear of the CBC (Figure 9, Item 1).
Be sure to place the stripping under the CBC edge as to fill any voids between the zee brackets
(Figure 9, Item 6) on the side of the CBC (Figure 9, Item 1) and the front and rear of the CBC
(Figure 9, Item 1).
4. At the four corners of the CBC (Figure 9, Item 1), an eight-inch piece of rubber strip (3/8 inch thick x 1 inch
wide) will be applied to the CBC where the rubber stripping ends on the zee bracket (Figure 9, Item 6).
Extend the stripping 2 inches beyond the end of the CBC (Figure 9, Item 1) for proper insulation.
2
3/8 IN
1
4 5
6
3
Figure 9. CBC Rubber Strip Installation.

END OF TASK
0019-9
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0019
IDENTIFYING GAPS BETWEEN THE CBC AND THE VEHICLE BED
NOTE
Once the CBC is in its final mounting position on the vehicle bed, the rubber strip seal must be
inspected in order to detect any gaps that may exist between the rubber strip on the underside of
the mounting plate (Figure 10, Item 1) and the vehicle bed (Figure 10, Item 2). These gaps are
typically caused by dents and other irregularities in the surface of the vehicle bed.
1. Inspect the quality of the rubber strip seal by using a flashlight and walk around the outside of the CBC at
vehicle bed level.
2. Shine the light where the rubber strip and vehicle bed meet.
3. Use chalk, masking tape, or other temporary marking instrument to mark those areas of the CBC where gaps
can be seen.
4. Inspect the quality of the rubber strip seal at the front of the CBC, it will be necessary to enter the CBC and
conduct the inspection from the inside.
5. Estimate the width of each gap area in order to determine how much rubber strip is required to properly fill the
gap.
6. Make a note of the thickness required with chalk or on a piece of masking tape placed in the area of the gap.
WARNING
lines are not used.
NOTE
Note that in some cases it may be necessary to use some combination of both sizes of rubber
strip in order to properly close the gap.
7. Once the gaps have been identified and marked, raise the CBC using the hoisting sling to a comfortable
working height and lower onto blocking.
8. Add rubber strip (3/8 inch thick x 1 inch wide) to the areas marked in the previous step.
9. Lower the CBC back into position on the vehicle bed.
10. Inspect the quality of the seal using the method described above. If any gaps are still seen, mark the areas
and apply additional layers of rubber strip as required.
0019-10
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0019
Identifying Gaps Between the CBC and the Vehicle Bed - Continued.
11. Add a second complete layer of rubber strip (3/8 inch thick x 1 inch wide) over the first layer (3/8 inch thick x 1
inch wide).
12. Continue this process until minimal gaps of 1/8 inch or less are present.
13. Once all rubber stripping has been installed, RTV adhesive must applied to the underside of the installed
rubber stripping as detailed in the next paragraph.
MAX GAP BETWEEN CBC

AND VEHICLE BED SHOULD
NOT EXCEED 1/8 INCH
Figure 10. Identifying Gaps Between the CBC and the Vehicle Bed.
END OF TASK
0019-11
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0019
APPLYING RTV ADHESIVE TO THE RUBBER STRIP SURFACE
WARNING
Do not stand inside or directly under the CBC while applying the RTV adhesive. Standing under
a suspended CBC may result in injury should the hoisting sling fail to support the CBC. Failure to
adhere to this warning may result in injury or death.
NOTE
RTV adhesive should be applied only when the CBC is to be immediately mounted to the vehicle
bed. The RTV adhesive has a working time of approximately 20 minutes and will start to cure
after that time. Installing the CBC on the vehicle after the RTV adhesive begins to cure may
adversely affect the RTV adhesive’s ability to properly bond with the vehicle bed.
1. Once all rubber stripping has been applied as detailed in the previous section, a bead of RTV (silicone) RTV
adhesive must be applied where the rubber stripping contacts the vehicle bed.
WARNING
2. Apply the RTV adhesive by raising the CBC to a comfortable working height using the hoisting sling.
3. Install the supplied cartridge of RTV adhesive into a standard caulking gun. Trim the tip of the cartridge so
that a bead approximately 3/16 to 1/4 inch in width can be applied.
4. Apply a continuous bead of RTV adhesive 3/16 to 1/4 inch in width on the surface of the rubber stripping
along the outer edge.
5. Start at one point on the underside of the CBC and move around the entire perimeter of the CBC applying
RTV adhesive to all rubber strip surfaces.
6. Once RTV adhesive has properly applied to all rubber strip surfaces, the CBC should be lowered into position
on the vehicle bed as described in the next section.
END OF TASK
0019-12
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0019
SECURING THE CBC TO THE VEHICLE BED
NOTE
Use the hoisting sling to position the CBC on the vehicle bed so that all 19 holes in the carrier
mounting angles align with the blind rivet nuts that were installed earlier.
1. Apply anti-seize lubricant to bolt and screw threads before installation to prevent galling
2. Bolt the CBC to the vehicle bed at the 12 locations (Locations marked “C” in Figure 12) using one 1/4-28 UNF
x 1.00 inch long hex head bolt (Figure 11, Item 1), flat washer (Figure 11, Item 3), and lockwasher (Figure 11,
Item 2) per hole. The flat washer is placed so that it contacts the mounting angle (Figure 11, Item 4) surface
attaching front and rear walls or zee plate (Figure 11, Item 7) attaching the side walls. The lockwasher
(Figure 11, Item 2) is placed under the head of the bolt (Figure 11, Item 1).
3. At the four hole locations in the carrier mounting angles on either side of the threshold (Locations marked “B”
in Figure 12), install one 1/4-28 UNF x 1.25 inch hex head bolt, flat washer, and lockwasher per hole. Install
the bolts as described above.
4. In the remaining three hole locations on the threshold (Locations marked “A” in Figure 12), install three pan
head screws (Figure 11, Item 5) with lockwasher (Figure 11, Item 6) placed under its head.
5. Tighten all fasteners securely.
5
2
1 6
3
3
7
Figure 11. CBC Fastener Installation.
0019-13
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0019
Securing the CBC to the Vehicle Bed - Continued.
VEHICLE CAB
C
C
C C
C
M923 CENTER LINE

TRUCK OF CBC AND
BED VEHICLE BED
CARGO
BED
COVER
BOTTOM
NOTE: THE LETTERS A, B, AND C
ASSEMBLY
ON THE ILLUSTRATION DENOTE
THE DIFFERENT SIZE HARDWARE
TO BE USED IN SECURING THE
CBC TO THE VEHICLE BED. REFER
TO THE PRECEDING TEXT FOR
ADDITIONAL DETAIL.
C C
C C
B A B
Figure 12. CBC Fastener Size Locations.

END OF TASK
0019-14
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0019
APPLYING RTV ADHESIVE TO THE THRESHOLD

1. Once the CBC has been lowered into position and secured to the vehicle bed, RTV adhesive must be applied
around the threshold area (Figure 13, Item 2) at the rear of the CBC.
WARNING
RTV Adhesive is irritating to eyes and skin and shall be used only in a well-ventilated area. Do
not induce vomiting if ingested – obtain medical attention. Flammable above 200° F (93.3° C).
Gloves and safety goggles should be worn during use.
2. Apply RTV adhesive around the threshold area by starting at the left corner (Figure 13, Item 1) of the CBC
and inject RTV adhesive (Figure 13, Item 4) under the area where the threshold (Figure 13, Item 2) meets the
vehicle bed (Figure 13, Item 3).
3. Fill the area sufficiently to create a good weather seal.
4. Continue to apply a bead of RTV adhesive all along the edge of the threshold (Figure 13, Item 2) at the point
where it meets the vehicle bed (Figure 13, Item 3).
5. Apply RTV adhesive around the hinge pivot pin area (Figure 13, Item 7). Continue around the right corner
(Figure 13, Item 5) of the CBC.
6. Inject RTV adhesive under the right side of the threshold (Figure 13, Item 6) as was done with the left corner.
7. Add a continuous bead of RTV adhesive around the entire base CBC and the vehicle bed. This will help
prevent leakage into the CBC.
1 2
4
3
2
6
7 Figure 13. RTV Adhesive Application.

END OF TASK
0019-15
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0019
INSTALL LADDER
The M923, 5 Ton Cargo Truck may already come with a ladder installed on to the tailgate. If the ladder is already
installed, no installation of a ladder is needed. If the M923, 5 Ton Cargo Truck does not come with a ladder
installed on the tailgate one will need to be installed for access to the CBC. Refer to WP 0022 for instructions for
the installation of the ladder.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0019-16
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
FIELD MAINTENANCE
MOUNTING KIT FOR M1083, 5 TON MTV INSTALLATION
INITIAL SETUP:
Vehicle bed clean and free of debris. Operator (1)
positioned on pallet near the vehicle.
Mounting Kit unpacked and hardware organized (WP
0018).
Side panels and tailgate removed (TM 9-2330-394-
13&P).
Tools and Special Tools Materials/Parts
Item 21)
Dispenser, RTV adhesive (WP 0055, Table 2, Item
2)
Four Wood Support Blocks 4x4 12 inches long (WP
0057, Table 1, Item 29)
Rubber strip, 3/8 inch thk x 1.00 inch wide x 25 feet
Goggles (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 12) long, adhesive backed, color black, closed cell,
epdm sponge rubber strip. (WP 0057, Table 1, Item
References
20)
WP 0005
Masking Tape, Masking (1 inch wide) (WP 0057,
Item 26)
GENERAL
Before the CBC can be installed on the bed of the M1083, 5 Ton MTV, the bed surface should be cleaned of any
foreign matter or other debris that would interfere with the installation process. A mounting kit must be installed to
the truck bed that will allow the CBC to be secured to the vehicle. The lift rings should always be pointed to the
inside of trailer bed for operation when CBC is mounted.
SHIPPING PALLET” paragraph of WP 0018, it must be extended to its operational position as outlined in WP
0005 paragraph “EXTENDING THE CARGO BED COVER TO AN OPERATIONAL POSITION.”
0020-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
WARNING
lines are not used.
Personnel attaching the lifting sling to the lift rings or working on the roof of the CBC should use ladders or
wear approved safety lines or both to prevent falls; injury or death could occur if proper safety equipment
is not used.
NOTE
NOTE
(Figure 1, Item 2).
the CBC.
0020-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
NOTE
(Figure 1, Item 1).
2
3/8 IN
1
4 5
6
3

END OF TASK
0020-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
INSTALLING RUBBER STRIP TO THE MOUNTING PLATE COMPONENTS
NOTE
When laying the side plates along the sides of the CBC, place the holes towards the middle of the
CBC.
1. There are four components to the mounting plate assembly, a front section (Figure 2, Item 1), rear section
(Figure 2, Item 2), left side (Figure 2, Item 3), and right side (Figure 2, Item 4). Lay the four mounting plate
pieces out on the bed of the truck oriented as shown in Figure 3.
2. Slide plates to be placed so edge are flush and holes align with the front and rear plates.
3. Using one of the side plates as a straight edge, stand it on edge over the traced outline. If a space caused by
bed unevenness exceeds 3/4 inch, the truck bed must be repaired before the CBC can be properly mounted
onto the truck.
4. Any place where the unevenness is between 3/8 inch and 3/4 inch, a double layer of rubber stripping must be
applied in that area.
NOTE
Rubber stripping must go on the side of the mounting plate that has contact with the vehicle.
5. Rubber strip must be installed on the side of each mounting plate component as shown in Figure 2. Rubber
strip is also applied on the ends of each side plate (Figure 2, Items 3 and 4) where the plates will eventually
butt against the front (Figure 2, Item 1) and rear sections (Figure 2, Item 2).
6. Install the rubber strip (Figure 2, Item 5) to the mounting plate components as shown in figure 2. Remember
that this will be the side of the mounting plate that will contact the vehicle bed once it is installed on the CBC
and secured to the vehicle.
7. Remove the protective backing (Figure 2, Item 6) from the rubber strip (Figure 2, Item 5).
8. Apply the adhesive side of the rubber strip on the mounting plate component as illustrated. An outline on the
mounting plate shows where the rubber strip is to be applied. Sections of rubber strip should be cut and
applied at a right angle whenever the rubber strip changes direction.
9. Continue applying the rubber strip (Figure 2, Item 5) until it has been applied to all mounting plate
components.
10. Press all rubber strips firmly in place.
11. Apply two sections of rubber stripping approximately four inches in length to cover extra holes (Figure 2,
Items 7 and 8). Ensure that the rubber strips are centered over the holes when applied.
0020-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
Installing the Rubber Strip on the Mounting Plate Components - Continued.
5
FRONT OF VEHICLE 5
3
4
CURB SIDE ROAD SIDE

MOUNTING MOUNTING
PLATE MOUNTING KIT IS PLATE
VIEWED AS IF THE
CBC WAS SITTING ON
ITS ROOF
5
5
REAR OF VEHICLE 5
8 7
5
Figure 2. CBC Layout Orientation.

END OF TASK
0020-5
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
INSTALLING THE FRONT MOUNTING PLATE SECTION
NOTE
The mounting plate assembly mounts to the carrier mounting angles in the front of the CBC and
the zee brackets on the sides of the CBC. The individual sections are secured to the carrier
mounting angles using carriage bolts, pan head screws, flat washers, lockwashers, and nuts
supplied with the mounting plate installation kit
Before installing the front and rear mounting plate sections, be sure that the supporting blocks are
located under the sidewalls of the CBC and are approximately 25 inches from the corners. This
will provide adequate room to install the front and rear sections.
1. Install the front mounting plate section (Figure 3, Item 2) to the CBC (Figure 3, Item 1), position the section
under the front carrier-mounting angle (Figure 3, Item 6) of the CBC so that the face of the mounting plate
section with the applied rubber strip faces DOWN and toward the vehicle bed.
2. Press the mounting plate (Figure 3, Item 2) up into position and align the holes (Figure 3, Item 8) on the
mounting plate with the holes (Figure 3, Item 9) on the carrier mounting angles (Figure 3, Item 6).
3. Have a second person hold the mounting plate section (Figure 3, Item 2) securely in position against the
carrier mounting angle.
4. Secure the mounting plate to the carrier mounting angle (Figure 3, Item 6) using four 5/16-18 UNC x 1 inch
long carriage bolts (Figure 3, Item 7), four lockwashers (Figure 3, Item 5), four flat washers (Figure 3, Item 4),
and four 5/16-UNC hex nuts (Figure 3, Item 3).
5. Secure the zee bracket on each side of the CBC to the front mounting plate using four 5/16-18 UNC x 1 inch
and four 5/16-UNC hex nuts (Figure 3, Item 3) .
6. Do not tighten securely at this time.
3
2
4
5
1
9
8
Figure 3. Installing the Front Mounting Plate Section.

END OF TASK
0020-6
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
INSTALLING THE REAR MOUNTING PLATE SECTION
NOTE
The threaded insert on the rear mounting plate will go against the CBC threshold.
1. Position the mounting plate (Figure 4, Item 18) under the threshold (Figure 4, Item 10) of the CBC so that the
face of the mounting plate section with the applied rubber strip faces DOWN and toward the vehicle bed. The
threshold is the area on either side of the personnel door opening.
2. Press the mounting plate (Figure 4, Item 18) up into position and align the holes on the mounting plate with
the holes in the threshold (Figure 4, Item 10).
3. Align the holes at the ends of the rear mounting plate with the holes on the side wall carrier mounting angle
sections nearest the corners of the CBC.
4. Have a second person hold the mounting plate section in position.
5. Install a total of four 5/16-18 UNC x 1 1/4 inch long carriage bolts (Figure 4, Item 12) up through the mounting
plate and the holes in the CBC threshold on either side of the personnel door opening.
6. Install one 5/16-inch flat washer (Figure 4, Item 13) over the end of the bolt and against the surface of the
threshold (Figure 4, Item 10) followed by a 5/16-inch lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 14) and 5/16-UNC hex nut
7. Install four 5/16-18 UNC x 1 inch long carriage bolts (Figure 4, Item 12) up through the ends of the rear
mounting plate (Figure 4, Item 18) and the holes in the CBC threshold along the sidewalls nearest the
corners.
8. Install four 5/16-inch flat washer (Figure 4, Item 13) over the end of the bolt and against the surface of the
threshold followed by four 5/16-inch lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 14) and four 5/16-UNC hex nut (Figure 4, Item
15) over each of the four 5/16-18 UNC x 1 inch long carriage bolts (Figure 4, Item 12).
9. Install three 5/16-18 UNC x 0.63 inch long pan head screws (Figure 4, Item 16) DOWN through the section of
the CBC threshold at the door opening and into threaded inserts (Figure 4, Item 11) mounted in the mounting
plate with a 5/16-inch lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 17) under each head.
END OF TASK
0020-7
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
INSTALLING THE ROAD SIDE MOUNTING PLATE SECTION
WARNING
NOTE
Before installing the road side and curb side mounting plate sections, be sure that the supporting
blocks are located under the front and rear of the CBC. Do not put the blocks under the
personnel door (lower) when placing the blocks under the front of the CBC. This will provide
adequate room to install the front and rear sections.
1. Before installing the side mounting plate sections (Figure 4, Items 19 and 9), to the CBC, position the sections
so that the face of the mounting plate section with the applied rubber strip faces down and is toward the
outside edge.
NOTE
The holes for the side mounting plate sections may be partially obscured by the rubber strip
installed earlier. To install the carriage bolt properly, move the rubber strip aside slightly to gain
access to the hole. Install the carriage bolt so that it seats properly against the mounting plate.
Make sure that the square portion under the head of the bolt fits into the square hole of the
mounting plate. Reposition the rubber strip over the head of the carriage bolt.
2. Install the road side mounting plate section (Figure 4, Item 19) in the same fashion as for the front (Figure 4,
Item 8) and rear section (Figure 4, Item 18) sections detailed above. Be sure to butt the ends (Figure 4, Item
20) of the side section with the additional sections of rubber strip against the end of the front section (Figure
4, Item 8) and rear section (Figure 4, Item 18).
3. Press the road side mounting plate section (Figure 4, Item 19) up into position and align the holes (Figure 4,
Item 6) on the mounting plate with the holes (Figure 4, Item 5) on the carrier mounting angles (Figure 4, Item
2).
4. Have a second person hold the road side mounting plate section (Figure 4, Item 19) in position.
5. Install a total of four 5/16-18 UNC x 1 inch long carriage bolts (Figure 4, Item 7) up through the mounting plate
(Figure 4, Item 19) and the CBC carrier mounting angle (Figure 4, Item 2).
carrier mounting angle (Figure 4, Item 2) followed by a 5/16-inch lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 3) and 5/16-UNC
hex nut (Figure 4, Item 1) for each of the remaining bolts.
END OF TASK
0020-8
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
INSTALLING THE CURB SIDE MOUNTING PLATE SECTION
1. Install the right side mounting plate section (Figure 4, Item 9) in the same fashion as for the left mounting
plate section (Figure 4, Item 19) detailed previously.
2. Press the right side mounting plate section (Figure 4, Item 9) up into position.
3. Align the holes (Figure 4, Item 9) on the mounting plate with the holes (Figure 4, Item 5) on the carrier
mounting angles (Figure 4, Item 2).
4. Have a second person hold the right side mounting plate section (Figure 4, Item 9) in position.
and the CBC carrier mounting angle (Figure 4, Item 2).
6. Install one 5/16-inch flat washer (Figure 4, Item 4) over the end of the bolt (Figure 4, Item 7) and against the
surface of the carrier-mounting angle (Figure 4, Item 2) followed by a 5/16-inch lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 3)
and 5/16-inch UNC hex nut (Figure 4, Item 1) for each of the remaining bolts.
7. Once all four sections of the mounting plate assembly have been installed, tighten all hardware securely.
END OF TASK
0020-9
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
Installing the Mounting Plate to the CBC - Continued.
1
2 1
3
3
4
4
20
5
7
19 7 6
8
18
15
14
16
13
17
12 11
10
Figure 4. Installing Rear, Road Side, and Curb Side Mounting Plate Sections.
END OF TASK
0020-10
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
INSTALLING TIE-DOWN POST ASSEMBLIES
NOTE
In order to mount the tie-down post assemblies to the mounting plate assembly, the supporting
blocks used to raise the CBC/mounting plate combination must be selected to raise the CBC at
least 8-1/2 inches in order to allow adequate clearance for the installation of the tie-down post
assemblies.
In order to ensure that the tie-down rings are free to be used, place them so that they are at a
more inboard position prior to mounting the CBC to the mounting bed.
1. Four tie-down post assemblies (Figure 5, Item 8) are installed at the four corners of the mounting plate
assembly (Figure 5, Item 4). These tie-down post assemblies will later be lowered into holes (Figure 5, Item
5) on the vehicle bed (Figure 5, Item 6) and help to secure the CBC and Mounting Plate combination to the
vehicle bed.
2. Install the rear tie-down post assemblies (Figure 5, Item 8).
3. Locate the tie-down post mounting holes (Figure 5, Item 11) located at the corners of the rear mounting plate
sections. Be sure to use the holes nearest the CBC when installing the rear tie-down post assemblies.
4. Position one tie-down post spacer plate (Figure 5, Item 7) under one corner of the mounting plate.
5. Align the mounting holes (Figure 5, Item 10) in the spacer plate with the rear mounting holes (Figure 5, Item
11) in the mounting plate.
6. Position one tie-down post assembly (Figure 5, Item 8) in position under and against the spacer plate (Figure
5, Item 7) positioned above.
7. Align all mounting holes.
8. Install two 5/16-inch (0.328 inch ID x 1.375 inch OD x 0.063 inch thick) flat washers (Figure 5, Item 3),
followed by 5/16-inch lockwasher (Figure 5, Item 2) and 5/16-inch UNC x 1 3/4 inch long hex head screw
(Figure 5, Item 1) down through the mounting plate (Figure 5, Item 4), spacer plate (Figure 5, Item 7), and into
the tie-down post assembly (Figure 5, Item 8).
9. Repeat for the second mounting hole.
10. Hand tighten the screws into the rivnuts (Figure 5, Item 9) installed in the tie-down post assembly (Figure 5,
Item 8).
11. Do not tighten the screws securely at this time. The screw installation holes are oversized slightly to allow the
tie-down posts to move slightly.
12. Install the other rear tie-down post assembly.
13. Install the two front tie-down post assemblies in the corners of the front mounting plate assembly in similar
fashion.
0020–11
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
Installing the Tie-down Post Assemblies - Continued.
11
6
4 5
10
9 7
Figure 5. Tie-Down Post Assembly Installation.

END OF TASK
0020–12
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
INITIAL INSTALLATION OF CLAMP PLATE CHANNEL
NOTE
Before the CBC and mounting plate combination are mounted on the vehicle bed, the clamp plate
channel must be installed. A clamp plate channel is installed on either side of the mounting plate
and helps to secure the CBC/mounting plate combination to the vehicle bed.
1. Install the initial portion of the clamp plate assembly by positioning one clamp plate assembly spacer plate
(Figure 6, Item 9) on the underside of the extension (Figure 6, Item 2) that extends from the side of the rear
mounting plate section (Figure 6, Item 1).
2. Position the spacer plate (Figure 6, Item 8) with the countersunk hole side facing down.
3. Align the holes in the spacer plate (Figure 6, Item 8) with the router holes in the mounting plate extension
(Figure 6, Item 2).
4. Position the clamp plate channel (Figure 6, Item 7) on the top surface of the mounting plate extension (Figure
6, Item 2).
5. Align the holes in the clamp plate channel (Figure 6, Item 7) with the holes in the mounting plate extension
(Figure 6, Item 2).
6. Hold the spacer plate (Figure 6, Item 8) and clamp plate channel (Figure 6, Item 7) in position on the
mounting plate extension (Figure 6, Item 2).
7. Install a 5/16-24 UNF x 1.28 inch long flat head screw (Figure 6, Item 9) up through the spacer plate (Figure
6, Item 8), mounting plate extension (Figure 6, Item 2), and exiting the top of the clamp plate channel (Figure
6, Item 7).
8. Secure the screw (Figure 6, Item 9) with one 5/16-inch flat washer (Figure 6, Item 6), and 5/16-inch UNF hex
locknut (Figure 6, Item 5).
9. Install the remaining flat head screw and associated hardware.
10. Install two 5/16-18 UNC carriage bolts (Figure 6, Item 10), flat washer (Figure 6, Item 3), and, nut (Figure 6,
Item 4) to the inside holes going through the mounting plate (Figure 6, Item 2).
11. Tighten all hardware securely.
12. Repeat for the opposite side of the CBC mounting plate.
4
2 3
5
1
7
10 8
9
Figure 6. Initial Installation of Clamp Plate Channel.

END OF TASK
0020–13
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
REMOVING THE PLUGS IN THE MTV BED
NOTE
In order to ensure that the side carrier tie-down rings are free for operation, place them so that
they are laying outboard on the vehicle bed.
Before the CBC and mounting plate combination can be lowered into the pockets located on the
vehicle bed, the protective plugs in the bed must be removed.
1. Remove the plugs (Figure 7, Item 3) in the vehicle bed (Figure 7, Item 1) by reaching under the bed.
2. Pull the retaining pin (Figure 7, Item 2) that secures the plug in place.
3. Push the plug (Figure 7, Item 3) down and through the vehicle bed pocket (Figure 7, Item 5).
4. Push the plugs in the remaining three holes through the vehicle bed (Figure 7, Item 1).
5. Ensure that all debris has been removed from the vehicle bed pocket (Figure 7, Item 5) prior to mounting the
CBC.
6. The plugs are attached to the vehicle bed with a wire rope tether (Figure 7, Item 4). The plugs will be secured
to the base of the tie-down post assembly in a later step.
4
3
Figure 7. MTV Bed Plug Removal.

END OF TASK
0020-14
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
LOWERING THE CBC ONTO THE VEHICLE BED
1. Once the mounting plate assembly (Figure 8, Item 3) has been completely installed on the bottom of the CBC
(Figure 8, Item 2), the CBC (Figure 8, Item 2) can be carefully lowered onto the vehicle bed (Figure 8, Item 5).
WARNING
lines are not used.
is not used.
NOTE
It is important to ensure that the CBC and mounting plate combination is level when lowered into
position on the vehicle bed or the Tie-down post assemblies may bind as they are lowered into
the vehicle bed pockets. Since the weight of the CBC is not distributed evenly, the CBC may tilt
toward the rear when lifted with the hoisting sling. To compensate for this condition and to ensure
that the CBC is level, additional weight such as two 50 pound sandbags or other weight should be
placed toward the front edge of the roof.
Guide ropes may be attached to the lift rings on the four corners of the CBC to help keep the
CBC straight and level when lowering the CBC on to the vehicle bed.
2. Secure the CBC (Figure 8, Item 2) and mounting plate combination to the vehicle bed of the MTV by lifting the
CBC (currently supported by blocks), using the hoisting sling (Figure 8, Item 1).
3. Slowly lower it into position on the vehicle bed (Figure 8, Item 5) of the MTV. Be sure that the CBC (Figure 8,
Item 2) is level as it is suspended in the air.
4. Align the four tie-down post assemblies (Figure 8, Item 4) into the four corresponding pockets (Figure 8, Item
6) in the vehicle bed (Figure 8, Item 5).
5. Once all four Tie-down posts (Figure 8, Item 4) are engaged in the pockets (Figure 8, Item 6) in the vehicle
bed (Figure 8, Item 5), lower the CBC (Figure 8, Item 2) all the way to the surface of the vehicle bed.
6. DO NOT SECURE THE TIE-DOWN POST ASSEMBLIES AT THIS TIME.
0020–15
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
Lowering the CBC Onto the Vehicle Bed - Continued.
SANDBAGS OR
OTHER WEIGHT MAY
BE USED ALONG THE
FRONT EDGE OF THE
CBC ROOF IN ORDER
TO LEVEL THE UNIT
1 DURING LIFTING AND
LOWERING.
Figure 8. Lowering the CBC onto the Vehicle Bed.

END OF TASK
0020-16
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
IDENTIFYING GAPS BETWEEN THE CBC AND THE VEHICLE BED
NOTE
Once the CBC is in its final mounting position on the vehicle bed, the rubber strip seal must be
the mounting plate (Figure 9, Item 1) and the vehicle bed (Figure 9, Item 2). These gaps are
typically caused by dents and other irregularities in the surface of the vehicle bed.
vehicle bed level.
2. Shine the light where the rubber strip and vehicle bed meet.
can be seen.
gap.
WARNING
lines are not used.
is not used.
NOTE
9. Lower the CBC back into position on the vehicle bed.
10. Inspect the quality of the seal using the method described above. If any gaps are still seen, mark the areas
0020-17
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
Identifying Gaps Between the CBC and the Vehicle Bed - Continued.
inch wide).
1
MAX GAP BETWEEN CBC
AND VEHICLE BED SHOULD
NOT EXCEED 1/8 INCH
Figure 9. Identifying Gaps Between the CBC and the Vehicle Bed.
END OF TASK
0020-18
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
APPLYING RTV SILICONE ADHESIVE
NOTE
RTV adhesive should be applied only if the CBC is to be immediately mounted to the vehicle bed.
The RTV adhesive has a working time of approximately 20 minutes and will start to cure after that
time. Installing the CBC on the vehicle after the RTV adhesive begins to cure may adversely
affect the RTV adhesive’s ability to properly bond with the vehicle bed.
1. Once all gaps have been identified and eliminated as described previously, a bead of RTV (silicone) RTV
adhesive must be applied where the rubber strip contacts the vehicle bed and around the threshold area.
WARNING
2. Apply the RTV adhesive by raising the CBC to a comfortable working height using the hoisting sling and
blocking.
3. Install the supplied cartridge of RTV adhesive into a standard caulking gun.
4. Trim the tip of the cartridge so that a bead approximately 3/16 to 1/4 inch in width can be applied.
5. Apply a continuous bead of RTV adhesive (Figure 10, Item 1) 3/16 to 1/4 inch in width on the surface of the
rubber strip (Figure 10, Item 2) along the outer edge.
6. Start at one point at the underside of the CBC.
7. Move around the entire perimeter of the CBC applying RTV adhesive to all rubber strip surfaces.
8. Once RTV adhesive has properly applied to all rubber strip surfaces, the CBC should be lowered into position
on the vehicle bed.
1 2
Figure 10. Applying RTV Silicone Adhesive.
0020-19
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
Applying RTV Silicone Adhesive - Continued.
9. Once the CBC has been lowered into position on the vehicle bed, RTV adhesive must be applied around the
threshold area (Figure 11, Item 1) at the rear of the CBC.
10. Apply RTV adhesive around the threshold area by starting at the left corner (Figure 11, Item 2) of the CBC
and inject RTV adhesive (Figure 11, Item 3) under the area where the threshold (Figure 11, Item 1) meets the
mounting plate (Figure 11, Item 4).
where it meets the mounting plate (Figure 11, Item 4).
13. Apply RTV adhesive around the hinge pivot pin area (Figure 11, Item 5).
14. Continue around the right corner (Figure 11, Item 6) of the CBC and inject RTV adhesive under the right side
of the threshold (Figure 11, Item 7) as was done with the left corner.
15. Apply RTV adhesive at joints between side mounting bracket, front and rear bracket.
16. Add a continuous bead of RTV adhesive around the entire base CBC and the vehicle bed. This will help
prevent leakage into the CBC.
3 4
5 1 6
Figure 11. RTV Adhesive Application after Lowering CBC into Place.
END OF TASK
0020-20
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
SECURING THE TIE-DOWN POST ASSEMBLIES
1. Secure the tie-down post assemblies by tightening the two bolts (Figure 12, Item 1) located at the top of each
Tie-down post assembly (Figure 12, Item 3).
2. Install one bottom plate (Figure 12, Item 4) to the bottom of a tie-down post assembly (Figure 12, Item 3) from
the underside of the vehicle bed (Figure 12, Item 9).
3. Place the vehicle bed plug (Figure 12, Item 5) over the bottom plate (Figure 12, Item 4).
4. Align the hole in the plug with the hole in the bottom plate (this is done simply to secure the plug).
5. Secure the plug (Figure 12, Item 5) and bottom plate (Figure 12, Item 4) to the base of the tie-down post
(Figure 12, Item 3) using one 3/8 inch flatwasher (Figure 12, Item 8),one 3/8 inch lockwasher (Figure 12, Item
7), and 3/8-16 UNC x 2 inch long bolt (Figure 12, Item 6).
6. Tighten securely.
7. Repeat for the remaining tie-down post assemblies.
8. Install the pin (Figure 12, Item 2) that previously secured the vehicle bed plugs into the side of the tie-down
post assemblies.
1
3
9
4
8
5
7
Figure 12. Securing the Tie-Down Post Assemblies.

END OF TASK
0020-21
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0020
FINAL INSTALLATION OF CLAMP PLATE ASSEMBLIES
NOTE
Clamp-plate assemblies (Figure 13, Item 5) are installed on either side of the mounting-plate
assembly (Figure 13, Item 2).
Work in conjunction with the tie-down post assemblies to secure the CBC/mounting plate
combination to the vehicle bed.
A hinge used to install the side wall of the vehicle may need to be removed in order to install the
clamp plate assembly.
1. Install two 1/2-13 UNC x 4.5 inch hex head bolts (Figure 13, Item 3) through the holes in the clamp plate
channel (Figure 13, Item 1).
NOTE
The rubber pad on the spacer block (Figure 13, Item 4) faces up when installing.
2. Install a spacer block (Figure 13, Item 4) and clamp plate assembly (Figure 13, Item 5) onto the bolts (Figure
13, Item 3) and secure with 1/2 inch flat washer (Figure 13, Item 6) and 1/2-13 UNC hex locknut (Figure 13,
Item 7).
3. Ensure that the side of the clamp plate assembly (Figure 13, Item 5) with the rubber pad (Figure 13, Item 8)
engages securely on the underside of the truck bed (Figure 13, Item 9).
4. Repeat for the second clamp plate assembly located on the opposite side of the CBC.
5. Tighten all clamp plate assembly hardware securely.
4
8
9 6
Figure 13. Final Installation of Clamp Plate Assembly.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0020-22
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
FIELD MAINTENANCE
MOUNTING KIT FOR M1095, 5 TON MTV TRAILER INSTALLATION
INITIAL SETUP:
Trailer bed clean and free of debris. Operator (1)
positioned on pallet near the trailer.
Mounting Kit unpacked and hardware organized
(WP 0018).
Side panels and tailgate removed (TM 9-2330-394-
13&P).
Item 21)
2)
0057, Table 1, Item 29)
Sandpaper (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 21)
References long, adhesive backed, color black, closed cell,
WP 0005 epdm sponge rubber strip. (WP 0057, Table 1, Item
20)
WP 0017
Masking Tape, Masking (1 inch wide) (WP 0057,
WP 0057
Item 26)
GENERAL
Before the CBC can be installed on the bed of the M1095, 5 Ton MTV Trailer, the bed surface should be cleaned
of any foreign matter or other debris that would interfere with the installation process. A mounting kit must be
installed to the trailer that will allow the CBC to be secured to the trailer. The lift rings should always be pointed to
the inside of trailer bed for operation when CBC is mounted.
SHIPPING PALLET” paragraph of WP 0018, it must be extended to its operational position as outlined in WP
0005 paragraph “EXTENDING THE CARGO BED COVER TO AN OPERATIONAL POSITION.”
0021-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
WARNING
lines are not used.
NOTE
NOTE
(Figure 1, Item 2).
the CBC.
0021-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
NOTE
(Figure 1, Item 1).
2
3/8 IN
1
4 5
6
3
END OF TASK
0021-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
INSTALLING RUBBER STRIP TO THE MOUNTING PLATE COMPONENTS
NOTE
When laying the side plates along the sides of the CBC, place the holes towards the middle of the
CBC.
1. There are four components to the mounting plate assembly, a front section (Figure 2, Item 1), rear section
(Figure 2, Item 2), left side (Figure 2, Item 3), and right side (Figure 2, Item 4). Lay the four mounting plate
pieces out on the bed of the trailer oriented as shown in Figure 3.
2. Slide plates to be placed so edge are flush and holes align with the front and rear plates.
3. Using one of the side plates as a straight edge, stand it on edge over the traced outline. If a space caused by
bed unevenness exceeds 3/4 inch, the trailer bed must be repaired before the CBC can be properly mounted
onto the trailer.
4. Any place where the unevenness is between 3/8 inch and 3/4 inch, a double layer of rubber stripping must be
applied in that area.
NOTE
Rubber stripping must go on the side of the mounting plate that has contact with the trailer.
5. Rubber strip must be installed on the side of each mounting plate component as shown in Figure 2. Rubber
strip is also applied on the ends of each side plate (Figure 2, Items 3 and 4) where the plates will eventually
butt against the front (Figure 2, Item 1) and rear sections (Figure 2, Item 2).
6. Install the rubber strip (Figure 2, Item 5) to the mounting plate components as shown in figure 2. Remember
that this will be the side of the mounting plate that will contact the tralier bed once it is installed on the CBC
and secured to the trailer.
7. Remove the protective backing (Figure 2, Item 6) from the rubber strip (Figure 2, Item 5).
8. Apply the adhesive side of the rubber strip on the mounting plate component as illustrated. An outline on the
mounting plate shows where the rubber strip is to be applied. Sections of rubber strip should be cut and
applied at a right angle whenever the rubber strip changes direction.
9. Continue applying the rubber strip (Figure 2, Item 5) until it has been applied to all mounting plate
components.
10. Press all rubber strips firmly in place.
11. Apply two sections of rubber stripping approximately four inches in length to cover extra holes (Figure 2,
Items 7 and 8). Ensure that the rubber strips are centered over the holes when applied.
0021-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
Installing Rubber Strip to the Mounting Plate Components - Continued.
FRONT OF
(CURB SIDE) TRAILER
6
MOUNTING KIT IS
VIEWED AS IF THE 2
CBC WAS SITTING ON 7
ITS ROOF
(ROAD SIDE)
7 3
5
REAR OF TRAILER
Figure 2. Rubber Strip Installation for Mounting Components.

END OF TASK
0021-5
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
MOUNT GUSSET PLATES TO FRONT MOUNTING PLATE
1. Once the rubber strip has been applied to the underside of all four mounting plates, flip all four plates over on
the work surface so that the rubber strip applied earlier now faces down on the work surface.
NOTE
Flat side of gusset plates face toward outside of trailer.
2. Align the spacer plate (Figure 3, Item 6) with the front mounting plate (Figure 3, Item 4).
3. Install three 1.03-inch countersink screws (Figure 3, Item 5).
4. Install the left gusset plate (Figure 3, Item 1) and attach it using 5/16-inch flat washers (Figure 3, Item 3) and
5/16-UNC locknut (Figure 3, Item 2).
5. Repeat this procedure for installing the curb side gusset plate.
2
1
3
5
6
Figure 3. Mounting Gusset Plates to Front Mounting Plate.

END OF TASK
0021-6
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
INSTALLING THE FRONT MOUNTING PLATE SECTION
NOTE
The mounting plate assembly mounts to the carrier mounting angles in the front of the CBC and
the zee brackets on the sides of the CBC. The individual sections are secured to the carrier
mounting angles using carriage bolts, pan head screws, flat washers, lockwashers, and nuts
supplied with the mounting plate installation kit
Before installing the front and rear mounting plate sections, be sure that the supporting blocks are
located under the sidewalls of the CBC and are approximately 25 inches from the corners. This
will provide adequate room to install the front and rear sections.
1. Install the front mounting plate section (Figure 4, Item 2) to the CBC (Figure 4, Item 1), position the section
under the front carrier-mounting angle (Figure 4, Item 6) of the CBC so that the face of the mounting plate
section with the applied rubber strip faces DOWN and toward the trailer bed.
2. Press the mounting plate (Figure 4, Item 2) up into position and align the holes (Figure 4, Item 8) on the
mounting plate with the holes (Figure 4, Item 9) on the carrier mounting angles (Figure 4, Item 6).
3. Have a second person hold the mounting plate section (Figure 4, Item 2) securely in position against the
carrier mounting angle.
4. Secure the mounting plate to the carrier mounting angle (Figure 4, Item 6) using four 5/16-18 UNC x 1 inch
and four 5/16- UNC hex nuts (Figure 4, Item 3).
5. Secure the zee bracket on each side of the CBC to the front mounting plate using four 5/16-18 UNC x 1 inch
and four 5/16- UNC hex nuts (Figure 4, Item 3) .
3
2
4
5
1
9
8
Figure 4. Installing the Front Mounting Plate Section.
END OF TASK
0021-7
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
INSTALLING THE REAR MOUNTING PLATE SECTION
NOTE
The threaded insert on the rear mounting plate will go against the CBC threshold.
1. Position the mounting plate (Figure 5, Item 18) under the threshold (Figure 5, Item 10) of the CBC so that the
face of the mounting plate section with the applied rubber strip faces DOWN and toward the trailer bed. The
threshold is the area on either side of the personnel door opening.
2. Press the mounting plate (Figure 5, Item 18) up into position and align the holes on the mounting plate with
the holes in the threshold (Figure 5, Item 10).
3. Align the holes at the ends of the rear mounting plate with the holes on the side wall carrier mounting angle
sections nearest the corners of the CBC.
4. Have a second person hold the mounting plate section in position.
5. Install a total of four 5/16-18 UNC x 1 1/4 inch long carriage bolts (Figure 5, Item 12) up through the mounting
plate and the holes in the CBC threshold on either side of the personnel door opening.
threshold (Figure 4, Item 10) followed by a 5/16- inch lockwasher (Figure 5, Item 14) and 5/16-UNC hex nut
7. Install four 5/16-18 UNC x 1 inch long carriage bolts (Figure 5, Item 12) up through the ends of the rear
mounting plate (Figure 5, Item 18) and the holes in the CBC threshold along the sidewalls nearest the
corners.
8. Install four 5/16-inch flat washer (Figure 5, Item 13) over the end of the bolt and against the surface of the
threshold followed by four 5/16-inch lockwasher (Figure 5, Item 14) and four 5/16-UNC hex nut (Figure 5, Item
15) over each of the four /16-18 UNC x 1 inch long carriage bolts (Figure 5, Item 12).
9. Install three, 5/16-18 UNC x 0.63 inch long pan head screws (Figure 5, Item 16) DOWN through the section of
the CBC threshold at the door opening and into threaded inserts (Figure 5, Item 11) mounted in the mounting
plate with a 5/16-inch lockwasher (Figure 5, Item 17) under each head.
END OF TASK
0021-8
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
INSTALLING THE ROAD SIDE MOUNTING PLATE SECTION
WARNING
NOTE
Before installing the road side and curb side mounting plate sections, be sure that the supporting
blocks are located under the front and rear of the CBC Do not put the blocks under the personnel
door (lower) when placing the blocks under the front of the CBC. This will provide adequate room
to install the front and rear sections.
1. Before installing the side mounting plate sections (Figure 5, Items 19 and 9) to the CBC, position the sections
so that the face of the mounting plate section with the applied rubber strip faces down and is toward the
outside edge.
NOTE
The holes for the side mounting plate sections may be partially obscured by the rubber strip
installed earlier. To install the carriage bolt properly, move the rubber strip aside slightly to gain
access to the hole. Install the carriage bolt so that it seats properly against the mounting plate.
Make sure that the square portion under the head of the bolt fits into the square hole of the
mounting plate. Reposition the rubber strip over the head of the carriage bolt.
2. Install the road side mounting plate section (Figure 5, Item 19) in the same fashion as for the front (Figure 5,
Item 8) and rear section (Figure 5, Item 18) sections detailed above. Be sure to butt the ends (Figure 5, Item
20) of the side section with the additional sections of rubber strip against the end of the front section (Figure
5, Item 8) and rear section (Figure 5, Item 18).
3. Press the road side mounting plate section (Figure 5, Item 19) up into position and align the holes (Figure 5,
Item 6) on the mounting plate with the holes (Figure 5, Item 5) on the carrier mounting angles (Figure 5, Item
2).
4. Have a second person hold the road side mounting plate section (Figure 5, Item 19) in position.
(Figure 5, Item 19) and the CBC carrier mounting angle (Figure 5, Item 2).
carrier mounting angle (Figure 5, Item 2) followed by a 5/16-inch lockwasher (Figure 5, Item 3) and 5/16-UNC
hex nut (Figure 5, Item 1) for each of the remaining bolts.
END OF TASK
0021-9
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
INSTALLING THE CURB SIDE MOUNTING PLATE SECTION
1. Install the right side mounting plate section (Figure 5, Item 9) in the same fashion as for the left mounting
plate section (Figure 5, Item 19) detailed previously.
2. Press the right side mounting plate section (Figure 5, Item 9) up into position.
3. Align the holes (Figure 5, Item 9) on the mounting plate with the holes (Figure 5, Item 5) on the carrier
mounting angles (Figure 5, Item 2).
4. Have a second person hold the right side mounting plate section (Figure 5, Item 9) in position.
and the CBC carrier mounting angle (Figure 5, Item 2).
6. Install one 5/16-inch flat washer (Figure 5, Item 4) over the end of the bolt (Figure 5, Item 7) and against the
surface of the carrier-mounting angle (Figure 5, Item 2) followed by a 5/16-inch lockwasher (Figure 5, Item 3)
and 5/16-inch UNC hex nut (Figure 5, Item 1) for each of the remaining bolts.
7. Once all four sections of the mounting plate assembly have been installed, tighten all hardware securely.
0021-10
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
Installing the Mounting Plates to the CBC - Continued.
2
1
1
3
4 3
7
20 4
19
5
7 6
18 9
16
15
14
17
13
12
11
10
Figure 5. Rear, Road Side, and Curb Side Mounting Plates.

END OF TASK
0021-11
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
INITIAL INSTALLATION OF CLAMP PLATE CHANNEL
NOTE
Before the CBC and mounting plate combination are mounted to the trailer bed, the clamp plate
channel must be installed to guide the CBC on to the trailer bed during installation.
1. Position the spacer plate (Figure 6, Item 10), with the countersunk hole side facing down underside, under the
mounting plate extension (Figure 6, Item 1) that extends from the side of the rear mounting plate section.
2. Align the holes in the spacer plate (Figure 6, Item 10) with the router holes away from the shelter in the
mounting plate extension (Figure 6, Item 1).
3. Position the clamp plate channel (Figure 6, Item 4) on the top surface of the mounting plate extension (Figure
6, Item 1).
4. Align the four holes in the clamp plate channel (Figure 6, Item 4) with the four holes in the mounting plate
extension (Figure 6, Item 1).
5. Install a 5/16-24 UNF x 1.28 inch long flat head screw (Figure 6, Item 9) up through the spacer plate (Figure
6, Item 10), mounting plate extension (Figure 6, Item 1), and exiting the top of the clamp plate channel (Figure
6, Item 4).
6. Secure the screw (Figure 6, Item 9) with one 5/16-inch flat washer (Figure 6, Item 3), and 5/16-inch UNF hex
locknut (Figure 6, Item 2).
7. Install the remaining three flat head screws (Figure 6, Item 9) and associated hardware.
8. Install two 1/2-13 UNC x 4.5 inch long carriage bolts (Figure 6, Item 5) through the top of the mounting plate
extension (Figure 6, Item 1) and clamp plate channel (Figure 6, Item 4).
9. Slide a spacer (Figure 6, Item 6) over the two 1/2-13 UNC x 4.5 inch long carriage bolts (Figure 6, Item 5).
10. Attach flat washers (Figure 6, Item 9) and two nuts (Figure 6, Item 9) to the two 1/2-13 UNC x 4.5 inch long
carriage bolts (Figure 6, Item 9). Do not tighten.
11. Repeat for the other clamp plate channel location.
2
3
1 4
10 5
7
9
8
Figure 6. Initial Installation of Clamp Plate Channel.

END OF TASK
0021-12
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
LOWERING THE CBC ONTO THE TRAILER BED
1. Once the mounting plate assembly has been completely installed on the bottom of the CBC (Figure 7, Item
10), the CBC (Figure 7, Item 10) can be carefully lowered onto the trailer bed (Figure 7, Item 2).
WARNING
Do not lift the CBC in its height-retracted (lowered) condition. The CBC must be in its height-
lines are not used.
2. Secure the CBC (Figure 7, Item 2) and mounting plate combination to the trailer bed (Figure 7, Item 3) of the
trailer by lifting the CBC (Figure 7, Item 2) (currently supported by blocks), using the hoisting sling (Figure 7,
Item 1).
3. Slowly lower it into position on the bed of the trailer (Figure 7, Item 3).
4. Lower the CBC (Figure 7, Item 2) and mounting plate combination until it is just above the surface of the
trailer bed (Figure 7, Item 3).
NOTE
The clamp plate assemblies will be on the mounting kit to allow the CBC (Figure 7, Item 2) to
align with the bed of the trailer (Figure 7, Item 3) when being lowered onto the bed of the trailer.
5. Lower the CBC (Figure 7, Item 10) until it completely rests on the trailer bed (Figure 7, Item 2).
6. Ensure there are no gaps between the gusset plate (Figure 7, Item 3) and the vertical trailer support (Figure
7, Item 6). DO NOT TIGHTEN THE HARDWARE SECURELY AT THIS TIME.
0021-13
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
Lowering the CBC onto the Trailer Bed - Continued.
Figure 7. Lowering the CBC onto the Trailer Bed.

END OF TASK
IDENTIFYING GAPS BETWEEN THE CBC AND THE TRAILER BED
NOTE
Once the CBC is in its final mounting position on the trailer bed, the rubber strip seal must be
the mounting plate (Figure 10, Item 1) and the trailer bed (Figure 10, Item 2). These gaps are
typically caused by dents and other irregularities in the surface of the trailer bed.
trailer bed level.
2. Shine the light where the rubber strip and trailer bed meet.
can be seen.
0021-14
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
Identifying Gaps Between The CBC and the Trailer Bed - Continued.
gap.
WARNING
lines are not used.
NOTE
9. Lower the CBC back into position on the trailer bed.
10. Inspect the quality of the seal using the method described above. If any gaps are still seen, mark the areas,
inch wide).
0021-15
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
Identifying Gaps Between the CBC and the Trailer Bed - Continued.
GAP BETWEEN CBC AND

TRAILERBED SHOULD NOT BE
GREATER THAN 1/8 INCH
Figure 8. Identifying Gaps Between the CBC and the Trailer Bed.
END OF TASK
0021-16
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
APPLYING RTV SILICONE ADHESIVE, FINAL ASSEMBLY OF GUSSET PLATES
WARNING
WARNING
lines are not used.
NOTE
RTV adhesive should be applied only if the CBC is to be immediately mounted to the trailer bed.
The RTV adhesive has a working time of approximately 20 minutes and will start to cure after that
time. Installing the CBC on the trailer after the RTV adhesive begins to cure may adversely affect
the RTV adhesive’s ability to properly bond with the trailer bed.
Once all gaps have been identified and eliminated as described above, a bead of RTV (silicone)
RTV adhesive must be applied where the rubber strip contacts the trailer bed and around the
threshold area.
1. Install the supplied cartridge of RTV adhesive into a standard caulking gun.
2. Trim the tip of the cartridge so that a bead approximately 3/16 to 1/4 inch in width can be applied.
3. Apply a generous amount of RTV adhesive, (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 1) to underside of the forward wall of the
CBC.
4. Raise the CBC in position over the trailer bed.
0021-17
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
Applying RTV Silicone Adhesive, Final Assembly of Gusset Plates - Continued.
NOTE
Take care to return the CBC to the same position so that the holes in the gusset plates align with
the slotted hole in the vertical trailer support and that the flat portion of the gusset plate contacts
the vertical trailer support.
5. Lower the CBC to approximately six inches over the trailer bed. Place support blocks under the side walls of
the CBC.
6. Lower the CBC onto the support blocks.
7. Apply a continuous bead of RTV adhesive, (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 1) (Figure 9, Item 1) 3/16 to 1/4 inch in
width on the surface of the rubber strip (Figure 9, Item 2) along the outer edge. Start at one point at the
underside of the CBC. Move around the entire perimeter of the CBC applying RTV adhesive to all rubber strip
surfaces.
8. Raise CBC and remove the support blocks.
9. Apply a continuous bead of RTV adhesive, (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 1) to sections where the support blocks
were positioned.
NOTE
Take care to return the CBC in the same position so that the holes in the gusset plates align with
the slotted hole in the vertical trailer support and that the flat portion of the gusset plate contacts
the vertical trailer support.
10. Once RTV adhesive has been properly applied to all rubber strip surfaces, the CBC should be lowered into
position on the trailer bed.
11. Install one 7-inch bolt (Figure 9, Item 3) and flat washer (Figure 9, Item 8) through both slotted holes (Figure
9, Item 6) in the vertical trailer support (Figure 9, Item 7).
12. Install a flat washer (Figure 9, Item 8) and locknut (Figure 9, Item 9) on the end of the 7-inch bolt (Figure 9,
Item 3).
13. Tighten the hardware on each gusset plate securely.
7
8 9
6 6
8
4
1
5
Figure 9. RTV Adhesive Application for the CBC Gusset Plates.
0021-18
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
NOTE
RTV adhesive must now be applied around the threshold area (Figure 10, Item 1) at the rear of
the CBC.
14. Apply RTV adhesive around the threshold area, start at the left corner (Figure 10, Item 2) of the CBC and
inject RTV adhesive (Figure 10, Item 3) under the area where the threshold (Figure 10, Item 1) meets the
mounting plate (Figure 10, Item 4).
where it meets the mounting plate (Figure 10, Item 4). Be sure to apply RTV adhesive around the hinge pivot
pin area (Figure 10, Item 7).
17. Continue around the right corner (Figure 10, Item 6) of the CBC.
18. Inject RTV adhesive under the right side of the threshold (Figure 10, Item 5) as was done with the left corner.
19. Apply RTV adhesive to four mounting plate joints.
20. Add a continuous bead of RTV around the entire base CBC and the trailer bed. This will help prevent leakage
into the CBC.
0021-19
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
4
3
2
7
Figure 10. RTV Adhesive Application for the CBC Threshold Area.
END OF TASK
0021-20
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0021
FINAL INSTALLATION OF CLAMP PLATE ASSEMBLY
NOTE
Two clamp plate assemblies (Figure 11, Item 7) (one on each side) are installed at the corners of
the rear mounting plate assembly (Figure 11, Item 6) and are used to secure the CBC (Figure 11,
Item 1) to the trailer bed (Figure 11, Item 8).
The spacer on the mounting kit will already be in place to align the CBC on to the bed of the
trailer during installation.
1. Remove two 1/2 inch flat washer (Figure 11, Item 5) and 1/2-13 UNC locknut (Figure 11, Item 4) from the
bottom of the spacer (Figure 11, Item 2).
2. Make sure that the rubber pad on the bottom plate (Figure 11, Item 3) faces up and engages securely on the
underside of the trailer bed (Figure 11, Item 8).
3. Secure the assembly with 1/2 inch flat washer (Figure 11, Item 5) and 1/2-13 UNC locknut (Figure 11, Item 4).
4. Tighten the clamp plate assembly (Figure 11, Item 7) hardware securely.
5. Repeat the above procedure for the clamp plate assembly located on the rear road side of the CBC.
3
6 5
4
8
7
Figure 11. Final Installation of Clamp Plate Assembly.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0021-21/22 blank
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0022
FIELD MAINTENANCE
MOUNTING KIT FOR M923 5 TON CARGO TRUCK LADDER INSTALLATION
INITIAL SETUP:
Tailgate lowered; locked in a horizontal position. Light-Wheel Vehicle Mechanic (91B) (1)
Vehicle chocked.
Vehicle on level ground.
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 21) WP 0038
Riveter, Blind, Hand (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 16)
Drill Set, Twist (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 5)
Drill (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 3)
M923 5 TON CARGO TRUCK TAILGATE LADDER IN STOWED AND DEPLOYED POSITIONS
NOTE
The roadside of a vehicle is on a person’s left when they are standing behind the rear of the
vehicle and facing it.
This installation only applies to the M923 5 Ton Cargo Truck. It is not required with the M1083 5
Ton MTV or M1095 5 Ton MTV Trailer.
Before the CBC can be used, a ladder must be installed on the tailgate of the M923, 5 Ton Cargo Truck. The
ladder is stowed on the inside, left-hand surface of the tailgate (while standing and facing the rear of the vehicle).
In order to install the ladder (Figure 1, Item 3), a set of stowage brackets (Figure 1, Item 1) must be installed on
the road side, inside surface of the tailgate (Figure 1, Item 5). Two strap assemblies (Figure 1, Item 4) are also
installed on the inside surface of the tailgate (Figure 1, Item 5). The combination of stowage brackets (Figure 1,
Item 1) and strap assemblies (Figure 1, Item 4) secure the ladder in its stowed position.
A set of deployment brackets (Figure 1, Item 2) is installed toward the rear, right-hand edge of the tailgate (Figure
1, Item 5). These deployment brackets (Figure 1, Item 2) are used to support the ladder (Figure 1, Item 3) in its
deployed condition.
The installation process for the stowage brackets (Figure 1, Item 1), deployment brackets (Figure 1, Item 2), and
strap assemblies (Figure 1, Item 4) involve measuring and locating a series of holes on the tailgate, drilling out
these holes, installing threaded inserts, and mounting the various brackets and straps.
0022-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0022
M923, 5 Ton Cargo Truck Tailgate Ladder in Stowed and Deployed Positions - Continued.
2
1 4
TAILGATE LADDER IN
5 3
STOWED POSITION
LADDER IN DEPLOYED
POSITION
Figure 1. M923 Tailgate Ladder in Stowed and Deployed Positions.

LADDER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Install the ladder hardware for the 5 Ton Cargo Truck by lowering the tailgate and locking it into a horizontal
position. This creates a convenient and stable work surface for the installation process.
END OF TASK
Ladder Installation Kit Contents
Table 1 lists the parts contained within the ladder installation kit. Verify that all parts are present and in the proper
quantity. Arrange the parts on a convenient work surface near the tailgate of the vehicle.
Table 1. Parts Listing Entry Ladder Kit for M923.
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE QTY
1 ASME 18.2.1 SCREW, HEX HD (1/4-20 X .75 LG) ................................... 10

2 MS35338-139 WASHER, LOCK (1/4) .......................................................... 8
3 17-1-0315-3 BRACKET, ANGLE ............................................................... 1
4 17-1-0315-5 BRACKET, ANGLE ............................................................... 1
5 S25B140 NUT, PLAIN, BLIND RIVET (1/4-20) ................................... 10
6 17-1-0315-4 BRACKET, ANGLE ............................................................... 1
7 17-1-0323-1 LADDER, VEHICLE .............................................................. 1
8 AN970-4 WASHER, FLAT (1/4) ........................................................... 4
0022-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0022
Ladder Installation Kit Contents - Continued.
Table 1. Parts Listing Entry Ladder Kit for M923 - Continued.
ITEM PART DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE QTY

NO. NUMBER
9 17-1-3618-1 STRAP, HANDLE .................................................................................................... 2
10 17-1-0315-2 BRACKET, ANGLE .................................................................................................. 1
11 C-845-2528L RIVETER, BLIND, HAND (1/4-20) ........................................................................... 1
12 2521A622 HAND TAP (1/4-20) ................................................................................................. 1
13 2932A28 DRILL BIT (LET Q) .................................................................................................. 1
14 3374A25 9/32 TRANSFER PUNCH ........................................................................................ 1
NOTE
Items listed in Table 1 and Figure 2 are included in the ladder installation kit and are required for
installation.
2 3
10
5
5
8
4
7
1 5
11
14
12
6
13
1
2
Figure 2. Entry Ladder Kit for M923.
0022-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0022
LADDER INSTALLATION - Continued.
Tailgate Position References
Throughout the procedures that follow, references will be made to the four edges of the tailgate. All positions are
given from the perspective of a soldier standing and facing the rear of the vehicle with the tailgate down. The left,
right, front, and rear edge of the tailgate are shown in the accompanying diagram (Figure 3).
HINGED EDGE
LEFT
RIGHT
EDGE
EDGE
FRONT EDGE
Figure 3. Tailgate Position References.
Mounting Ladder Stowage Brackets
1. Install the ladder stowage brackets required to stow the ladder by using a tape measure, and make a
mark 14 inches in from the left edge (Figure 4) of the tailgate at its front edge (Figure 3).
Figure 4. Mounting Ladder Stowage Brackets 1.
0022-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0022
LADDER INSTALLATION
Mounting the Ladder Stowage Brackets - Continued.
2. At the 14-inch mark, draw a 2-inch vertical line from the front edge (Figure 5) of the tailgate toward
the rear edge (Figure 3) of the tailgate.
3. Measure 1-1/2 inches from the front edge (Figure 3) of the tailgate along the 2-inch vertical line and
make a mark (Figure 6).

4. Make a second mark approximately 3 inches to the right of the 1-1/2-inch mark and draw a line
connecting the two marks with a straight edge (Figure 7).
INTERSECTION
0022-5
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0022
LADDER INSTALLATION
5. Place the first bracket in position at the intersection point located 14 inches in from the left edge
(Figure 3) and 1-1/2 inches from the front edge (Figure 3) of the tailgate (Figure 8). Be sure to select
the larger “stowage” bracket as these brackets are different from the smaller “deployment” brackets.
Position the bracket so that the mounting holes face the rear edge of the tailgate. Ensure that the
opening on the bracket faces the left edge of the tailgate. Mark the position of the two holes in the
first bracket.

6. Use a 9/32-inch transfer punch to mark the center of the two mounting holes (Figure 9).
WARNING
Safety goggles or face shield must be worn to protect eyes from flying metal chips.
7. Use a Letter “Q” size drill bit to drill out the two marked holes. Drill only through the inside surface of
the tailgate (Figure 10). Do not drill completely through the opposite side of the tailgate. Remove any
burrs.
0022-6
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0022
LADDER INSTALLATION
8. Install a 1/4-20 blind rivet nut in each of the two mounting holes using a blind rivet nut installation tool
included with the mounting kit. Complete instructions for blind rivet nut installation can be found in
WP 0038.
9. Once all blind rivet nuts have been installed, mount the bracket to the tailgate using 1/4-20 x 0.75
inch long hex head screws and 1/4 inch lockwashers (Figure 11). Tighten all hardware securely.

10. With the tailgate in a horizontal position, attach the ladder to the installed first bracket (Figure 12).
INSTALLED
FIRST LADDER
BRACKET
11. Use the ladder as a “template” to attach the second uninstalled bracket to the opposite side of the
ladder (i.e., opposite the installed bracket). Position the second uninstalled bracket so that the
mounting holes face the first bracket and toward the front edge of the tailgate (Figure 13). Ensure
that the opening on the bracket faces the left edge of the tailgate. Mark the position of the two holes
in the second uninstalled bracket. Remove the ladder from the tailgate.
UNINSTALLED SECOND BRACKET
INSTALLED FIRST BRACKET

12. Repeat prior Steps 6 through 9 to complete installation of the second bracket.
END OF TASK
0022-7
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0022
Mounting Strap Assemblies for Ladder Stowage
1. Install the two strap assemblies used to stow the ladder by using a tape measure and make a mark
48-1/4 inches from the left edge (Figure 3) of the tailgate at its front edge (Figure 14).
48 1/4 in
Figure 14. Mounting Strap Assemblies for Ladder Stowage 1.

2. Make a second mark 48-1/4 inches from the left edge (Figure 3), but approximately 15 inches back
from the front edge (Figure 15).
15 in
48 1/4 in
3. Draw a line connecting the two marks with a straight edge (Figure 16).
0022-8
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0022
Mounting Strap Assemblies for Ladder Stowage - Continued.
4. Measure 3 inches from the front edge (Figure 3) of the tailgate. Mark this point on the drawn line
(Figure 17).

5. Measure 14 1/2 inches from the front edge (Figure 3) of the tailgate and mark a second point on the
drawn line (Figure 18). These marked intersecting points define the attaching points of the two strap
assemblies.

6. Mark the center of each hole with the included transfer punch (Figure 19).
0022-9
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0022
Mounting Strap Assemblies for Ladder Stowage - Continued.
WARNING
7. Use a Letter “Q” size drill bit to drill out the two marked holes (Figure 20). Remove any burrs.
8. Install a 1/4-20 blind rivet nut in each mounting hole using the blind rivet nut installation tool included
in the mounting kit. Install the blind rivet nut IAW instructions for blind rivet nut installation as detailed
in WP 0038.
9. Once both blind rivet nuts have been installed, align the mating attachment holes and mount the two
strap assemblies so that their buckles face away from the left edge (Figure 3) of the tailgate. Secure
the strap assemblies to the tailgate using a 1/4-20 x 0.75 inch long hex head screws and two large (1-
1/8 in OD)1/4 inch flat washers. One flat washer should be on each side of the strap assembly, one
under the screw head and a second between the strap and the tailgate (Figure 21). Tighten all
hardware securely.

END OF TASK
0022-10
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0022
Mounting Ladder Deployment Brackets
1. Install the brackets required to deploy the ladder on the tailgate by using a tape measure and make a
mark 14-inches (Figure 22) from the front edge (Figure 3) and along the right edge (Figure 3) of the
tailgate.
Figure 22. Mounting Ladder Deployment Brackets 1.
2. At the 14 inch mark (Figure 23), draw a 3 inch horizontal line with a straight edge from the right edge
(Figure 3) of the tailgate extending toward the left edge (Figure 3) of the tailgate.

3. Measure 1 inch in from the right edge of the tailgate. Mark this point on the drawn 3 inch line. Note
that this point marks the outer corner of the first mounting bracket (Figure 24).
0022-11
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0022
Mounting Ladder Deployment Brackets - Continued.
4. Place the first bracket in position so that its outer edge lies on the line 1 inch in from the right edge
(Figure 3) of the tailgate. Be sure to use the smaller “deployment” bracket. The hooks on the bracket
should face the hinge on the tailgate. Orient the mounting holes on the first bracket to face outward
and toward the right edge (Figure 3) of the tailgate. Mark the position of the two holes in the first
bracket (Figure 25).

5. Use the 9/32 inch transfer punch included with the mounting kit to mark the center of the two
mounting holes (Figure 26). Be sure to get as close to the center as possible.
WARNING
6. Use a Letter “Q” size drill bit to drill out the two marked holes (Figure 27). Remove any burrs.
0022-12
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0022
7. Install a 1/4-20 blind rivet nut in each of the two mounting holes with a using a blind rivet nut
installation tool. Install the blind rivet nut IAW the instructions for blind rivet nut installation found in
WP 0038.
8. Once all blind rivet nuts have been installed, mount the bracket with the hooks facing the rear edge of
the tailgate using a 1/4-20 x 0.75 inch long hex head screw and 1/4-inch lockwasher (Figure 28).
Tighten all hardware securely.
9. With the tailgate in a down position, attach the ladder to the installed first bracket (Figure 29).
INSTALLED
FIRST
BRACKET
0022-13
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0022
10. Use the ladder as a “template” to attach the second uninstalled bracket to the opposite side of the
ladder (i.e., opposite the installed bracket). Position the second uninstalled bracket so that the
mounting holes face away from the first bracket and toward the left edge of the tailgate. Mark the
position of the two holes in the second bracket (Figure 30). Remove the ladder from the tailgate.
UNINSTALLED
SECOND
BRACKET

11. Repeat prior Steps 5 through 8 to complete installation of the second bracket.
END OF TASK
Deploying the Ladder
1. Lower the hinged tailgate (Figure 31, Item 4) into an approximate vertical position.
WARNING
Ensure the ladder is secure before stepping on it. Failure to do so could cause the ladder to fall
and injure personnel stepping on it.
Ensure the vehicle is on level ground and the wheels are chocked before deploying the ladder.
Failure to do so could cause the ladder to disengage and cause injury to personnel using it.
2. The ladder (Figure 31, Item 1) mounts to the deployment brackets (Figure 31, Items 2 and 3) by engaging the
hooks (Figure 31, Item 5) in the end of the ladder over the hooked portion of the deployment brackets (Figure
31, Items 2 and 3).
3. The grips (Figure 31, Item 6) at the bottom of the ladder (Figure 31, Item 1) are then allowed to rest on the
ground.
0022-14
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0022
Deploying the Ladder - Continued.
2
3
Figure 31. Ladder Deployment.

END OF TASK
Stowing the Ladder
1. Stow the ladder (Figure 32, Item 6) by lifting and removing it from the deployment brackets (Figure 32, Items
1 and 2).
2. Place the hooks (Figure 32, Item 7) at the end of the ladder over the stowage brackets (Figure 32, Items 4
and 5).
3. Secure with strap assemblies (Figure 32, Item 3).
4. Close the tailgate (Figure 32, Item 8).
0022-15
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0022
Stowing the Ladder - Continued.
2 3
4
6
5
Figure 32. Ladder Stowage.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0022-16
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0023
FIELD MAINTENANCE
HANDLE, BAIL
REPLACE
INITIAL SETUP:
CBC clean, dry, and free of debris. Light-Wheel Vehicle Mechanic (91B) (1)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0055 Table 2, Solvent, Methylethylketone (MEK) (WP 0057, Table
Item 21) 1, Item 24)
Gloves (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 12) Sealant, Type II MIL-S-8802 (WP 0057, Table1, Item
22)
REPLACE
WARNING
Methylethylketone (MEK) ASTM D-740 is flammable and toxic and shall be used only in a well-
ventilated area, away from all sparks or open flame. Gloves and safety goggles should be worn
during use.
materials.
Personnel need to maintain three points of contact when climbing onto and moving around on top
of the CBC. Failure to follow this warning can lead to serious injury or death to personnel.
1. Remove any excess sealant around the four hex head screws (Figure 1, Item 1) and bail handle (Figure 1,
Item 4) on the CBC using MEK.
2. Remove four screws (Figure 1, Item 1), four lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 2), and four flat washers (Figure 1,
Item 3) that secure the bail handle (Figure 1, Item 4) to the roof of the CBC. Discard the lockwashers.
NOTE
There is no hardware installed in the center hole (Figure 1, Item 5) of the bail handle (Figure 1,
Item 4).
3. Remove the defective bail handle (Figure 1, Item 4) from the roof of the CBC.
0023-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0023
REPLACE - Continued.
WARNING

4. Apply Sealant, Type II MIL-S-8802 under the new bail handle (Figure 1, Item 4) to prevent leaking into the
CBC.
5. Install a new bail handle (Figure 1, Item 4) with the center hole (Figure 1, Item 5) facing towards the front of
the CBC.
6. Install four screws (Figure 1, Item 1), four lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 2), and four flat washers (Figure 1, Item
3) to secure the new bail handle (Figure 1, Item 4) to the roof of the CBC.
1
2
Figure 1. Bail Handle Fitting.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0023-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0024
FIELD MAINTENANCE
ASSEMBLY, LIFT RING
REPLACE
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 21) Solvent, Methylethylketone (MEK) (WP
0057, Table 1, Item 24)
Sealant, Type II MIL-S-8802 (WP 0057,
Table 1, Item 22)
REPLACE
WARNING
Methylethylketone (MEK) ASTM D-740 is flammable and toxic and shall be used only in a well-
ventilated area away, from all sparks or open flame. Gloves and safety goggles should be worn
during use.
materials.
1. Remove any excess sealant around the 10 hex head screws (Figure 1, Item 1) securing the lift ring
assembly (Figure 1, Item 5) to the CBC (Figure 1, Item 6) using MEK.
2. Remove 10 hex head bolts (Figure 1, Item 1), 10 lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 2), and 10 flat washers
(Figure 1, Item 3) securing the lift ring assembly (Figure 1, Item 5 ) to the CBC (Figure 1, Item 6). Discard
the old lockwashers.
3. Remove the lift ring assembly (Figure 1, Item 5) from the CBC (Figure 1, Item 6).
WARNING
4. Apply Sealant, Type II MIL-S-8802 under the new lift ring assembly (Figure 1, Item 5) to prevent leaking
into the CBC.
0024-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0024
5. Place lift ring assembly (Figure 1, Item 5) in position on the CBC (Figure 1, Item 6) and align the holes
(Figure 1, Item 4) of the lift ring assembly to the holes in the CBC (Figure 1, Item 6).
6. Install 10 flat washers (Figure 1, Item 3), 10 lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 2), and 10 hex head bolts (Figure
1, Item 1) in the corresponding mounting hole positions.
7. Tighten hex head bolts (Figure 1, Item 1).
Figure 1. Lift Ring Assembly Fitting.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0024-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0025
FIELD MAINTENANCE
PAD, FILTER, AIR COOLER
REPLACE
INITIAL SETUP:
CBC can be fully extended or retracted. Light-Wheel Vehicle Mechanic (91B) (1)
Materials/Parts
Detergent, Mild (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 11)
Rags, Wiping (WP 0057, Table 1, Item19)
REPLACE
1. Remove the air cooler filter pad (Figure 1, Item 1) by reaching up under the ventilator port opening (Figure 1,
Item 2).
2. Grasp the air filter material with both hands.
3. Pull the air cooler filter pad (Figure 1, Item 1) straight down while moving from left to right.
4. Pull until the air cooler filter pad (Figure 1, Item 1) has been completely removed from the ventilator port
(Figure 1, Item 2).
5. Install air cooler filter pad (Figure 1, Item 1) by feeding one end of the filter up under the ventilator port (Figure
1, Item 2).
6. Push upwards.
NOTE
Be sure that the filter remains straight and does not fold while being pushed into position.
7. Continue to push the air cooler filter pad up into the ventilator port until the entire air filter is securely in place.
0025-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0025
Figure 1. Air Cooler Filter Pad Replacement.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0025-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0026
FIELD MAINTENANCE
STEP, FOLDING, UPPER AND MIDDLE
REPLACE
INITIAL SETUP:

CBC clean, dry and free of debris. Light-Wheel Vehicle Mechanic (91B) (1)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0055, Table 2, WP 0028
Item 21)
REPLACE
NOTE
If replacing the lower roof folding step, refer to WP 0028 for maintenance instructions.
1. Place the roof access folding step (Figure 1, Item 1) in the down position. This will allow access to the upper
hex head bolt.
2. Remove the two hex head bolts (Figure 1, Item 3) and two lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 4) from the roof
access folding step (Figure 1, Item 1) being replaced. Discard the old lockwashers.
3. Remove the roof access folding step (Figure 1, Item 1).
4. Place the roof access folding step (Figure 1, Item 1) into position on the sidewall of the CBC.
5. Align the holes (Figure 1, Item 2) of the roof access folding step (Figure 1, Item 1) with the holes on the
sidewall of the CBC.
6. Secure the roof access folding step (Figure 1, Item 1) to the CBC using two hex head bolts (Figure 1, Item 3)
and two lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 4). The two hex head bolts (Figure 1, Item 3) will thread into threaded
inserts permanently installed in the sidewall of the CBC.
7. Tighten the two hex head bolts (Figure 1, Item 3) securely.
0026-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0026
Figure 1. Folding Step Replacement.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0026-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0027
FIELD MAINTENANCE
LIFT/LOCKING ASSEMBLY
REPLACE
INITIAL SETUP:
CBC fully-extended and locked position (WP 0005). Light-Wheel Vehicle Mechanic (91B) (1)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0055, Table 2, Threadlocker (WP 0057, Item 27)
Item 21)
REPLACE
NOTE
The lift/locking assembly (Figure 1, Item 1) should be in the down position to remove.
1. Remove the cotter pin (Figure1, Item 9) that secures the handle (Figure 1, Item 7).
2. Swing the handle (Figure 1, Item 7) down so that it is approximately perpendicular to the main tube of the
3. Place the cotter pin (Figure1, Item 9), removed in step one, back on the lift/locking assembly (Figure 1, Item
1).
4. Move the handle (Figure 1, Item 7) slightly up and down as needed to disengage the base plate (Figure 1,
Item 8) with protruding pins from the slots formed by the interlock extrusion.
5. Remove the shoulder screw (Figure 1, Item 6), 0.032 inch thick x 0.562 inch O.D. flat washer (Figure 1, Item
5) and 0.065-inch thick x 0.734 inch O.D. flat washer (Figure 1, Item 4) that secures the lift/locking assembly
(Figure 1, Item 1) to the roof (Figure 1, Item 2) of the CBC. Retain hardware for installation.
6. Remove the entire lift/locking assembly (Figure 1, Item 1).
7. Align the hole (Figure 1, Item 3) on the top of the lift/locking assembly (Figure 1, Item 1) with the threaded
insert (Figure 1, Item 2) in the CBC ceiling.
8. Add thread locker to the shoulder screw (Figure 1, Item 6) and install the shoulder screw (Figure 1, Item 6),
0.032-inch thick x 0.562 inch O.D. flat washer (Figure 1, Item 5) and 0.065-inch thick x 0.734 inch O.D. flat
washer (Figure 1, Item 4) to secure the lift/locking assembly (Figure 1, Item 1).
9. Tighten the shoulder screw (Figure 1, Item 6) securely.
10. Place the lift/locking assembly (Figure 1, Item 1) back into operating position. Refer to WP 0005
“POSITIONING THE LIFT/LOCKING ASSEMBLIES.”
0027-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0027
2
1
9 7
Figure 1. Lift/Locking Assembly Replacement.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0027-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0028
FIELD MAINTENANCE
STEP, FOLDING, LOWER
REPLACE
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0055, Table 2,
Item 21)
Materials/Parts
Sealant, Type II MIL-S-8802 (WP 0057, Table1, Item
22)
REPLACE
1. Place the lower folding step (Figure 1, Item 1) in the down position. This will allow access to the upper hex
bolt.
2. Remove the sealant around the two hex bolts (Figure 1, Item 4) on the lower folding step (Figure 1, Item 1)
3. Kneel in the opening of the personnel door.
4. Place a wrench on the hex locknut (Figure 1, Item 2) on the inside of the CBC.
5. Place a second wrench on the head of the hex head bolt (Figure 1, Item 4) located on the outside of the CBC.
6. Remove the hex head bolt (Figure 1, Item 4), flat washer (Figure 1, Item 3), and locknut (Figure 1, Item 2).
Discard the locknut.
NOTE
It may be necessary to use force to remove step. Tap the folding step horizontally with a hammer
if force is needed.
7. Remove the lower folding step (Figure 1, Item 1).
8. Apply Sealant, Type II MIL-S-8802 under the new lower folding step (Figure 1, Item 1) to prevent leaking into
the CBC
9. Install lower folding step (Figure 1, Item 1) into position in the recessed mounting plate (Figure 1, Item 5) in
the sidewall of the CBC.
10. Align the holes on the lower folding step (Figure 1, Item 1) with the holes on the sidewall recessed mounting
plate (Figure 1, Item 5) of the CBC.
11. Install the two hex bolts (Figure 1, Item 4) through the step and sidewall from the outside of the CBC.
12. Install two flat washers (Figure 1, Item 3) and two hex locknuts (Figure 1, Item 2) on the opposite end of the
two hex head bolts (Figure 1, Item 4) located inside the CBC. Do not tighten.
13. Kneel in the personnel door opening.
14. Place a wrench on the head of the hex bolt (Figure 1, Item 4).
15. Hold the hex bolt (Figure 1, Item 4) in position.
16. Tighten the hex locknut (Figure 1, Item 2) securely.
0028-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0028
17. Perform steps 14 thru 16 to both hex bolts and locknuts.
2
5
Figure 1. Folding Step (Lower Roof Access) Replacement.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0028-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
FIELD MAINTENANCE
ROPE ASSEMBLY, WIRE
REPLACE
INITIAL SETUP:
CBC in the retracted position. Light-Wheel Vehicle Mechanic (91B) (2)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit Adhesive, RTV-732 (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 1)
(WP 0055, Table 2, Item 21)
Wood, Sections 2x4, 35 inches in length (WP 0057,
Gloves (WP 0057, Table 2, Item 11) Table 1, Item 28)
Lifting Device Masking Tape (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 26)
References
WP 0005
REPLACE
Preparing the CBC for Wire Rope Assemblies Replacement
WARNING
raised) position prior to using the lift rings for lifting the CBC for moving it off its mounting surface.
Do not use the lift rings to lift a CBC with more than an additional payload of 100 pounds
(equivalent weight of two 50-pound sand bags). Lift rings should only be used to lift an empty
CBC that is not mounted to a vehicle.
A CBC that has been installed on a vehicle may only be hoisted using the lifting points on the
vehicle.
equipment.
0029-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
WARNING
Do not stand higher than the top of the lower section inside the CBC if one or more cables have
failed until the upper section is properly blocked up as described below, injury or death may result
if you do.
If one or more wire rope assemblies are broken, use the lifting system to position the CBC upper
section to a uniform height of 35 inches as measured from the ceiling to the top edge of the lower
section.
CAUTION
Do not attach a hoisting sling to the lift rings in such a way as to create an angle between the
cable and the CBC roof surface that is LESS THAN 45°. Attaching the cable at any angle less
than 45° will result in excessive strain on the lift rings which may result in damage to the CBC.
Ensure the folding steps on the CBC outside wall are folded flat against the wall when lowering
the upper section, damage to the shelter could result if you do not fold them flat.
NOTE
Lift rings (Figure 1, Item 1) are provided on the four corners of the CBC to allow it to be lifted onto
and off a vehicle bed. The lift rings must be used only to lift a CBC that is mechanically detached
from the vehicle.
To lift the CBC using the lift rings, the CBC must first be in its fully-extended and locked position.
To replace any of the wire rope assembly used to raise and lower the CBC upper section, a
hoisting sling should be attached to the CBC in order to support the weight of the upper section
during the repair.
Raising or lowering of the CBC upper section can be accomplished using the CBC winch if the
wire rope assemblies have minor damage but are not broken. If one or more wire rope
assemblies are broken, it will be necessary to use a lifting hoist system to raise and/or lower the
CBC upper section in order to install the four equal length (35 inch) board safety supports.
The angle created between each cable and the roof surface of the CBC must not be any less
than 45°.
1. Attach the hoisting sling (Figure 1, Item 2) to a suitable lifting device.
0029-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
2. Attach the hooks (Figure 1, Item 1) from the hoisting sling (Figure 1, Item 2) to each of the lift rings (Figure 1,
Item 3) making sure that they are securely locked in place. Do not lift the CBC; simply take up the slack in the
hoisting sling (Figure 1, Item 2) to support the weight of the upper section.
1
≥ 45°
Figure 1. Hoisting the CBC Using the Lift Rings.
NOTE
When lifting the upper section using a hoist, the upper section must be lifted evenly on all four
sides. If the upper section is not evenly lifted, it could pinch on one or more sides preventing the
CBC from being extended to its fully-extendable position.
3. Use the hoist to raise the upper section CBC into the desired position to slip the four equal length (35 inch)
board safety supports into position. Refer to Figure 2.
0029-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
NOTE
The 2x4 wood supports (Figure 2, Item 1) are used to support the weight of the upper section of
the CBC while the wire rope assembly is being replaced. Refer to Figure 2. “Inside Supports for
Wire Rope Assembly Repair.”
The four 35-inch sections must all be the same length.
The 2x4 wood supports (Figure 2, Item 1) can be used both on the inside and the outside in the
same manner. If using the 2x4 wood supports (Figure 2, Item 1) on the outside of the CBC
(Figure 2, Item 2), do not do step 4; refer to step 6. If using the 2x4 wood supports (Figure 2, Item
1) on the inside of the CBC, do not do step 6; refer to step 4.
The illustration shown in Figure 2 represents the inside placement of the 2x4 wood supports. The
outside placement of the 2x4 wood supports is not shown.
4. Place the 2x4 wood supports (Figure 2, Item 1) along the sidewalls near each of the four inside corners
(Figure 2, Item 2) of the CBC. Ensure that the bottom of the 2x4 is resting on the top ledge of the bottom
section, and the top of the 2x4 wood supports (Figure 2, Item 1) are pointing up toward the ceiling. The
supports should be placed near each corner but a sufficient distance away from the corner to allow removal of
the corner fitting cover plates (Figure 2, Item 3) and pulleys.
5. Use tape (Figure 2, Item 4) to hold the 2x4 wood supports (Figure 2, Item 1) to the wall in a vertical position
until the upper section is lowered onto them.
6. Place the 2x4 wood supports (Figure 2, Item 1) along the sidewalls near each of the four outside corners of
the CBC (Figure 2, Item 2). Ensure that the bottom of the 2x4 wood supports (Figure 2, Item 1) are resting on
the truck or trailer, and the top of the 2x4 wood supports (Figure 2, Item 1) are pointing up toward the top
section of the CBC.
7. Use tape to hold the 2x4 wood supports (Figure 2, Item 1) to the wall in a vertical position until the upper
section is lowered onto them. (Not shown)
8. Lower the upper section until it rests on the four 2x4 wood supports (Figure 2, Item 1), and all tension is off of
the wire rope
2
4
Figure 2. Inside Supports for Wire Rope Assembly Repair.

0029-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
NOTE
The screws that secure the top of the winch cover are different length the then the screws that
secure the bottom of the winch cover. Keep the screws separated for installation.
9. Removing four screws (Figure 3, Item 1), four lockwashers (Figure 3, Item 2), and four flat washers (Figure
3, Item 3) that secure the winch cover (Figure 3, Item 4). Discard the lockwashers.
10. Remove the winch cover (Figure 3, Item 4) and set aside for installation.
1
2
Figure 3. Wire Rope Assembly Cover Removal.
0029-5
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
WARNING
When working with wire rope, wear industrial gloves to prevent injury to hands and fingers.
NOTE
Use a free hand or another person to guide the wire rope assemblies (Figure 4, Item 1) while
being unwound from the winch barrel (Figure 4, Item 6) to prevent tangling.
11. Use the winch ratchet (Figure 2, Item 5) to completely unwind the wire rope assemblies (Figure 3, Item 5)
from the winch barrel (Figure 3, Item 6).
NOTE
It may be necessary to use force to remove the wire rope assembly end balls (Figure 4, Item 2) from the
keyhole slots.
12. Remove each wire rope assembly end ball (Figure 4, Item 2) from its keyhole slot (Figure 4, Item 3) in the
outside plate (Figure 4, Item 5) or middle plate (Figure 4, Item 4).
3
6
5
4
Figure 4. Wire Rope Assembly End Ball and Keyhole Slot.

END OF TASK
0029-6
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
Replacing Winch Corner Wire Rope Assembly
NOTE
The following procedure applies only to the replacement of the short wire rope assembly located
at the winch corner. To replace any of the other wire rope assembly assemblies, refer to the
section of this work package entitled “REPLACING WIRE ROPE ASSEMBLIES OTHER THAN
THE WINCH CORNER.”
1. Remove short screw (Figure 5, Item 1) closest to the CBC wall from the corner pulley cover plate (Figure 5,
Item 3).
2. Remove long screw (Figure 5, Item 2), spacer (Figure 5, Item 4), and locknut (Figure 5, Item 6) from the
corner pulley cover plate (Figure 5, Item 3) closest to the inside of the CBC. Discard the locknut.
3. Lift and remove the right hand pulley (Figure 5, Item 5) and set it aside.
1
2
Figure 5. Winch Corner Assembly Replacement.
0029-7
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
NOTE
Sealer may have to be removed from the edges of the corner wire rope assembly retaining block
(Figure 6, Item 16), along with plate (Figure 6, Item 17), before they can be removed.
4. Move to the outside of the CBC.
5. Removing two screws (Figure 6, Item 13), two lockwashers (Figure 6, Item 14) and two flat washers (Figure 6,
Item 14) securing the corner wire rope assembly retaining block (Figure 6, Item 16) and plate (Figure 6, Item
17) located on the outside of the CBC at the winch corner (Figure 6, Item 1). Discard old lockwashers.
6. Remove the setscrew (Figure 6, Item 12) at the center of the block (Figure 6, Item 16).
7. Position a second person inside the CBC at the winch corner and have them feed the winch corner wire rope
assembly (Figure 6, Item 2) over the vertical guide corner pulley (Figure 6, Item 11) to allow slack on the
retaining block (Figure 6, Item 16) and plate (Figure 6, Item 17).
NOTE
It may be necessary to push the ball end of the wire rope assembly out with a small screwdriver.
8. Disengage the ball end (Figure 6, Item 10) of the wire rope assembly (Figure 6, Item 2) from the retaining
9. Pull the winch wire rope assembly (Figure 6, Item 2) through to the inside of the CBC until it is totally removed
from the CBC.
END OF TASK
Installing Winch Corner Wire Rope Assembly
1. From the inside of the CBC, install new winch corner wire rope assembly (Figure 6, Item 2) by feeding a free
end through the inside opening of the CBC at the winch corner.
2. Feed the wire rope assembly (Figure 6, Item 2) through to the outside of the CBC over the vertical guide
corner pulley (Figure 6, Item 11) to a second person positioned outside the winch corner.
3. Have the second person guide the wire rope assembly out the CBC.
4. Install the ball end of the wire rope assembly (Figure 6, Item 2) into the keyhole of the plate (Figure 6, Item
17) and the retaining block (Figure 6, Item 16).
5. Install the setscrew (Figure 6, Item 12) at the center of the retaining block (Figure 6, Item 16).
7. Place the retaining block (Figure 6, Item 16) back into position under the corner (Figure 6, Item 1) of the CBC
upper section.
8. Secure the retaining block (Figure 6, Item 16) and the plate (Figure 6, Item 17) with two screws (Figure 6,
Item 13), lockwashers (Figure 6, Item 14), and flat washers (Figure 6, Item 15) removed earlier. Tighten
securely.
9. Pull the winch corner wire rope assembly (Figure 6, Item 2) tight from inside the CBC.
10. Align the wire rope assembly in the groove of the left hand pulley (Figure 6, Item 11).
0029-8
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
11. Install the right-hand pulley (Figure 6, Item 8) while aligning the right-hand wire rope assembly (Figure 6, Item
7) into the groove of the right-hand pulley (Figure 6, Item 8).
12. Ensure both pulleys (Figure 6, Items 8 and 11) are in place and the wire rope assemblies (Figure 6, Items 7
and 10) aligned properly.
13. Install the short screw (Figure 6, Item 3) in the hole of the corner pulley cover plate (Figure 6, Item 5) closest
to the wall of the CBC.
14. Install the screw (Figure 6, Item 4), spacer (Figure 6, Item 6), and locknut (Figure 6, Item 9) in the hole of the
corner pulley cover plate (Figure 6, Item 5) closest to the inside of the CBC.
3
2
17 4
5
16
6
15
11
7
14
12
13
3 8
10
Figure 6. Winch Corner Wire Rope Assembly Components.
0029-9
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
15. Rotate the winch barrel (Figure 7, Item 1) to position the keyhole (Figure 7, Item 3) located on the middle
plate of the winch barrel (Figure 7, Item 1) at the top of the winch barrel.
16. Install the ball end (Figure 7, Item 4) of the wire rope assembly (Figure 7, Item 2) that was NOT replaced, in
the keyhole (Figure 7, Item 3) located on the middle plate of the winch barrel (Figure 6, Item 1)
Figure 7. Attaching Wire Rope Assembly Ball End to Keyhole.

17. Slowly rotate the winch barrel (Figure 8, Item 1) clockwise approximately 1/2 turn in order to position the
keyhole (Figure 8, Item 4) located on the left end plate at the top of the winch barrel (Figure 8, Item 1).
18. Install the ball end of the winch corner wire rope assembly (Figure 8, Item 2) into the keyhole (Figure 8, Item
5) located on the left plate (Figure 8, Item 4) of the winch barrel (Figure 8, Item 1).
19. Have second person wearing gloves hold both the winch corner wire rope assembly (Figure 8, Item 2) and the
right hand wire rope assembly (Figure 8, Item 3) behind the winch in order to guide the wire rope assemblies
onto the winch barrel (Figure 8, Item 1).
0029-10
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
20. Rotate the ratchet handle (Figure 8, Item 5) and begin taking up the wire rope assembly (Figure 8, Item 6)
onto the winch barrel (Figure 8, Item 1). Be sure the both cables start winding into the groove of the winch
barrel (Figure 8, Item 1) closest to the plate.
21. Ensure that the wire rope assembly (Figure 8, Item 3) is wound into the grooved recesses on the winch barrel
(Figure 8, Item 1) and that the wire rope assembly remains in a single layer, each turn parallel to the last.
22. Continue turning the winch barrel (Figure 8, Item 1) until all wire rope assembly (Figure 8, Item 6) slack is
taken up and the wire rope assemblies (Figure 8, Item 6) are taut.
6
5
4
Figure 8. Corner Wire Rope Assembly Installation.

23. Perform wire rope assembly adjusting procedure located at the end of this Work Package.
END OF TASK
0029-11
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
Replacing Entire Wire Rope Assembly (Other than the Winch Corner Wire Rope Assembly)
NOTE
The entire wire rope assembly (other than the winch corner wire rope assembly) consists of one
long wire rope assembly (Figure 9, Item 4) that extends from the winch to the corner opposite the
personnel door from the winch. This long wire rope assembly has three small extensions attached
to it that will connect with three shorter wire rope assemblies at each corner. Three shorter,
individual wire rope assemblies extend to each of the three corners (other than the winch corner).
They connect to the long wire rope assembly (Figure 9, Item 4) which has extensions on it to
connect the three smaller wire rope assemblies coming from each corner. Replacement of the
entire wire rope assembly is detailed below.
The procedure that follows applies only to the replacement of a wire rope assembly other than
that located at the winch corner. To replace the winch corner wire rope assembly, refer to
paragraph “REPLACING WINCH CORNER WIRE ROPE ASSEMBLY.”
1. Prepare the CBC for wire rope assembly replacement as detailed in paragraph “PREPARING THE CBC FOR
WIRE ROPE REPLACEMENT.”
2. Remove short screw (Figure 9, Item 1) closest to the CBC wall from the corner pulley cover plate (Figure 9,
Item 3).
3. Remove long screw (Figure 9, Item 8), spacer (Figure 9, Item 7), and locknut (Figure 9, Item 5) from the
corner pulley cover plate (Figure 9, Item 2) closest to the inside of the CBC. Discard the locknut.
4. Lift and remove the left (Figure 9, Item 6) and right (Figure 9, Item 3) pulley in each corner of the CBC and set
them aside.
2
8
7
3
6
4
Figure 9. Corner Pulley Removal.
0029-12
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
5. Move to the outside of the CBC.

NOTE
Sealer may have to be removed from the edges of the corner wire rope assembly retaining block
(Figure 10, Item 2), along with plate (Figure 10, Item 1), before they can be removed.
6. Remove the corner wire rope assembly retaining blocks (Figure 10, Item 2) along with the plate (Figure 10,
Item 1) located on the outside of the CBC at every corner, except the winch corner, by removing the two
screws (Figure 10, Item 5), two lockwashers (Figure 10, Item 6), and two flat washers (Figure 10, Item 7)
securing them in place. Discard old lockwashers.
7. Remove the setscrew (Figure 10, Item 4) at the center of the retaining blocks (Figure 10, Item 2).
NOTE
It may be necessary to push the ball end of the wire rope assembly out with a small screwdriver.
8. Disengage the ball end (Figure 10, Item 3) of the wire rope assembly from the retaining blocks (Figure 10,
Item 2).
7 3
4
5
Figure 10. Wire Rope Assembly Retaining Block Removal.
9. Locate the turnbuckle (Figure 11, Item 2) in the channel (Figure 11, Item 3) halfway down the sidewall to the
right of the winch.
0029-13
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
10. Lift the wire rope assembly (Figure 11, Item 1) out of the channel (Figure 11, Item 3) to gain access to the
turnbuckle (Figure 11, Item 2).
Figure 11. Turnbuckle Location.
11. Pull the end of the left hand turnbuckle-locking clip (Figure 12, Item 1) the end closest to the center hole
(Figure 12, Item 6) out of the turnbuckle with a pair of needle nose pliers and slide the locking clip (Figure 12,
Item 1) out the left side of the turnbuckle (Figure 12, Item 4).
12. Repeat for the opposite side turnbuckle-locking clip (Figure 12, Item 2) except slide it out to the right.
13. Discard removed turnbuckle-locking clips (Figure 12, Item 1 and 2) as they will be replaced with new ones
upon replacing the wire rope assembly.
14. Unscrew the turnbuckle body using a punch with a tip diameter that fits into the center hole (Figure 12, Item
6).
15. Rotate the turnbuckle (Figure 12, Item 4) until the threaded portion of the wire rope end terminals rod ends
(Figure 12, Item 5) is completely removed from the turnbuckle (Figure 12, Item 4).
16. Set the turnbuckle (Figure 12, Item 4) aside; it will be required later.
17. Repeat for remaining two turnbuckles.
3
1 2
4 5
Figure 12. Turnbuckle Removal.
18. Position a second person outside the CBC at one of the corners.
0029-14
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
19. Have the second person feed each wire rope assembly over the vertical guide corner pulley from the outside
of the CBC.
20. Pull each wire rope assembly through to the inside of the CBC until it has been removed from the CBC.
END OF TASK
Installing Entire Wire Rope Assembly (Other than the Winch Corner Wire Rope Assembly)
1. From the outside of the CBC, feed a new wire rope assembly (Figure 13, Item 20) in each corner (Figure 13,
Item 2) of the CBC (Figure 13, Item 3) to a second person positioned inside the CBC by feeding the wire rope
assembly (Figure 13, Item 20) without a ball on its end through the corner opening over the vertical guide
corner pulley (Figure 13, Item 1).
2. Install the ball end (Figure 13, Item 4) of the wire rope assembly (Figure 13, Item 20) into the keyhole (Figure
13, Item 17) of each corner wire rope assembly retaining block (Figure 13, Item 18) and plate (Figure 13, Item
19).
3. Install the setscrew (Figure 13, Item 13) at the center of the retaining block (Figure 13, Item 18) and plate
5. Place each corner wire rope assembly retaining block (Figure 13, Item 18) along with the plate (Figure 13,
Item 19) back into position under its corresponding corner of the CBC upper section.
6. Secure with the two screws (Figure 13, Item 14), lockwashers (Figure 13, Item 15), and flat washers (Figure
13, Item 16) removed earlier. Replace the lockwashers with new ones.
8. Repeat this procedure for each corner.
9. Install the left pulley (Figure 13, Item 8).
10. Align the left hand wire rope assembly (i.e. the short wire rope assembly that goes down the corner) (Figure
13, Item 11) in the groove of the left hand pulley (Figure 13, Item 12).
11. Starting at the corner winch, lay the long wire rope assembly (Figure 13, Item 2) in the channel (Figure 13,
Item 3) on the inside of the CBC, keeping the threaded ends (Figure 13, Item 4) accessible.
NOTE
The long wire rope assembly should lie toward the inside of the CBC and the three extensions
coming off the long wire assembly should lie toward the outside of the CBC.
Be sure that both wire rope assemblies are in their respective pulley grooves when both pulleys
are installed.
12. Align the right hand wire rope assembly (i.e. the long wire rope assembly with extends to all corners except
the winch corner (Figure 13, Item 9) while installing the right hand pulley (Figure 13, Item 8).
13. Place the corner pulley cover plate (Figure 13, Item 6) on the corner assembly.
14. Install the short screw (Figure 13, Item 4) in the hole of the corner pulley plate (Figure 13, Item 6) closest to
the wall of the CBC.
15. Install the longer screw (Figure 13, Item 5), spacer (Figure 13, Item 7), and locknut (Figure 13, Item 10) in the
hole of the corner pulley plate (Figure 13, Item 6) toward the inside of the CBC.
0029-15
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
2
20
4
5
19
18
1 6
4
17 7
12
8
16
11
15
9
14
13
10
Figure. 13. Threading Wire Rope Assembly Over Pulleys.
NOTE
If the 2x4 wood supports supporting the top section of the CBC are on the inside, it may be
necessary to feed the wire rope assembly under the 2x4 wood supports.
The turnbuckle has a ring around the one end. That end goes towards the left when threading on
to the terminal rods.
16. Install the threaded end of each terminal rod (Figure 14, Item 2), one on the long wire rope assembly and one
on the short wire rope assembly going down each corner (other than the winch corner) into the turnbuckle
(Figure 14, Item 1) removed earlier.
0029-16
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
WARNING
17. At the same time, start screwing the threaded ends of each terminal rod (Figure 14, Item 2) into the
turnbuckle body (Figure 14, Item 1) an equal amount until approximately 7/16 inch of thread are still exposed.
18. Repeat for each of the three-turnbuckle bodies.
Figure 14. Installing/Attaching Terminal Ends.
0029-17
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
19. Once all turnbuckles are installed and all wire rope assemblies are in their respective channels, rotate the
winch barrel (Figure 15, Item 5) as necessary to position the keyhole (Figure 15, Item 3) located on the middle
plate (Figure 15, Item 2) of the winch barrel at the top.
20. Install the ball end (Figure 15, Item 4) of the long wire rope assembly (Figure 15, Item 1) nearest the right side
of the winch (not the winch corner wire rope assembly) in the keyhole (Figure 15, Item 3) located on the
middle plate (Figure 15, Item 2) of the winch barrel (Figure 15, Item 5).
4
5
2
3
Figure 15. Installing Wire Rope Assembly Ball End.
0029-18
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
21. Slowly rotate the winch barrel (Figure 16, Item 8) clockwise approximately 1/2 turn in order to position the
keyhole (Figure 16, Item 3) located on the left end plate (Figure 16, Item 5) of the winch barrel (Figure 16,
Item 8) at the top.
22. Install the ball end (Figure 16, Item 4) of the winch corner wire rope assembly (Figure 16, Item 2) into the
keyhole (Figure 16, Item 3) located on the left end plate (Figure 16, Item 5) of the winch barrel (Figure 16,
Item 8). Apply force if necessary.
23. Have a person wearing gloves hold both the winch corner wire rope assembly (Figure 16, Item 6) and the
right hand wire rope assembly (Figure 16, Item 1) behind the winch in order to guide the wire rope assemblies
onto the winch barrel (Figure 16, Item 8).
NOTE
Ensure that the wire rope assembly is wound into the grooved recesses on the winch barrel
(Figure 16, Item 8) and that the wire rope assembly remains in a single layer, each turn parallel to
the one before.
24. Rotate the ratchet handle (Figure 16, Item 7) and begin taking up the wire rope assembly onto the winch
barrel (Figure 16, Item 8).
NOTE
It is important that the short cable assembly is tight.
25. Continue turning the winch barrel (Figure 16, Item 8) until all wire rope assembly slack is taken up and both
wire rope assemblies are tight.
1
6
5
2
8 4
7 3
Figure 16. Removing Slack from Wire Rope Assembly.
0029-19
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
26. Extend the CBC until the upper sections stops moving when turning the winch.
27. Proceed to adjustment procedures.
END OF TASK
Adjustment Procedures for the Wire Rope Assembly

1. Extend the CBC until the upper sections stops moving when turning the winch.
2. Start with the winch corner side and measure each corner height from the outside bottom of top section, to
the top of the mounting edge. The height of all four corners should be within ± 1/8 inch using the winch corner
measurement as a reference height.
NOTE
The 2x4 wood supports are used to support the weight of the upper section of the CBC while the
wire rope assembly is being replaced. Refer to Figure 17. “Inside Supports for Wire Rope
Assembly Repair.”
The four 35-inch sections must all be the same length.
The 2x4 wood supports can be used both on the inside and the outside in the same manner. If
using the 2x4 wood supports on the outside of the CBC, do not do step 4; refer to step 6. If using
the 2x4 wood supports on the inside of the CBC, do not do step 6; refer to step 4.
The illustration shown in Figure 17 represents the inside placement of the 2x4 wood supports.
The outside placement of the 2x4 wood supports is not shown.
3. If the corners are not even, place the 2x4 wood supports (Figure 17, Item 1) along the sidewalls near each of
the four inside corners (Figure 17, Item 2) of the CBC. Ensure that the bottom of the 2x4 wood supports is
resting on the top ledge of the bottom section, and the top of the 2x4 wood supports are pointing up toward
the ceiling. The supports should be placed near each corner but a sufficient distance away from the corner to
allow removal of the corner fitting cover plates (Figure 17, Item 3) and pulleys.
4. As each one is put in place, use tape (Figure 17, Item 4) to hold them to the wall in a vertical position until the
upper section is lowered onto them. (Not shown)
5. Lower the upper section until it rests on the four 2x4 wood supports (Figure 17, Item 1), and all tension is off
of the wire rope.
0029-20
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
4 2
Figure 17. Inside Supports for Wire Rope Assembly Repair.
WARNING
6. Adjust the turnbuckles (Figure 18, Item 1) to within plus or minus an 1/8 of an inch, starting with the
turnbuckle (Figure 18, Item 1) closest to the winch corner. Turn the threaded rod (Figure 18, Item 2) in or out
of the turnbuckle (Figure 18, Item 1) to the difference between the height of each corner. Example: If the
winch corner measures 29 inches and the left front corner measures 29 1/2 inches, then turn the threaded rod
(Figure 18, Item 2) in the turnbuckle (Figure 18, Item 1) so that the measurement on both sides of the threads
equals the difference between the two corners.
a. Turning the turnbuckle (Figure 18, Item 1) clockwise will tighten the cable and raise the corner of the
CBC.
b. Turning the turnbuckle (Figure 18, Item 1) counterclockwise will loosen the cable and lower the CBC.
7. Raise the CBC after the turnbuckle adjustment and measure each corner to within an 1/8 of an inch tolerance.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 if more adjustment to the turnbuckle is needed to the 1/8 of an inch tolerance.
0029-21
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
1 2
Figure 18. Turnbuckle Adjustment.

9. Lower the upper section until it rests on the four 2x4 wood supports and all tension is off of the wire rope.
10. Install turnbuckle locking clips (Figure 19, Item 2) in the turnbuckles (Figure 19, Item 9).
11. Ensure that the groove on the shaft of the terminal end (Figure 19, Item 8) lined up EXACTLY with the small
notched cutout (Figure 20, Item 6) located on the edge of the turnbuckle (Figure 19, Item 9).
12. If the groove (Figure 19, Item 8) is not lined up exactly with the notched cutout (Figure 19, Item 6), the locking
clips (Figure 19, Item 2) will not slide into place and cannot be properly locked in the turnbuckle body in latter
step.
13. Use a pair of needle nose pliers to slide the long end (straight portion) (Figure 19, Item 3) of the new
turnbuckle locking clip (Figure 19, Item 2) into the left end of the turnbuckle (Figure 19, Item 9) positioned
closest to the winch corner.
NOTE
The turnbuckle locking clips must be installed on the opposite sides of each other.
14. Install the bent end (Figure 19, Item 4) of the turnbuckle-locking clip (Figure 19, Item 2) into the center hole
(Figure 19, Item 7) of the turnbuckle (Figure 19, Item 9).
15. Repeat for the right turnbuckle-locking clip (Figure 19, Item 5).
16. Repeat turnbuckle locking clip installation procedure for each turnbuckle body.
0029-22
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
1 4
2 3 5
3
6
Figure 19. Installing Turnbuckle Locking Clips.

17. Using the winch handle raise the upper section, and properly place the lift/locking mechanisms to support the
Upper Section as described in WP 0005.
18. Install the winch cover (Figure 20, Item 4) by installing the four screws (Figure 20, Item 1), lockwashers
(Figure 20, Item 2), and flat washers (Figure 20, Item 3) that secure the cover (Figure 20, Item 4). Replace
old lockwashers with new ones.
19. Remove the four supporting 2x4 wood supports.
20. Install the personnel door assembly (lower). Refer to WP 0005 “Installing the Personnel Door Assembly
(Lower) to the Personnel Door Assembly (Upper)” for installation instructions.
0029-23
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0029
1
2
Figure 20. Installing Winch Cover.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0029-24
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0030
FIELD MAINTENANCE
WINCH, DRUM, HAND-OPERATED
SERVICE, REPLACE
INITIAL SETUP:

CBC in fully-extended position with all lift/locking Light-Wheel Vehicle Mechanic (91B) (1)
assemblies locked in place (WP 0005).
MOS Non-specific (1)
Item 21).
WP 0029
Lifting device for upper section; i.e., crane, rated
minimum 600 lbs, if winch is inoperative (WP 0005).
SERVICE
Refer to WP 0017 paragraph entitled “LUBRICATION REQUIRMENTS” for servicing instructions.

END OF TASK
REPLACE
1. Remove the winch cover (Figure 1, Item 13) by removing the four screws (Figure 1, Item 1), four lockwashers
(Figure 1, Item 2), and four flat washers (Figure 1, Item 5) that the secure the winch cover (Figure 1, Item 13).
Discard the lockwashers.
2. Place the winch cover (Figure 1, Item 13) and its hardware aside.
NOTE
It may require some force to pull and/or push the end ball through the keyhole slot. Take note of
the relative positions of the cables. A small piece of tape marking the left and right wire rope
assemblies is recommended.
3. Using a ratchet and/or by hand, unwind the cables (Figure 1, Items 9 and 11) from the winch barrel (Figure 1,
Item 10).
4. Remove each wire rope assembly end ball (Figure 2, Item 5) from its keyhole slot (Figure 2, Item 2) in the
outside plate (Figure 2, Item 1) or middle plate (Figure 2, Item 3).
NOTE
Remove hardware, starting from the right side of the winch.
5. Remove four hex locknuts (Figure 1, Item 6), four flat washers (Figure 1, Items 5 and 7), and four hex head
bolts (Figure 1, Item 4) that secure the hand-operated drum winch (Figure 1, Item 12) to the winch assembly
bracket (Figure 1, Item 8). Discard the locknuts.
0030-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0030
6. Remove the hand-operated drum winch (Figure 1, Item 12) from the hand-operated drum winch bracket
(Figure 1, Item 8).
7. Install a new hand-operated drum winch (Figure 1, Item 12) in position onto the hand-operated drum winch
bracket (Figure 1, Item 8).
8. Align the holes in each.
NOTE
Ensure that the bolts to install the winch assembly go through from the drum side. The locknuts
should be on back side of the plate away from the drum.
9. Install four hex head bolts (Figure 1, Item 4), four flat washers (Figure 1, Items 5 and 7), and four locknuts
(Figure 1, Item 6).
10. Rotate the hand-operated drum winch barrel (Figure 1, Item 10) to position the keyhole (Figure 2, Item 2)
located on the middle plate (Figure 2, Item3) at the top of the hand-operated drum winch barrel (Figure 2,
Item 6).
11. Install the ball end (Figure 2, Item 5) of the wire rope assembly of the long right hand wire rope assembly
(Figure 1, Item 9), in the keyhole (Figure 2, Item 2) located on the middle plate (Figure 2, Item 3) of the hand-
operated drum winch barrel (Figure 1, Item 10).
12. Slowly rotate the hand-operated drum winch barrel (Figure 1, Item 6) approximately 1/2 turn in order to
position the keyhole (Figure 2, Item 2) located on the left end plate (Figure 2, Item 1) at the top of the hand-
operated drum winch barrel (Figure 1, Item 10).
13. Install the left hand-operated drum winch corner wire rope assembly (Figure 1, Item 11) back onto the hand-
operated drum winch barrel (Figure 1, Item 10) by inserting its ball end (Figure 2, Item 5) into the keyhole slot
(Figure 2, Item 2) located in the outside plate (Figure 2, Item 1) of the hand-operated drum winch barrel
(Figure 1, Item 10). Start in the winch corner to measure and proceed clockwise measuring all four corners.
14. If the dimension varies more than an 1/8 of an inch, the turnbuckles will need to be adjusted. Refer to WP
0029 for instructions on adjusting the turnbuckles.
NOTE
The height of all four corners should be within ± 1/8 inch using the winch corner measurement as
a reference height. If the corners are not equal, adjust the three turnbuckle bodies (refer to WP
0029) until their respective corners are equal to the winch corner height to within ± 1/8 inch.
15. Re-measure all four corners as described in WP 0029.
0030-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0030
5
1 4
2
3 6
12
10
13
11
Figure 1. Hand-Operated Drum Winch.
0030-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0030
2
4
1 1 3 3
OUTSIDE WINCH PLATE WINCH BARREL INSIDE WINCH PLATE
2 6 or 7
5
MIDDLE WINCH PLATE WINCH CABLE DETAIL
Figure 2. Hand-Operated Drum Winch Detail.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0030-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0031
FIELD MAINTENANCE
ANGLE, CARRIER MOUNTING
REPLACE
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 21)
REPLACE
NOTE
The carrier mounting angle is located on the forward wall of the CBC.
1. Remove damaged carrier mounting angle (Figure 1, Item 8) by removing 13 hex bolts (Figure 1, Item 7), 13
lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 6), and 13 flat washers (Figure 1, Item 5) that secure the damaged carrier
mounting angle to the front of the CBC(Figure 1, Item 2). Discard the lockwashers.
2. Remove four hex nuts (Figure 1, Item 1), four lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 10), and four flat washers (Figure
1, Item 9) that secure the carrier mounting angle (Figure 1, Item 8) to the platform. Discard the lockwashers.
3. Remove the damaged carrier mounting angle (Figure 1, Item 8).
4. Install the carrier mounting angle (Figure 1, Item 8) by aligning the holes (Figure 1, Item 4) in the angle with
the holes (Figure 1, Item 3) on the CBC (Figure 1, Item 2).
5. Install 13 hex bolts (Figure 1, Item 7), 13 lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 6), and 13 flat washers (Figure 1, Item
5) in all mounting holes (Figure 1, Item 3) in the (Figure 1, Item 2) of the CBC (Figure 1, Item 2).
6. Install four hex nuts (Figure 1, Item 1), four lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 10), and four flat washers (Figure 1,
Item 9) to secure the carrier mounting angle (Figure 1, Item 8) to the platform.
0031-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0031
10
3
9
5
6
7
5
4
6
Figure 1. Carrier Mounting Angle Replacement.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0031-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0032
FIELD MAINTENANCE
DOOR, PERSONNEL ASSEMBLY
REPLACE, INSPECT, REPAIR
INITIAL SETUP:
CBC fully-extended and locked position (WP Light-Wheel Vehicle Mechanic (91B) (2)
0005).
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0055, Table 2, Sealant, Type II MIL-S-8802 (WP 0057, Table1, Item
Item 21) 22)
Step Device/Ladder Solvent, Methylethylketone (MEK) (WP 0057, Table 1,
Item 24)
References
WP 0036
WP 0037
REPLACE
Remove Personnel Door Assembly (Lower)
1. Open the personnel door assembly and remove the cotter pins (Figure 1, Item 12) that secures inner door
handle (Figure 1, Item 11).
2. Remove the inner door handle (Figure 1, Item 11) to access the personnel door assembly (lower) rod (Figure
1, Item 8).
3. Pull the personnel door assembly (upper and lower) rods (Figure 1, Items 8 and 10) out of the rod guides
(Figure 1, Item 9) located on the inside of the personnel door assembly.
4. Set the personnel door assembly (lower) rod (Figure 1, Item 8) aside for installation.
5. Support the lower personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 1, Item 5) with a free hand.
6. Remove the three hand knobs (Figure 1, Item 7) with lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 6) that secure the
personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 1, Item 5) to the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 1, Item 3).
Discard old lockwashers.
7. Set the three knobs (Figure 1, Item 7) and lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 6) aside for installation.
8. Lift to remove the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 1, Item 5).
NOTE
The hex head bolt closest to the center of the personnel door assembly (lower) is short in length
than the hex head bolt near the outside of the personnel door assembly (lower).
9. Remove the two hex head bolts (Figure 1, Item 14), two lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 12), and two flat washers
(Figure 1, Item 13) from the door hinge (Figure 1, Item 15) of the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 1,
Item 7). Discard the lockwashers.
10. Set the two hex head bolts (Figure 1, Item 14), flat washers (Figure 1, Item 13) and the door hinge (Figure 1,
Item 15) aside for installation.
END OF TASK
0032-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0032
Remove Personnel Door Assembly (Upper)
NOTE
Two people are required to perform removal of personnel door assembly (upper).
A step/device ladder will be needed to reach the top and bottom hinge (Figure 1, Item 1).
1. Remove the personnel door assembly (Lower) (Figure 1, Item 5). Refer to Remove Personnel Door Assembly
(Lower) in this Work Package on previous page.
2. Remove sealant from hex head bolts (Figure 1, Item 18) on the top and bottom hinge (Figure 1, Item 1) of the
personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 1, Item 3).
3. Ensure the second person supports the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 1, Item 3).
NOTE
There are three washers (Figure 1, Item 2) used as spacers on the back side of the hinge. Retain
these when removing the hinge (Figure 1, Item 1) from the personnel door assembly (upper) for
installation.
4. Remove two hex bolts (Figure 1, Item 18), two lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 19), and two washers (Figure 1,
Item 20) from the top hinge (Figure 1, Item 1) on the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 1, Item 3).
Discard the lockwashers.
NOTE
There are three washers (Figure 1, Item 2) used as spacers on the back side of the hinge. Retain
these when removing the hinge (Figure 1, Item 1) from the personnel door assembly (upper) for
installation.
5. Remove two hex bolts (Figure 1, Item 18), two lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 19), and two washers (Figure 1,
Item 20) from the bottom hinge on the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 1, Item 3). Discard the
lockwasher.
6. Remove the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 1, Item 3).
END OF TASK
INSPECT
1. Inspect hinge (Figure 1, Items 1 and 17) on personnel door assembly (upper and lower) (Figure 1, Items 3
and 5). Replace hinge (Figure 1, Items 1 and 17), if damaged.
2. Inspect the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 1, Item 5) for punctures that would cause leaking to the
CBC. Refer WP 0037 for repair procedures.
3. Inspect the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 1, Item 5) for dents. Refer to WP 0036 for repair
procedures.
0032-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0032
1
20
18
19
17 4
14
16
12 13
15
11
6
10
7
6
7 9
8
Figure 1. Personnel Door Assembly (Upper and Lower) Replacement.
END OF TASK
0032-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0032
INSTALL
Install Personnel Door Assembly (Upper)
NOTE
Two people are required to perform installation of personnel door assembly (upper).
1. Place personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 1, Item 3) into position with the assistance of a second
person.
2. Align the upper hinge (Figure 1, Item 1) mounting holes.
3. Install the two hex bolts (Figure 1, Item 18), two lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 19), two flat washers (Figure 1,
Item 20) and three washer shims (Figure 1, Item 2).
4. Align the lower hinge mounting holes.
5. Install the two hex bolts (Figure 1, Item 18), two lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 19), two flat washers (Figure 1,
Item 20) and three washer shims (Figure 1, Item 2).
7. Use Sealant, Type II MIL-S-8802 (WP 0057, Table1, Item 21) to seal the hex head bolts of the top and bottom
hinge of the personnel door assembly (upper).
END OF TASK
Install Personnel Door Assembly (Lower)
1. Transfer the door hinge (Figure 1, Item 17) of the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 1, Item 5) from the
defective personnel door assembly (lower) Figure 1, Item 5) (only if the hinge is not damaged in any way) to
the new personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 1, Item 5).
2. Secure with longer hex head bolt (Figure 1, Item 16), flat washer (Figure 1, Item 14), and lockwasher (Figure
1, Item 13).
3. Secure with shorter hex head bolt (Figure 1, Item 15), flat washer (Figure 1, Item 14), and lockwasher (Figure
1, Item 13).
4. Place the personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 1, Items 5) into position under the personnel door
assembly (upper) (Figure 1, Item 3).
5. Align the three-hand knob mounting holes.
6. Install by tightening the three hand knobs (Figure 1, Item 7) with lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 6).
7. Install the personnel door assembly (lower) rod (Figure 1, Item 8) in position through the two mounts (Figure
1, Item 9) inside the lower personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 1, Item 5).
8. Install the personnel door assembly (upper) rod (Figure 1, Item 10) in position through top of the guide in the
personnel door assembly (upper) and place the bottom on the pin of the inner door handle.
9. Install two cotter pins (Figure 1, Item 12) to secure the personnel door assembly (upper and lower) rods
(Figure 1, Items 8 and 10).
11. Use sealant, Type II MIL-S-8802, (WP 0057, Item 21) to seal the hex head bolts of the bottom hinge of the
personnel door assembly (lower).
END OF TASK
0032-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0032
REPAIR
Opening a Personnel Door Assembly from the Outside with a Non-Functioning Door Latch.
1. Remove excess sealer from the hex head bolts on the three door hinges of the personnel door assembly.
2. Remove the four hex head bolts (Figure 1, Item 18), four lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 19), and four flat
washers (Figure 1, Item 20) from the top and bottom hinge of the personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 1,
Item 3).
3. Remove the two hex head bolts (Figure 1, Items 15 and 16), two lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 13), and flat
washers (Figure 1, Item 14) from the door hinge (Figure 1, Item 17) of the personnel door assembly (lower)
(Figure 1, Item 5).
4. Use any available tool; i.e. crowbar, trenching tool.
5. Insert the tip into the widest opening between the upper personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 1, Item 3)
and the CBC frame.
6. Exert enough force to open the personnel door assembly (to cause it to fall off completely, or allow enough
room to correct inner personnel door assembly handle malfunction).
7. Enter the CBC through the area created by prying open the personnel door assembly.
8. Remove two cotter pins (Figure 1, Item 12) on the door latch assembly.
9. Remove the door handle (Figure 1, Item 11).
10. Remove the upper and lower door latch assembly rods (Figure 1, Item 8 and 10).
11. Remove three hand knobs (Figure 1, Item 7) with lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 6) from the personnel door
assembly.
12. Carefully rotate personnel door assembly (upper) (Figure 1, Item 3) to free it from the door latch assembly.
And personnel door assembly (lower) (Figure 1, Item 5).
13. Remove personnel door assembly.
14. Should damage result, obtain new parts from stock.
15. Use the necessary steps needed in the paragraph “REPLACE” to restore the personnel door assembly (upper
and lower) to operating status.
END OF TASK
Door Rubber Stripping
1. Remove defective seal (Figure 2, Item 2).

2. Strip old adhesive from bonding surface (Figure 2, Item 1).
WARNING
3. Sand using sandpaper, only if required to remove material not taken off in preceding step.
0032-5
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0032
REPAIR - Continued.
WARNING
from all sparks or open flame. Gloves and safety goggles should be worn during use. Failure to
adhere to this warning may cause death or permanent injury.
materials.
4. Wipe bonding surface (Figure 2, Item 1) with a clean cloth dampened with solvent and immediately wipe
solvent from surface with a clean, dry cloth.
CAUTION
Seals shall not be washed with any aromatic hydrocarbon (such as benzene, toluene,
methylethylketone, or xylene) which will cause deterioration. Failure to adhere to this caution
may result in damage to seals.
5. Clean seal (Figure 2, Item 2) with a lint-free cloth by dry wiping prior to bonding.
WARNING
(93.3 °C). Gloves and safety goggles should be worn during use.
materials.
NOTE
Work quickly when performing the following steps since RTV adhesive cures very quickly.
6. Apply a bead of RTV adhesive on bonding surface (Figure 2, Item 1).
7. Install gasket and press firmly to seat.
8. Ensure contact with mating surface.
0032-6
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0032
REPAIR - Continued.
Figure 2. Personnel Door Assembly Rubber Strip Replacement.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0032-7/8 blank
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0033
FIELD MAINTENANCE
M923, 5 TON CARGO TRUCK MOUNTING KIT
REMOVE, REPAIR
INITIAL SETUP:
CBC fully-extended and locked position (WP Light-Wheel Vehicle Mechanic (91B) (1)
0005).
Crane Operator (21F)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0055, Table 2, Adhesive, RTV-732 (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 1)
Item 21)
Dispenser, RTV adhesive (WP 0055, Table 2, Item long, adhesive backed, color black, closed cell, epdm
2) sponge rubber strip. (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 20)
Gloves (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 12) Bag, Sand (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 6)
Goggles (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 12) Solvent, Methylethylketone (MEK) (WP 0057, Table 1,
Item 24)
References
WP 0005
WP 0019
REPAIR
Remove CBC from M932, 5 Ton Cargo Truck
1. Remove one 1/4-28 UNF x 1.00 inch long hex head bolt (Figure 1, Item 1), flat washer (Figure 1, Item 3), and
lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 2) per hole that attaches the CBC to the vehicle bed at the 12 locations (Locations
marked “C” in Figure 2).
2. Remove one 1/4-28 UNF x 1.25 inch hex head bolt (Figure 1, Item 4), flat washer (Figure 1, Item 8), and
lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 9) per hole at the four hole locations on either side of the threshold (Locations
marked “B” in Figure 2).
3. Remove three pan head screws (Figure 1, Item 5) and lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 6) from the remaining three
hole locations on the threshold (Locations marked “A” in Figure 2).
2
1 4
3 5
6
7
9 8 .
Figure 1. CBC Fastener Removal.
0033-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0033
REPAIR - Continued.
VEHICLE CAB
C
C
C
C C
M923 CENTER LINE

TRUCK OF CBC AND
BED VEHICLE BED
CARGO
BED
COVER
BOTTOM
NOTE: THE LETTERS A, B, AND C ASSEMBLY
ON THE ILLUSTRATION DENOTE
THE DIFFERENT SIZE HARDWARE
TO BE USED IN SECURING THE
CBC TO THE VEHICLE BED. REFER
TO THE PRECEDING TEXT FOR
ADDITIONAL DETAIL.
C
C
C C
B A B
Figure 2. CBC Fastener Size Locations.
0033-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0033
REPAIR - Continued.
WARNING
4. Remove RTV adhesive around the threshold (Figure 3, Item 3) area by starting at the left (Figure 3, Item 1) or
right (Figure 3, Item 4) corner of the CBC under the area where the threshold (Figure 3, Item 3) meets the
vehicle bed (Figure 3, Item 2) with a putty knife.
3
2
1 4
Figure 3. RTV Adhesive Removal.
WARNING
5. Lift the CBC from the vehicle bed using the four lift rings positioned along the front and rear roof lines of the
CBC. The CBC should be lifted from the vehicle bed in accordance with the paragraph of WP 0005 entitled
“HOISTING THE CBC USING THE LIFT RING.”
0033-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0033
REPAIR - Continued.
6. Place the CBC onto a set of supporting blocks placed between the vehicle bed and the CBC. The blocks are
used in order to raise the CBC up off the vehicle bed. This will permit access to the bottom edge of the CBC
that contacts the vehicle bed.
7. Scrape RTV adhesive and rubber strip from CBC and vehicle bed using a putty knife.
SANDBAGS OR OTHER
WEIGHT MAY BE USED
ALONG THE FRONT
EDGE OF THE CBC
ROOF IN ORDER TO
LEVEL THE UNIT
DURING LIFTING AND
LOWERING.
Figure 4. Lifting the CBC from Vehicle Bed.

8. Lift the CBC from the supporting blocks and reposition supporting blocks to areas that have been previously
scrapped.
9. Lower the CBC onto the supporting blocks.
0033-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0033
REPAIR – Continued.
WARNING
Methylethylketone is flammable and toxic and shall be used only in a well-ventilated area, away
10. Wipe CBC and vehicle bed mounting areas with a clean cloth dampened in MEK and immediately wipe
solvent from surfaces with a clean, dry cloth.
11. Repeat steps 9 through 11 until CBC and vehicle bed is completely clean.
12. Install the mounting kit to the CBC. For installation on to the vehicle bed, refer to WP 0019, “Service Upon
Receipt.”
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0033-5/6 blank
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0034
FIELD MAINTENANCE
MOUNTING KIT, M1083, 5 TON MTV
REMOVE, REPAIR
INITIAL SETUP:

Truck bed clean and free of debris. Light-Wheel Vehicle Mechanic (91B) (1)
Side Panels removed and Tailgate lowered Crane Operator (21F) (1)
(TM 9-2330-394-13&P).
Item 21)
Anti-seize Lubricant (WP 0057, Table 1 Item 5)
2) Four Wood Support Blocks 4x4x12 inches long (WP
0057, Table1, Item 29)
long, adhesive backed, color black, closed cell, epdm
References sponge rubber strip. (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 20)
WP 0020 Solvent, Methylethylketone (MEK) (WP 0057, Table 1,
Item 24)
REPAIR
Removing the Clamp Plate Assembly
1. Remove two 1/2-13 UNC hex locknut (Figure 1, Item 7) and two 1/2-inch flat washer (Figure 1, Item 6).
2. Remove clamp plate assembly (Figure 1, Item 5) and spacer block (Figure 1, Item 4) from the bolts (Figure 1,
Item 3).
3. Remove two 1/2-13 UNC x 4.5 inch hex head bolts (Figure 1, Item 3) from the holes in the clamp plate
channel (Figure 1, Item 1).
NOTE
Clamp plate assemblies (Figure 1, Item 5) are installed on either side of the mounting plate
assembly (Figure 1, Item 2). Work in conjunction with the tie-down post assemblies to secure the
CBC/mounting plate combination to the vehicle bed (Figure 1, Item 8).
4. Repeat for the second clamp plate assembly located on the opposite side of the CBC.
0034-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0034
REPAIR - Continued.
8 6
Figure 1. Clamp Plate Assembly Removal.

END OF TASK
Removing the Vehicle Bed Plug
1. Remove a 3/8-16 UNC x 2 inch long bolt (Figure 2, Item 6), lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 7), and flat washer
(Figure 2, Item 8) that secure the plug (Figure 2, Item 5) and bottom plate (Figure 2, Item 4) to the base of the
tie-down post (Figure 2, Item 3) from the underside of the vehicle bed (Figure 2, Item 1). Discard lockwasher.
2. Remove the pin (Figure 2, Item 2) that secures the tie-down post assemblies (Figure 2, Item 3) to the vehicle
bed (Figure 2, Item 1).
3. Remove plug (Figure 2, Item 5) and bottom plate (Figure 2, Item 4) to the base of the tie-down post (Figure 2,
Item 3).
4. Repeat for the remaining tie-down post assemblies on each corner of the vehicle bed.
0034-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0034
REPAIR - Continued.
4
8
5
7
Figure 2. Removing Vehicle Bed Plug.

END OF TASK
Lifting the CBC from the Vehicle Bed
NOTE
Once the mounting plate assembly (Figure 3, Item 6) has been completely disconnected on the
bottom of the vehicle bed (Figure 2, Item 1), the CBC can be carefully lifted from the vehicle bed
(Figure 3, Item 2).
0034-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0034
REPAIR - Continued.
WARNING
materials.
NOTE
Four tie-down post assemblies (Figure 3, Item 4) are installed at the four corners of the mounting
plate assembly (Figure 3, Item 6).
1. Remove two 5/16 inch (0.328 inch ID x 1.375 inch OD x 0.063 inch thick) flat washers (Figure 3, Item 3),
followed by 5/16 inch lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 2) and 5/16 inch UNC x 1 3/4 inch long hex head screw
(Figure 3, Item 1) on the mounting plate assembly (Figure 3, Item 6), spacer plate (Figure 3, Item 5), and into
the tie-down post assembly (Figure35, Item 4). Discard lockwasher.
2. Repeat step 1 for the remaining tie-down post assemblies on each corner of the vehicle bed.
6
3
Figure 3. Removing the Tie-Down Post Assembly.

3. Leave the tie-down post assemblies in place in the vehicle bed when removing the CBC from the vehicle.
0034-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0034
REPAIR - Continued.
4. Remove RTV adhesive from around the threshold area by starting at the left (Figure 4, Item 1) or right
(Figure 4, Item 3) corner of the CBC under the area where the vehicle bed (Figure 4, Item 2) meets the
mounting plate (Figure 4, Item 4) with a putty knife.
1 3
WARNING
Do not lift the CBC in its height-retracted (lowered), condition. The CBC must be in its height -
Once the CBC comes clear of the vehicle bed, personnel should stand clear of the CBC while it is
being lifted and moved. Failure to do so could cause injury or death.
NOTE
A tie-down post may stay attached to the mounting kit because of the RTV around the edges.
You may need to pry the tie-down posts off the mounting kit when lifting the CBC away from the
vehicle bed and place them back into the vehicle bed when remove for installation.
It is important to ensure that the CBC and mounting plate combination is level when lifting the
CBC from the vehicle bed, or the tie-down post assemblies may bind as they are lifted from the
vehicle bed pockets. Since the weight of the CBC is not distributed evenly, the CBC may tilt
toward the rear when lifted with the hoisting sling. To compensate for this condition and to ensure
that the CBC is level, additional weight, such as two 50-pound sandbags or other weight, should
be placed toward the front edge of the roof.
5. Lift the CBC (Figure 5, Item 2) and mounting plate (Figure 5, Item 3) combination from the vehicle bed (Figure
5, Item 4) of the MTV high enough to place support blocks under the CBC. A pry bar may be needed to pry
the edges of the mounting kit away from the vehicle bed. Be aware that the CBC may shift when prying.
6. Slowly lift the CBC above the bed (Figure 5, Item 4) of the MTV. Be sure that the CBC is level as it is
suspended in the air. Remove the tie-down post assemblies if attached when the CBC is lifted.
0034-5
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0034
REPAIR - Continued.
7. Place the CBC onto a set of supporting blocks placed between the bed of the MTV and the CBC.
8. Scrape RTV adhesive and rubber strip from CBC and bed of MTV using a putty knife.
WARNING
from all sparks or open flame. Gloves and safety goggles should be worn during use. Wipe CBC
and bed of the MTV mounting areas with a clean cloth dampened in MEK and immediately wipe
materials.
9. Completely clean the CBC and vehicle bed of all rubber strip material using methylethylketone.
10. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until RTV adhesive and rubber strip have been completely removed from CBC and bed
of MTV.
11. Lift the CBC and place the support blocks on the ground.
CAUTION
Do not sit the CBC down on the supporting blocks with the tie-down post assemblies attached.
12. Lower the CBC onto the support blocks on the ground.
SANDBAGS OR
OTHER WEIGHT MAY
2 BE USED ALONG THE
FRONT EDGE OF THE
CBC ROOF IN ORDER
TO LEVEL THE UNIT
DURING LIFTING AND
3 LOWERING.
Figure 5. Lifting the CBC from the Vehicle Bed.

END OF TASK
0034-6
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0034
REPAIR - Continued.
Remove the Mounting Kit
1. Remove four 5/16-18 UNC x 1 inch long carriage bolts (Figure 6, Item 12), four lockwashers (Figure 6, Item
14), four flat washers (Figure 6, Item 13) and four 5/16-inch UNC hex nuts (Figure 6, Item 15) from curb side
of the CBC. Discard lockwashers.
2. Remove the curb side mounting plate (Figure 6, Item 3).
14), four flat washers (Figure 6, Item 13) and four 5/16-inch UNC hex nuts (Figure 6, Item 15) from road side
4. Remove the road side mounting plate (Figure 6, Item 11).
WARNING
Do not lift the Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) (Figure 6, Item 1) in its retracted (lowered) position. Do not
use the lift rings to lift a CBC (Figure 6, Item 1) with an installed payload greater than 1100
pounds (499 kg). Make sure to use handling equipment rated for the equipment it will be lifting.
Failure to adhere to this warning may result in injury or death.
5. Lift the CBC (Figure 6, Item 1) and relocate the blocks so the front and rear mounting plate (Figure 6, Item 2
and 10) can be removed.
6. Place the supporting blocks under the sidewalls of the CBC (Figure 6, Item 1) approximately 25 inches from
the corners. This will provide adequate room to remove the front and rear sections.
7. Remove four 5/16-18 UNC x 1 1/4-inch long carriage bolts (Figure 6, Item 4), four 5/16-inch flat washer
(Figure 6, Item 6), four 5/16-inch lockwasher (Figure 6, Item 8), and four 5/16-UNC hex nut (Figure 6, Item 7)
from up through the mounting plate and the holes in the CBC threshold on either side of the personnel door
opening. Discard lockwashers.
8. Remove four 5/16-18 UNC x 1 inch long carriage bolts (Figure 6, Item 12), four 5/16 inch flat washer (Figure
6, Item 13), four 5/16-inch lockwasher (Figure 6, Item 14), and four 5/16-UNC hex nut (Figure 6, Item 15) from
up through the ends of the rear mounting plate (Figure 6, Item 10) and the holes in the zee brackets along the
sidewalls nearest the corners. Discard lockwashers.
9. Remove three 5/16-18 UNC x 0.63 inch long pan head screws (Figure 6, Item 9) DOWN through the section
of the CBC threshold at the door opening and into threaded inserts mounted in the mounting plate with three
5/16-inch lockwashers (Figure 6, Item 4) under each head. Discard lockwashers.
10. Remove the rear mounting plate (Figure 6, Item 10).
0034-7
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0034
REPAIR - Continued.
15
14
2
13
11
12
10 3
7 9
5
4
Figure 6. Removing the Rear, Road Side, and Curb Side Mounting Plate Sections.
0034-8
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0034
REPAIR - Continued.
11. Remove four 5/16-18 UNC x 1 inch long carriage bolts (Figure 7, Item 5), four 5/16-inch flat washer (Figure 7,
Item 3), four 5/16-inch lockwasher (Figure 7, Item 2) and four 5/16-UNC hex nut (Figure 7, Item 1) up through
the mounting plate (Figure 7, Item 6) and through the CBC zee bracket (Figure 7, Item 4). Discard
lockwashers.
12. Remove the front mounting plate (Figure 6, Item 2).
4
6
Figure 7. Removing the Front Mounting Plate Section.
END OF TASK
Installing the Mounting Kit to the CBC
1. Remove all RTV from the bottom of the CBC and the mounting kit.
2. Clean the bottom edge of the CBC and the surface of the mounting kit to which the rubber stripping will be
applied.
3. Remove the tie-down posts from the vehicle bed.
4. Clean all the RTV from the tie down posts for installation.
5. Install the mounting kit to the CBC. For installation on to the vehicle bed, refer to WP 0020, “Service Upon
Receipt.”
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0034-9/10 blank
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0035
FIELD MAINTENANCE
MOUNTING KIT, M1095, 5 TON MTV TRAILER
REMOVE, REPAIR
INITIAL SETUP:
Trailer bed clean and free of debris. Light-Wheel Vehicle Mechanic (91B) (1)
Side panels and tailgate removed (TM 9-2330-394- Crane Operator (21F) (1)
13&P).
Item 21)
2)
0057, Table 1, Item 29)
References long, adhesive backed, color black, closed cell,
WP 0021 epdm sponge rubber strip. (WP 0057, Table 1, Item
20)
Masking Tape (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 26)
REPAIR
Removal of Clamp Plate Assembly
Two clamp plate assemblies (Figure 1, Item 10) (one on each side) are installed at the corners of the rear
mounting plate assembly (Figure 1, Item 2) and are used to secure the CBC (Figure 1, Item 1) and mounting plate
combination (Figure 1, Item 9) to the bed of the trailer (Figure 1, Item 11).
1. Remove a 1/2-13 UNC locknut (Figure 1, Item 8) and 1/2 inch flat washer (Figure 1, Item 7) securing the
clamp plate assembly (Figure 1, Item 10) from rear passenger side. Discard locknut.
2. Remove bottom plate with rubber pad attached (Figure 1, Item 6) from the underside of the trailer bed (Figure
1, Item 11).
3. Remove the spacer (Figure 1, Item 5).
4. Remove a hex head bolt (Figure 1, Item 4) from each hole in the clamp plate (Figure 1, Item 3).
5. Repeat the above procedure for the clamp plate assembly located on the road side of the CBC.
0035-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0035
REPAIR - Continued.
4
1 3
6
11
9 8
7
10
Figure 1. Removal of Clamp Plate Assembly.
END OF TASK
Remove Gusset Plates
NOTE
A step/device ladder may be needed to reach the hardware that secures the mounting plate to
the trailer bed.
1. Remove a locknut (Figure 2, Item 6) and flat washer (Figure 2, Item 5) from the end of the 7-inch bolt (Figure
2, Item 1). Discard locknut.
2. Remove one 7-inch bolt (Figure 2, Item 1) and flat washer (Figure 2, Item 2) through both slotted holes
(Figure 2, Item 3) in the vertical trailer support (Figure 2, Item 4).
3. Repeat step 2 for opposite side gusset plate.
4
5 6
3 3
2
Figure 2. CBC Gusset Plate Removal.

END OF TASK
0035-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0035
Remove the CBC from the Trailer

1. Remove RTV adhesive around the threshold area by starting at the left (Figure 3, Item 1) or right (Figure 3,
Item 3) corner of the CBC under the area where the trailer bed (Figure 3, Item 4) meets the mounting plate
(Figure 3, Item 2) with a putty knife.
1 3
4
WARNING
NOTE
It is important to ensure that the CBC and mounting plate combination is level when lifting the
CBC from the trailer bed or the tie-down post assemblies may bind as they are lifted from the
trailer bed pockets. Since the weight of the CBC is not distributed evenly, the CBC may tilt toward
the rear when lifted with the hoisting sling. To compensate for this condition and to ensure that
the CBC is level, additional weight such as two 50-pound sandbags or other weight should be
placed toward the front edge of the roof.
2. Lift the CBC (Figure 4, Item 2) and mounting plate (Figure 4, Item 3) combination from the trailer bed (Figure
4, Item 4) of the trailer by lifting the CBC (Figure 4, Item 2), using the hoisting sling (Figure 4, Item 1). A pry
bar may be needed to pry the edges of the mounting kit away from the trailer bed.
3. Slowly lift the CBC (Figure 4, Item 1) into position above the bed (Figure 4, Item 4) of the trailer. Be sure that
the CBC (Figure 4, Item 1) is level as it is suspended in the air.
4. Place the CBC (Figure 4, Item 1) onto a set of supporting blocks placed between the bed of the trailer (Figure
4, Item 4) and the CBC (Figure 4, Item 1).
0035-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0035
REMOVE - Continued.
5. Scrape RTV adhesive and rubber strip from CBC (Figure 4, Item 2) and bed of trailer (Figure 4, Item 4) using
a putty knife.
6. Lift the CBC (Figure 4, Item 2) and reposition support blocks.
7. Lower the CBC (Figure 4, Item 2) onto support blocks.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until RTV adhesive and rubber strip have been completely removed from CBC (Figure
4, Item 2) and bed of trailer (Figure 4, Item 4).
WARNING
and bed of the trailer mounting areas with a clean cloth dampened in MEK and immediately wipe
materials.
9. Use methylethylketone solvent to completely clean the CBC and trailer of any and all rubber strip.
SANDBAGS OR
OTHER WEIGHT MAY
BE USED ALONG THE
FRONT EDGE OF THE
CBC ROOF IN ORDER
1 TO LEVEL THE UNIT
DURING LIFTING AND
LOWERING.
Figure 4. Lifting the CBC from the Trailer Bed.

END OF TASK
0035-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0035
Remove the Mounting Kit
14), four flat washers (Figure 5, Item 13) and four 5/16-inch UNC hex nuts (Figure 5, Item 15) from curb side
2. Remove the curb side mounting plate (Figure 6, Item 3).
14), four flat washers (Figure 5, Item 13) and four 5/16-inch UNC hex nuts (Figure 5, Item 15) from road side
4. Remove the road side mounting plate (Figure 5, Item 11).
WARNING
Do not lift the Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) (Figure 5, Item 1) in its retracted (lowered) position. Do not
use the lift rings to lift a CBC (Figure 5, Item 1) with an installed payload greater than 1100
pounds (499 kg). Make sure to use handling equipment rated for the equipment it will be lifting.
Failure to adhere to this warning may result in injury or death.
5. Lift the CBC (Figure 5, Item 1) and relocate the blocks so the front and rear mounting plate (Figure 5, Item 2
and 10) can be removed.
6. Place the supporting blocks under the sidewalls of the CBC (Figure 6, Item 1) approximately 25 inches from
the corners. This will provide adequate room to remove the front and rear sections.
7. Remove four 5/16-18 UNC x 1 1/4 inch long carriage bolts (Figure 5, Item 5), four 5/16-inch flat washer
(Figure 5, Item 6), four 5/16-inch lockwasher (Figure 5, Item 8), and four 5/16-UNC hex nut (Figure 5, Item 7)
from up through the mounting plate and the holes in the CBC threshold on either side of the personnel door
opening. Discard lockwashers.
8. Remove four, 5/16-18 UNC x 1 inch long carriage bolts (Figure 5, Item 12), four 5/16-inch flat washer (Figure
5, Item 13), four 5/16-inch lockwasher (Figure 5, Item 14), and four 5/16-UNC hex nut (Figure 5, Item 15) from
up through the ends of the rear mounting plate (Figure 5, Item 10) and the holes in the zee brackets along the
sidewalls nearest the corners. Discard lockwashers.
9. Remove three, 5/16-18 UNC x 0.63 inch long pan head screws (Figure 5, Item 9) DOWN through the section
of the CBC threshold at the door opening and into threaded inserts mounted in the mounting plate with three
5/16-inch lockwashers (Figure 5, Item 4) under each head. Discard lockwashers.
10. Remove the rear mounting plate (Figure 5, Item 10).
0035-5
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0035
REMOVE - Continued.
1
15
14
2
13
11
12 3
10
7
8 9
6
5
4
Figure 5. Removing the Rear, Road Side, and Curb Side Mounting Plate Sections.
11. Remove four 5/16-18 UNC x 1 inch long carriage bolts (Figure 6, Item 5), four 5/16-inch flat washer (Figure 6,
Item 3), four 5/16-inch lockwasher (Figure 6, Item 2) and four 5/16-UNC hex nut (Figure 6, Item 1) up through
the mounting plate (Figure 6, Item 6) and through the CBC zee bracket (Figure 6, Item 4). Discard
lockwashers.
12. Remove the front mounting plate (Figure 5, Item 2).
1
2
4
6
Figure 6. Removing the Front Mounting Plate Section.
0035-6
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0035
REMOVE - Continued.
NOTE
If gusset plate is damaged, follow steps below.
1. Remove three lockwashers, three locknuts, three flat washers. Discard lockwashers and locknuts.
2. Remove gusset plate and spacer from the mounting kit.
END OF TASK
Installing the Mounting Kit to the CBC
WARNING
and bed of the trailer mounting areas with a clean cloth dampened in MEK and immediately wipe
To avoid injury or death to personnel, no smoking is allowed when working with flammable materials.
1. Remove all RTV from the bottom of the CBC and the mounting kit.
2. Clean the bottom edge of the CBC and the surface of the mounting kit that the rubber stripping will be applied.
3. Clean all the RTV from the tie down posts for installation.
4. Install the mounting kit to the CBC. For installation on to the trailer bed, refer to WP 0021, “Service Upon
Receipt.”
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0035-7/8 blank
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0036
FIELD MAINTENANCE
DENTED SKINS AND CORE
REPAIR
INITIAL SETUP:
CBC is clean, free of debris, and in the fully- Metal Worker (44B) (1)
extended position (WP 0005).
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0055, Table 2, Sandpaper (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 21)
Item 21) Rags, Wiping (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 19)
Light, Floor (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 14) Tape, Masking (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 26)
Goggles, Industrial (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 12) Adhesive, Two-part Epoxy (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 2)
Drill, Electric, Portable (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 3) Alodine, Brush (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 3)
Drill Set, Twist (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 5) Cartridges, 1/10 Gallon Empty, 7579a44 (WP 0057,
Table 1, Item 7)
Gloves, Rubber, Industrial (WP 0055, Table 2,
Item 11) Nozzle, 2 1/2 In Long With 1/8 In Orifice (WP 0057,
Table 1, Item 16)
Dispenser, Sealant (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 2)
Sticks, Mixing (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 25)
References
WP 0037 Mask (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 15)
WP 0042
REPAIR
Repair of Depression 4 Square Inches or Smaller Puncture
The following procedure covers repair of a depression with a small puncture in any shelter panel skin
(depression exceeding 2 square inches (12.9 square cm) or deeper than 0.25 inch (6.4 mm), but not
larger than 4 square inches (25.8 square cm) or puncture not larger than 1 square inch (6.5 square cm).
For larger punctures, refer to WP 0037.
0036-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0036
REPAIR - Continued.
WARNING
Safety goggles must be worn during repair to protect eyes from flying metal chips. Failure to
wear proper eye protection may result in eye injury and/or blindness.
1. Drill two 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) diameter holes (Figure 1, Item 1) within damaged area.
WARNING
2. Sand area around drilled holes so there are no sharp edges.
3. Use tape to make a box around the area being worked on.
WARNING
EPOXY COATING KIT, MIL-PRF-22750
Two-part epoxy adhesive is flammable and toxic and shall be used only in a well-ventilated area
4. Mix a quantity of the Adhesive, Two-part Epoxy, (Figure 1, Item 3) in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, components (part “A” and part “B”) sufficient for the scope of the repair in an open top container.
The two adhesive components are different colors; part “A” is yellow and part “B” is blue. When properly and
completely mixed, the color of the Adhesive, Two-part Epoxy is green. Personnel should mix the two parts
until the Adhesive, is a uniform green, with no streaks of yellow or blue.
5. Load the epoxy (Figure 1, Item 2) into an empty 1/10 gallon cartridge.
6. Inject the mixed epoxy into the honeycomb core.
7. Load the mixed epoxy into the empty cartridge.
8. Scoop a quantity of mixed Adhesive, Two-part Epoxy onto the putty knife.
9. Install nozzle onto the end of the empty cartridge.
10. Place into the open end of the cartridge.
11. Load a sufficient amount of Adhesive, Two-part Epoxy into the cartridge for the scope of repair. When the
Adhesive, Two-part Epoxy is completely loaded into the cartridge, install the end cap.
12. Install the cartridge into a sealant dispenser.
13. Inject Adhesive, Two-part Epoxy through two drilled holes (Figure 1, Item 1) to fill core cells completely.
14. Tape over holes in order to hold the epoxy in place during the curing process.
0036-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0036
REPAIR - Continued.
Figure 1. Inserting Adhesive, Two-part Epoxy in Drilled Holes.

15. Cure Adhesive, Two-part Epoxy at room temperature (75 °F) for 72 hours.
CAUTION
Ensure that the surface temperatures of the CBC do not exceed 225 °F. Failure to adhere to this
caution may result in damage to the CBC skin and or cells.
NOTE
Alternate cures can be achieved by exposing the repaired area to 150 °F for 3 to 4 hours or
200 °F for 40 to 60 minutes. If 150 °F or 200 °F cures are used, allow additional time for repaired
area to warm to curing temperature.
16. Check by tapping damaged area to ensure complete filling of cells.
17. Ensure masking tape (Figure 2, Item 1) is still in position around the sanded area.
18. Mix a small quantity of Adhesive, Two-part Epoxy (Figure 2, Item 2) in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
19. Using spatula or putty knife (Figure 2, Item 3), fill remainder of damaged area with Adhesive, Two-part Epoxy
until slightly mounded above the surface.
0036-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0036
REPAIR - Continued.
Figure 2. Using Putty Knife to Fill Dent.
CAUTION
Ensure that the surface temperatures of the CBC do not exceed 225 °F. Failure to adhere to this
caution may result in damage to the CBC skin and or cells.
NOTE
Alternate cures can be achieved by exposing the repaired area to 150 °F for 3 to 4 hours or
200 °F for 40 to 60 minutes. If 150 °F or 200 °F cures are used, allow additional time for repaired
area to warm to curing temperature.
20. Cure adhesive at room temperature (75 °F) for 72 hours.
WARNING
21. Sand surface of cured adhesive and damaged area with sandpaper to remove all traces of paint and excess
adhesive.
0036-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0036
REPAIR - Continued.
22. Remove masking tape (Figure 2, Item 1) and clean repaired surface.
WARNING
ALODINE, MIL-C-5541
Alodine is flammable and toxic and shall be used only in a well-ventilated area, away from all
materials.
23. Apply the alodine solution, with a brush, to the cleaned and rinsed aluminum surface, liberally, quickly, and
evenly. Allow it to act from 1 to 5 minutes before rinsing.
NOTE
The solution should be applied to only as much surface as can be coated and rinsed before the alodine
solution dries.
24. Proceed with the coating and rinsing until the entire surface is coated with alodine.
25. Before the alodine solution dries, wipe it from the surface with a wiping rag that is wet with clean water. The
alodine solution may also be rinsed from the surface with clean water from a hose.
26. After the rinsing, allow the work to air dry.
NOTE
Drying can be speeded by wiping with clean, dry rags. Clean, dry, compressed air should be
used to blow moisture from joints, and depressions to speed the drying. When the surface is
entirely dry, the part is ready for service without further treatment, or if desired, it may be painted
in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.
27. Refinish in accordance with WP 0042.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0036-5/6 blank
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0037
FIELD MAINTENANCE
PUNCTURED SKINS AND CORE
REPAIR
INITIAL SETUP:
Damaged area to be cleaned of mud and dirt. Metal Worker (44B) (1)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0055, Table 2, Item Adhesive, Two-part Epoxy (WP 0057, Table 1, Item
21) 2)
Light, Floor (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 14) Alodine, Brush (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 3)
Drill, Electric, Portable (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 3) Cartridges, 1/10 Gallon Empty (WP 0057, Table 1,
Item 7)
Goggles Industrial (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 12)
Core, 1.00 (or 1.50) Inch Thick × 12 Inches × 12
Drill Set, Twist: W/25 Components And Metal Box,
Inches (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 9 or 10)
Numbered Series (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 4)
Oil, Machine (WP0057, Table 1, Item 17)
Mask (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 15)
Gloves, Rubber, Industrial (WP 0055, Table 2, Item
11) Nozzle, 2 1/2 In Long With 1/8 In Orifice (WP 0057,
Table 1, Item 16)
Dispenser, Adhesive (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 2)
Pail, Mixing (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 18)
Riveter, Hand Blind with 1/8 inch nosepiece (WP
0055, Table 2, Item 16) Rags, Wiping (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 19)
Router, Electric, Portable (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 19) Sandpaper (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 21)
Bit, Router (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 1) Sealant, Type II, MIL-S-8802 (WP 0057, Table 1,
Item 22)
References
WP 0038 Sheet, Aluminum, .032 Inch Thick × 12 Inches × 12
Inches (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 23)
WP 0041
Solvent, Methylethylketone (WP 0057, Table 1, Item
WP 0042
24)
Tape, Masking (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 26)
Procedures begin on next page.
0037-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0037
REPAIR
Repair of Puncture with Minimal Damage to Core
WARNING
NOTE
Sidewalls can be damaged by dents or punctures. The following procedures cover repair of
panel dents or punctures through one or both skins and core with damage area not exceeding
100 square inches (645 square cm). Panel repairs larger than 100 square inches (645 square
cm) are beyond the scope of this manual.
Openings made to repair damage may be oval, circular, square, or rectangular with rounded
corners. Ensure core ribbon direction is same as panel. Use a portable router equipped with a
straight or spiral fluted (pull down) bit, or other aluminum cutting equipment, such as to cut
aluminum patch (Figure 1, Item 4), one inch larger than the size of the damaged area.
1. Lay out and drill holes (Figure 1, Item 5) in patch (Figure 1, Item 4) as shown in accompanying illustration,
roughly one inch apart.
2. Center patch (Figure 1, Item 4) over damaged area (Figure 1, Item 1).
3. Mark patch outline on panel skin.
WARNING
4. Sand all paint from damaged panel skin within marked area with sandpaper.
5. Center patch over damaged area (Figure 1, Item 1) and drill No. 30 diameter holes (Figure 1, Item 6) in panel
skin.
6. Use holes (Figure 1, Item 5) in patch (Figure 1, Item 4) as a template.
7. Index patch (Figure 1, Item 4) and panel skin (Figure 1, Item 7) with a mark to allow patch to be replaced in
same orientation.
8. Deburr all drill holes (Figure 1, Items 5 and 6).
0037-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0037
REPAIR - Continued.
WARNING
materials.
9. Wipe damaged area (Figure 1, Item 1) and patch (Figure 1, Item 4) with a clean cloth dampened in MEK and
immediately wipe solvent from surfaces with a clean, dry cloth. Do not allow solvent to get into exposed core.
WARNING
Two-part Epoxy adhesive is flammable and toxic and shall be used only in a well-ventilated area,
materials.
10. Mix a quantity of the Adhesive, Two-part Epoxy in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, components
(part “A” and part “B”) sufficient for the scope of the repair, in an open top container. The two adhesive
components are different colors; part “A” is yellow and part “B” is blue. When properly and completely mixed,
the color of the adhesive is green. Personnel should mix the two parts until the adhesive is a uniform green,
with no streaks of yellow or blue.
11. Pack adhesive (Figure 1, Item 2) in puncture (Figure 1, Item 3) and all exposed core cells. Use mixing sticks
to pack adhesive and obtain a smooth surface.
12. Apply a thick film of remaining adhesive to mating surface of patch (Figure 1, Item 4).
13. Place patch (Figure 1, Item 4) over prepared area in same orientation used in earlier step.
14. Align holes (Figure 1, Items 5 and 6).
15. Use hand blind riveter to install 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) diameter blind rivets in accordance with WP 0038.
16. Cure adhesive at room temperature (75 °F) for 72 hours. If a heat source is available, alternate cures can be
achieved by exposing the repaired area to 150 °F for 3 to 4 hours or 200 °F for 40 to 60 minutes. If 150 °F or
200 °F cures are used, allow additional time for repaired area to warm to curing temperature.
17. Ensure that the surface temperature of the CBC does not exceed 225 °F.
18. Proceed with Alodining, following the repairs of punctures through both skins IAW “Alodine Application,“ at the
end of the work package.
0037-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0037
REPAIR - Continued.
1/8 INCH (3.18 MM)

5
1/2 INCH (12.7 MM)

TYPICAL 1/2 INCH (12.7 MM)
TYPICAL
1/2 INCH (12.7 MM)

TYPICAL
Figure 1. Repairs to Small Punctures with Minimal Core Damage.

END OF TASK
0037-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0037
Repair of Puncture through One Skin and Core
NOTE
Core material thickness depends on thickness of side wall being repaired.
1. Cut an opening that is one inch greater than damaged area through the damaged aluminum panel skin using
a portable electric router and a straight or spiral fluted (pull down) bit, or equivalent aluminum cutting
equipment. Avoid sharp corners in opening.
2. Peel damaged portion of skin from core by lifting and rolling skin with screwdriver and pliers.
3. Trim core area with a utility knife to same size as opening, while leaving small amount of core material on
opposite skin.
4. Cut a rectangular-shaped aluminum patch (Figure 2, Item 1) 1-1/2 inch (3.8 cm) larger all around than cutout
opening.
5. Lay out and drill 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) diameter holes (Figure 2, Item 3) in patch.
6. Cut a section of core material the same size as cutout opening. Core plug should be flush with or slightly
lower than panel skin surface.
7. Center patch over cutout opening and mark patch outline (Figure 2, Item 2) on panel skin.
8. Drill No. 30 diameter holes in panel skin with patch as template.
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not use power sander when removing paint. Failure to adhere to this caution may result in
damage to CBC skin.
9. Sand all paint from panel skin, within marked area, with sandpaper.
10. Mark both patch and panel to ensure replacement in the same direction.
11. Deburr drill holes (Figure 2, Item 3) and sand all paint from panel skin within marked area.
12. Clean loose core material, dust, and chips from cutout opening.
0037-5
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0037
REPAIR - Continued.
1 INCH (25.4 MM)

TYPICAL
1/2 INCH (12.7 MM)

TYPICAL
1/8 INCH DRILL (3.18 MM)

TYPICAL
2
3
1
Figure 2. Damage to Single Skin Repair.
WARNING
materials.
13. Wipe panel skin, within marked area and patch (Figure 2, Item 1), with a clean cloth dampened with MEK and
immediately wipe solvent from surfaces with a clean, dry cloth.
0037-6
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0037
REPAIR - Continued.
WARNING
Sealant is flammable and toxic and shall be used only in a well-ventilated area, away from all
materials.
14. Mix a quantity of the sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, components (part “A” and part
“B”) sufficient for the scope of the repair in an open top container.
15. Apply an even coat of sealant to cutout core surfaces.
16. Insert core plug in cutout opening and press firmly in place.
17. Apply an even coat of sealant around core plug.
18. Fill any gaps around plug.
19. Cure sealant at room temperature (75 °F) for 72 hours. If a heat source is available, alternate cures can be
achieved by exposing the repaired area to 150 °F for 3 to 4 hours or 200 °F for 40 to 60 minutes. If 150 °F or
NOTE
Ensure that the surface temperature of the CBC does not exceed 225 °F.
20. Sand cured sealant with sandpaper to obtain a smooth contour with surface of panel skin.
21. Apply an even coat of adhesive to mating surface of patch.
22. Place patch (Figure 2, Item 1) over prepared area in same orientation as marked in earlier step.
23. Align holes. Using a hand blind riveter, install 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) diameter blind rivet in accordance with WP
0038.
24. Proceed with alodining, following the repairs of punctures through both skins IAW “Alodine Application “ at the
end of the work package.
END OF TASK
0037-7
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0037
Repair to Holes through Both Outer Skins and Inner Core
NOTE
Core material thickness depends on thickness of side wall being repaired.
1. Cut an opening that is one inch greater than damaged area through both inner and outer panel skins using a
portable electric router and a straight or spiral fluted (pull down) bit, or equivalent aluminum cutting
equipment. Avoid sharp corners in opening.
2. Cut any remaining core out to the opening of the skin cutouts.
3. Cut a core plug (Figure 3, Item 2) and two aluminum patches (Figure 3, Item 1) one to three inches larger
than the opening cut in Step 1 above, on all sides.
WARNING
materials
4. Mix a quantity of the sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions; components (part “A” and part
“B”) in an open top container sufficient to bond two patches (Figure 3, Item 2) to core plug (Figure 3, Item 1).
WARNING
materials.
5. Wipe patches (Figure 3, Item 2) with a clean cloth dampened with MEK and immediately wipe solvent from
surfaces with a clean, dry cloth.
6. Apply a thick coat of sealant to one side of each patch.
7. Place core plug (Figure 3, Item 2) between two patches (Figure 3, Item 1) to create a sandwich panel (Figure
3, Item 3).
8. Cure adhesive at room temperature (75 °F) for 72 hours. If a heat source is available, alternate cures can be
achieved by exposing the repaired area to 150 °F for 3 to 4 hours, or 200 °F for 40 to 60 minutes. If 150 °F or
0037-8
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0037
REPAIR - Continued.
NOTE
Ensure that the surface temperature of the CBC does not exceed 225 °F.
9. Cut bonded sandwich panel (Figure 3, Item 3) to same size as cutout opening as detailed in earlier step.
Ensure core ribbon direction is same as panel.
10. Drill 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) diameter holes (Figure 3, Item 6) in the two patches.
11. Position bonded sandwich panel (Figure 3, Item 3) in cutout opening.
12. Center patches (Figure 3, Item 8), one on each side of panel, over cutout opening.
13. Drill No. 30 (3.27 mm) diameter holes (Figure 3, Item 4) in panel skins and bonded sandwich panel, with
patches as templates.
14. Mark each patch outline (Figure 3, Item 5) on panel skin.
WARNING
15. Sand all paint from panel skin within marked area with sandpaper.
16. Index each patch and panel skin with a mark to allow patches to be replaced with same orientation.
17. Remove patches (Figure 3, Item 8) and bonded sandwich panel (Figure 3, Item 3).
18. Deburr drill holes (Figure 3, Items 4 and 6).
WARNING
19. Sand all paint from panel skin within marked areas.
20. Clean loose core material, dust, and chips from cutout opening.
0037-9
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0037
REPAIR - Continued.
WARNING
materials.
21. Wipe panel skin within marked areas (two patches) and bonded sandwich panel metal skin with a clean cloth
dampened with MEK solvent. Immediately wipe solvent from surfaces with a clean, dry cloth.
22. Mix a sufficient amount of Two-part Epoxy in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
23. Apply a thick coat of Two-part Epoxy to inside surfaces of panel cutout opening, bonded sandwich panel, and
two patches.
24. Position bonded sandwich panel in cutout opening.
25. Fill any gaps between cutout opening and bonded sandwich panel with two part epoxy.
26. Place patches (Figure 3, Item 8) over prepared areas in same orientation as described in earlier step.
27. Align holes (Figure 3, Items 4 and 6). Using a hand blind riveter, install 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) diameter blind
rivet (Figure 3, Item 7), in accordance with WP 0038.
28. Proceed with alodining procedures IAW “Alodine Application” at end of work package.
0037-10
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0037
2
1 3
1/2 INCH (12.7 MM) TYPICAL
2 INCH (50.8 MM) TYPICAL
4
1/8 INCH DIA. (3.18 MM) TYPICAL
7
6
Figure 3. Puncture Through Both Skins.

END OF TASK
0037-11
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0037
REPAIR - Continued.
Alodine Application
1. Clean repaired surfaces.

2. Caulk around repair patches (Figure 3, Item 8) in accordance with WP 0041.
WARNING
ALODINE, MIL-C-5541
Alodine is flammable and toxic and shall be used only in a well-ventilated area, away from all
materials.
3. Apply alodine solution, with a brush, to the cleaned and rinsed aluminum surface liberally, quickly, and evenly.
Allow it to act from 1 to 5 minutes before rinsing.
NOTE
The solution should be applied to only as much surface as can be coated and rinsed before the
alodine solution dries.
4. Proceed with the coating and rinsing until the entire surface is coated with alodine.
5. Before the alodine solution dries, wipe it from the surface with a wiping rag that is wet with clean water. The
alodine solution may also be rinsed from the surface with clean water from a hose.
6. After the rinsing, allow the work to air dry.
NOTE
Drying can be speeded by wiping with clean, dry rags. Clean, dry, compressed air should
be used to blow moisture from joints, depressions, and to speed the drying. When the
surface is entirely dry, the part is ready for service without further treatment, or if desired, it
may be painted in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.
7. Refinish in accordance with WP 0042.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0037-12
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0038
FIELD MAINTENANCE
BLIND RIVET
REPLACE
INITIAL SETUP:

CBC fully-extended and locked in position (WP Light-Wheel Vehicle Mechanic (91B) (1)
0005).
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0055, Table 2, Pail, Mixing (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 18)
Item 21)
Goggles, Industrial (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 12) Rags, Wiping (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 19)
Drill, Electric, Portable (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 3) Sealant, Type II (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 22)
Drill Set, Twist: W/25 Components And Metal Box, Stick, Mixing, Epoxy (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 25)
Numbered Series (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 4)
Riveter, Blind, Hand with 1/8 inch nosepiece (WP Tape, Masking (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 26)
0055, Table 2, Item 16)
Punch, Pin, 1/8 Inch Dia. (WP 0055, Table 2, Item

15)
REPLACE
Remove Defective Blind Rivets
WARNING
1. Select a drill bit (Figure 1, Item 1) that is the same diameter as installed blind rivet (Figure 1, Item 2).
2. Hold drill perpendicular to the surface to prevent enlargement or damage to existing hole.
3. Drill through center of rivet (Figure 1, Item 2) just deep enough to sever the rivet head from shank.
4. Remove remainder of rivet with a pin punch.
5. Deburr rivet hole.
END OF TASK
0038-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0038
Install Blind Rivets
1. Select proper diameter and length of blind rivet (Figure 1, Item 2) for the hole.
2. Select appropriate nosepiece (Figure 1, Item 4) for hand blind riveter (Figure 1, Item 3).
3. Install nosepiece (Figure 1, Item 4).
WARNING
materials.
NOTE
Maximum application life of sealant is 2 hours.
4. Mix a small quantity of the sealant, in an open top container, sufficient for the repair being performed.
NOTE
The sealant is supplied as two components, part “A,” and part “B.” The two-sealant components
are different colors; part “A” is black and Part “B” is off white. The sealant is mixed in a ratio of
10:100 (Part “A”: Part “B”) by weight. This means, for example, that one ounce of Part “A” would
require ten ounces of Part “B” to achieve a proper formulation. Before mixing the two
components together, each component should be measured out and mixed separately to ensure
that each component is uniform in color and consistency. Once the separate components are
uniformly mixed, combine Part “A” and Part “B” together and mix the combination together in
order to achieve a uniform dark grey color. Personnel should mix the two-parts and ensure that
there are no visible streaks of black or white.
5. Apply sealant to rivet and insert rivet into hole.
6. Hold hand blind riveter (Figure 1, Item 3) at right angle to work.
7. Install on blind rivet stem (Figure 1, Item 5).
8. Push against work with just enough force to firmly seat rivet and prevent part separation.
9. Squeeze handle of hand blind riveter (Figure 1, Item 3).
10. Pull rivet until stem (Figure 1, Item 5) breaks.
11. If necessary, trim broken stem flush with rivet head.
12. Check installed rivet to ensure tightness of installation.
13. If installation is unacceptable, remove and replace in accordance with steps above.
0038-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0038
90°
Figure 1. Blind Rivet Replacement.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0038-3/4 blank
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0039
FIELD MAINTENANCE
MANUALLY EXTENDING THE UPPER SECTION OF THE CBC
INITIAL SETUP:

Item 21)
MANUALLY EXTENDING THE UPPER SECTION OF THE CBC
WARNING
raised) position prior to using the lift rings for lifting the CBC for moving it off its mounting surface.
Do not use the lift rings to lift a CBC with more than an additional payload of 100 pounds
(equivalent weight of two 50-pound sand bags). Lift rings should only be used to lift an empty
CBC that is not mounted to a vehicle.
A CBC that has been installed on a vehicle may only be hoisted using the lifting points on the
vehicle.
equipment.
Manually Extending the Upper Section of the CBC
CAUTION
Do not attach a hoisting sling to the lift rings in such a way as to create an angle between the
cable and the CBC roof surface that is LESS THAN 45°. Attaching the cable at any angle less
than 45° will result in excessive strain on the lift rings which may result in damage to the CBC.
Ensure the folding steps on the CBC outside wall are folded flat against the wall when lowering
the upper section. Damage to the shelter could result if you do not fold them flat.
NOTE
The angle created between each cable and the roof surface of the CBC must not be any less
than 45°.
1. Attach the hoisting sling (Figure 1, Item 2), approved by the safety officer, to a suitable lifting device.
0039-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0039
Manually Extending the Upper Section of the CBC- Continued.

2. Attach the hooks (Figure 1, Item 1) from the hoisting sling (Figure 1, Item 2) to each of the lift rings (Figure 1,
Item 3) making sure that they are securely locked in place. Do not lift the CBC; simply take up the slack in the
hoisting sling (Figure 1, Item 2) to support the weight of the upper section.
≥ 45°
Figure 1. Manually Extending the Upper Section of the CBC.
NOTE
When lifting the upper section using a lifting device, the upper section must be lifted evenly on all
four sides. If the upper section is not evenly lifted, it could pinch on one or more sides preventing
the CBC from being extended to its fully extendable position.
3. Use the lifting device to raise the upper section CBC into the desired position.
4. Because the weight of the upper section of the CBC is not distributed evenly, the CBC may tilt toward the rear
when lifted with the hoisting sling. To compensate for this condition and to ensure that the upper section of
the CBC is level, additional weight, such as two 50-pound sandbags or other weight, should be placed toward
the front edge of the roof.
5. Secure the upper section of the CBC in the extended position by positioning the lift/locking assemblies. Refer
to WP 0005.
6. Continue setting up the CBC for operations. Refer to WP 0005.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0039-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0040
FIELD MAINTENANCE
THREADED INSERTS NON-POTTED (NON-ADHESIVE ENCAPSULATED)
REPAIR
INITIAL SETUP:

Item 21)
Drill, Electric, Portable (WP 0055, Table 2, Item
3)
Gloves, Rubber, Industrial (WP 0055, Table 2,
Item 12)
Goggles, Industrial (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 12)
Riveter, Blind, Hand (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 16
or 17)
Light, Floor (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 14)
REPAIR
Replacing Non-Potted (Non-Adhesive Encapsulated) Inserts
NOTE
Inserts installed in extrusions are not potted. Knock out insert and replace with same type.
1. Depending on insert size, select a drill bit in size range listed in Table 1.
Table 1. Insert Drill Sizes.
Insert Thread Size Drill Size Range Inches (mm)
10-32 19/64 (7.6)
1/4-28 25/64 (9.9)
5/16-24 45/64 (17.5)
3/8-24 49/64 (19.1)
0040-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0040
REPAIR - Continued.
WARNING
Wear safety goggles for eye protection against flying chips. Failure to adhere to this warning may
result in eye damage or blindness.
2. Use selected drill bit (Figure 1, Item 1) to drill head flange (Figure 1, Item 2) from insert (Figure 1, Item 3).
3. Knock out remaining portion of insert.
1
2
Figure 1. Non-Potted (Non-Adhesive Encapsulated) Insert Replacement.

END OF TASK
Installing Threaded Inserts In Non-Potted Areas (Edge Members)
CAUTION
Always apply anti-seize lubricant to bolt and screw threads before installation to prevent galling.
During the installation of threaded inserts, the threads inside the threaded insert can sometimes
be damaged by the installation tool and may result in the bolts and screws binding. If this occurs,
run a 5/16-18 UNF tap into the threaded area. This will clear and straighten the threads, making
for easier and faster assembly. Care should be taken using this method since the tap has the
ability to remove and/or cross thread existing threads. Be sure to work slowly and deliberately
when clearing the threads. Failure to adhere to this caution may result in thread damage.
1. Install the threaded insert using the appropriate hand-operated threaded insert installation tool (Figure 2, Item
1), hex key (Figure 2, Item 2) (included with installation tool), and 3/4 inch (or 1-1/16 inch depending on
header tool used) wrench, (adjustable, fixed, or box-end ratchet type).
2
1
Figure 2. Hand-Operated Insert Installation Tools.

0040-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0040
REPAIR - Continued.
NOTE
Before using the installation tool, inspect the condition of the jackscrew threads before use. If the
tool has been used previously, the jackscrew threads may require a few drops of light machine
oil. Lubricate as necessary.
2. Install a threaded insert.
3. Thread the threaded insert fastener (Figure 3, Item 2) onto the threaded end (Figure 3, Item 3) of the
installation tool (Figure 3, Item 1). Be sure that the end of the installation tool is tight against the head of the
fastener.
2
3
Figure 3. Threading the Threaded Insert Fastener.

4. With the threaded insert (Figure 4, Item 2) installed on the installation tool (Figure 4, Item 1), insert the
threaded insert into the hole (Figure 4, Item 3) on the panel (Figure 4, Item 4).
1
2
4
Figure 4. Inserting Threaded Insert into Hole in CBC Panel.

5. Insert the hex key (Figure 5, Item 1) into the socket (Figure 5, Item 2) at the top of the installation tool (Figure
5, Item 3).
6. Insert the jaws of the wrench on the flat-sided center section (Figure 5, Item 5) of the installation tool.
7. While holding the hex key stationary and the installation tool at a right angle to the panel (Figure 5, Item 4),
turn the wrench in a clockwise direction, keeping track of the number of turns.
8. Turn the wrench in a clockwise direction until firm resistance indicates that the fastener is completely set, but
no more than the maximum number of turns indicated in Table 2.
0040-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0040
REPAIR - Continued.
Table 2. Thread Sizes.
Thread Size Maximum # of turns
10-32 1
1/4-28 1-1/2
5/16-24 1-3/4
3/8-24 1-1/2
9. Once the threaded insert is completely set, turn the wrench in a counterclockwise direction to break its grip
with the threaded insert.
10. Remove hex key and wrench from the installation tool.
2
1
Figure 5. Installing Threaded Insert.

11. Remove the threaded insert installation tool (Figure 6, Item 1) from the threaded insert (Figure 6, Item 2) by
turning the entire tool by hand in a counter-clockwise direction.
Figure 6. Removal of Threaded Insert Installation Tool.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0040-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0041
FIELD MAINTENANCE
CAULKED SECTIONS
REPAIR
INITIAL SETUP:

CBC clean and free of debris. Light-Wheel Vehicle Mechanic (91B) (1)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0055, Table 2, Item Cartridges, 1/10 Gallon, Empty (WP 0057, Table
21) 1, Item 7)
Gloves, Rubber, Industrial (WP 0055, Table 2, Item Solvent, Methylethylketone (WP 0057, Table 1,
12) Item 24)
Dispenser, Sealant (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 2) Nozzle, 2 1/2 In Long With 1/8 In Orifice (WP
0057, Table 1, Item 16)
Pail, Mixing (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 18)

Rags, Wiping (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 19)
Sealant, Type II (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 22)
REPAIR
WARNING
materials.
1. Just prior to application of sealing compound, clean surface (Figure 1, Item 1) to be sealed with cloth
dampened with MEK.
2. Dry with a clean cloth before the MEK evaporates in order to prevent contamination.
0041-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0041
REPAIR - Continued.
WARNING
materials.
NOTE
Maximum application life of sealant is 2 hours.
3. Mix a small quantity of the sealant in an open top container sufficient for the repair being performed.
NOTE
The sealant is supplied as two components, part “A,” and part “B.” The two sealant components
are different colors; part “A” is black and Part “B” is off white. The sealant is mixed in a ratio of
10:100 (Part “A”: Part “B”) by weight. This means, for example, that one ounce of Part “A” would
require ten ounces of Part “B” to achieve a proper formulation. Before mixing the two
components together, each component should be measured out and mixed separately to ensure
that each component is uniform in color and consistency. Once the separate components are
uniformly mixed, combine Part “A” and Part “B” together and mix the combination together in
order to achieve a uniform dark grey color. Personnel should mix the two-parts and ensure that
there are no visible streaks of black or white.
4. Apply sealing compound with caulking gun (or putty knife) (Figure 1, Item 2) in 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) minimum
fillets (Figure 1, Item 3).
5. Let sealant cure completely. Nominal curing time is 72 hours at 75 °F.
1
3
Figure 1. Caulking Repaired Section.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0041-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0042
FIELD MAINTENANCE
PAINT AND REFINISHING
REPAIR
INITIAL SETUP:

Painter (1)
Goggles, Industrial (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 12) Pail, Mixing (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 18)
Gloves, Rubber, Industrial (WP 0055, Table 2, Item Stick, Mixing Epoxy (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 25)
12)
Tape, Masking (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 26)
Drill, Electric, Portable (WP 0055, Table 2, Item 3)
Rags, Wiping (WP 0057, Table 1, Item 19)
References
MIL-C-5541, Class 1A
Primer (Refer to Table 1)
Coating (Refer to Table 1)
REPAIR
Table 1 below lists the paint data for the interior and exterior of Cargo Bed Covers.
Table 1. Paint Data for Cargo Bed Covers.
Use Type Specification Color Code per

Color FED-STD-595
Interior Coating, Epoxy MIL-PRF-22750 27875
Interior (Personnel Door) Coating, Aliphatic MIL-C-46168 or 34094

Polyurethane MIL-C-53039
Green 383
Interior (Personnel Door) Coating, Aliphatic MIL-C-46168 or 33303

Sand
Exterior Coating, Aliphatic MIL-C-46168 or 34094

Green 383

Brown 383
0042-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0042
REPAIR - Continued.
Table 1. Paint Data for Cargo Bed Covers - Continued.
Use Type Specification Color Code per

Color FED-STD-595

Black

Sand
Primer Primer, Epoxy Coating MIL-P-23377, Type I, Class C N/A

or N or MIL-P-53022, Type I
or II
1. Prepare surface for painting by removing all corrosion by wire brushing, sanding, or application of corrosion-
removing compounds.
2. Chemically treat all aluminum parts in accordance with MIL-C-5541, Class 1A.
3. Areas to be painted shall be free of dust, residue, and cleaning compounds before refinishing.
NOTE
Mask seals or non-metal parts with masking tape for protection.
4. Solvent, primer, or paint shall not be applied to seals or non-metal parts.
5. Mask such parts with masking tape for protection.
6. Mix and apply epoxy primer coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Allow to dry thoroughly before applying finish coat.
8. Mix and apply paint in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
9. Apply two separate, uniform coats, allowing the first coat to dry before applying the second coat.
10. Make sure there are no sags or runs.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0042-2
CHAPTER 6
PARTS INFORMATION
FOR

TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0043
REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST (RPSTL) INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
SCOPE
This RPSTL lists and authorizes spares and repair parts; special tools; special Test, Measurement, and
Diagnostic Equipment (TMDE); and other special support equipment required for performance of operator, field
and sustainment support maintenance of the Cargo Bed Cover (CBC), 5 Ton Cargo Truck, MTV, and MTV Trailer.
It authorizes the requisitioning, issue, and disposition of spares, repair parts, and special tools as indicated by the
Source, Maintenance, and Recoverability (SMR) codes.
GENERAL
In addition to the Introduction Work Package (WP), this RPSTL is divided into the following WPs.
1. Repair Parts List WPs. WPs containing lists of spares and repair parts authorized by this RPSTL for use
in the performance of maintenance. These WPs also include parts which must be removed for
replacement of the authorized parts. Parts lists are composed of functional groups in ascending
alphanumeric sequence, with the parts in each group listed in ascending figure and item number
sequence. Sending units, brackets, filters, and bolts are listed with the component they mount on. Bulk
materials are listed by item name in FIG. BULK at the end of the WPs. Repair parts kits are listed at the
end of the individual WPs. Repair parts for reparable special tools are also listed in a separate WP. Items
listed are shown on the associated illustrations.
2. Special Tools List WPs. WPs containing lists of special tools, special TMDE, and special support
equipment authorized by this RPSTL (as indicated by Basis of Issue (BOI) information in the
DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE (UOC) column). Tools that are components of common tool
sets and/or Class VII are not listed.
3. Cross-Reference Indexes WPs. There are 2 cross reference indexes WPs in this RPSTL: the National
Stock Number (NSN) Index WP, and the Part Number (P/N) Index WP. The National Stock Number
(NSN) Index WP refers you to the figure and item number. The Part Number (P/N) Index WP refers you to
the figure and item number.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN THE REPAIR PARTS LIST AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST WORK
PACKAGES
ITEM NO. (Column (1)). Indicates the number used to identify items called out in the illustration.
SMR CODE (Column (2)). The SMR code containing supply/requisitioning information, maintenance level
authorization criteria, and disposition instruction, as shown in the following breakout. This entry may be
subdivided into four subentries, one for each service.
0043-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0043
Table 1. SMR Code Explanation.
Source Maintenance Recoverability

Code Code Code
XX XX X
1st and 2nd positions: 3rd position: Who can 4th position: Who can do 5th position: Who
How to get an item. install, replace, or use the complete repair* on the determines the
item. item. disposition action on
unserviceable items.
*Complete Repair: Maintenance capacity, capability, and authority to perform all corrective maintenance tasks of
the "Repair" function in a use/user environment in order to restore serviceability to a failed item.
Source Code. The source code tells you how you get an item needed for maintenance, repair, or overhaul of an
end item/equipment. Explanations of source codes follow:
Source Code Application/Explanation

PA
PB NOTE
PC Items coded PC are subject to deterioration.
PD Stock items; use the applicable NSN to requisition/request items with these source
PE codes. They are authorized to the level indicated by the code entered in the third
position of the SMR code.
PF
PG
PH
PR
PZ
KD
Items with these codes are not to be requested/requisitioned individually. They are
KF part of a kit which is authorized to the maintenance level indicated in the third
position of the SMR code. The complete kit must be requisitioned and applied.
KB
MF-Made at field
Items with these codes are not to be requisitioned/requested individually. They
MH-Made at below
must be made from bulk material which is identified by P/N in the DESCRIPTION
depot/sustainment level
AND USABLE ON CODE (UOC) column and listed in the bulk material group WP
ML-Made at SRA of the RPSTL. If the item is authorized to you by the third position code of the SMR
code but the source indicates it is made at a higher level, order the item from the
MD-Made at depot
higher level of maintenance.
MG-Navy only
0043-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0043

AF-Assembled by field
level
Items with these codes are not to be requested/requisitioned individually. The parts
AH-Assembled by below that make up the assembled item must be requisitioned or fabricated and
depot/sustainment level assembled at the level of maintenance indicated in the source code. If the third
position of the SMR code authorizes you to replace the item but the source code
AL-Assembled by SRA
indicates the item is assembled at a higher level, order the item from the higher
AD-Assembled by depot level Specialized Repair Activity (SRA) of maintenance.
AG-Navy only
XA Do not requisition an “XA” coded item. Order the next higher assembly. (Refer to
NOTE below.)
XB If an item is not available from salvage, order it using the Commercial and
Government Entity Code (CAGEC) and P/N.
XC Installation drawings, diagrams, instruction sheets, field service drawings; identified
by manufacturer’s P/N.
XD Item is not stocked. Order an XD-coded item through local purchase or normal
supply channels using the CAGEC and P/N given, if no NSN is available.
NOTE
Cannibalization or controlled exchange, when authorized, may be used as a source of supply for
items with the above source codes except for those items source coded "XA" or those aircraft
support items restricted by requirements of AR 750-1.
Maintenance Code. Maintenance codes tell you the level(s) of maintenance authorized to use and repair support
items. The maintenance codes are entered in the third and fourth positions of the SMR code as follows:
Third Position. The maintenance code entered in the third position tells you the lowest maintenance level
authorized to remove, replace, and use an item. The maintenance code entered in the third position will indicate
authorization to the following levels of maintenance:
Maintenance
Code Application/Explanation
F- Field maintenance can remove, replace, and use the item.
H- Below Depot Sustainment maintenance can remove, replace, and use the item.
L- Specialized repair activity can remove, replace, and use the item.
G- Afloat and ashore intermediate maintenance can remove, replace, and use the item
(Navy only).
K- Contractor facility can remove, replace, and use the item.
Z- Item is not authorized to be removed, replaced, or used at any maintenance level.
D- Depot can remove, replace, and use the item.
*NOTE - Army may use C in the third position. However, for joint service publications, Army will use O.
Fourth Position. The maintenance code entered in the fourth position tells you whether or not the item is to be
repaired and identifies the lowest maintenance level with the capability to do complete repair (perform all
authorized repair functions).
0043-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0043
NOTE
Some limited repair may be done on the item at a lower level of maintenance, if authorized by the
Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) and SMR codes.
Maintenance
F- Field is the lowest level that can do complete repair of the item.
H- Below Depot Sustainment is the lowest level that can do complete repair of the item.
L- Specialized repair activity is the lowest level that can do complete repair of the item.
D- Depot is the lowest level that can do complete repair of the item.
G- Both afloat and ashore intermediate levels are capable of complete repair of item. (Navy
only).
K- Complete repair is done at contractor facility.
Z- Nonreparable. No repair is authorized.
B- No repair is authorized. No parts or special tools are authorized for maintenance of "B"
coded item. However, the item may be reconditioned by adjusting, lubricating, etc. at the
user level.
Recoverability Code. Recoverability codes are assigned to items to indicate the disposition action on
unserviceable items. The recoverability code is shown in the fifth position of the SMR code as follows:
Recoverability
Z- Nonreparable item. When unserviceable, condemn and dispose of the item at the level of
maintenance shown in the third position of the SMR code.
F- Reparable item. When uneconomically reparable, condemn and dispose of the item at
the field level/ASB.
H- Reparable item. When uneconomically reparable, condemn and dispose of the item at
the below depot sustainment level.
D- Reparable item. When beyond lower level repair capability, return to depot.
Condemnation and disposal of item are not authorized below depot level.
L- Reparable item. Condemnation and disposal not authorized below Specialized repair
activity (SRA).
A- Item requires special handling or condemnation procedures because of specific reasons
(such as precious metal content, high dollar value, critical material, or hazardous
material). Refer to appropriate manuals/directives for specific instructions.
G- Field level reparable item. Condemn and dispose at either afloat or ashore intermediate
levels. (Navy only).
K- Reparable item. Condemnation and disposal to be performed at contractor facility.
NSN (Column (3)). The NSN for the item is listed in this column.
CAGEC (Column (4)). The CAGEC is a five-digit code which is used to identify the manufacturer, distributor, or
Government agency/activity that supplies the item.
PART NUMBER (Column (5)). Indicates the primary number used by the manufacturer (individual, company, firm,
corporation, or Government activity), which controls the design and characteristics of the item by means of its
engineering drawings, specifications, standards, and inspection requirements to identify an item or range of items.
0043-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0043
NOTE
When you use an NSN to requisition an item, the item you receive may have a different P/N from
the number listed.
DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE (UOC) (Column (6)). This column includes the following information:
1. The federal item name and, when required, a minimum description to identify the item.
2. P/Ns of bulk materials are referenced in this column in the line entry to be manufactured or fabricated.
3. Hardness Critical Item (HCI). A support item that provides the equipment with special protection from
Electromagnetic Pulse (EMP) damage during a nuclear attack.
4. The statement END OF FIGURE appears just below the last item description in column (6) for a given
figure in both the Repair Parts List and Special Tools List WPs.
QTY (Column (7)). The QTY (quantity per figure) column indicates the quantity of the item used in the breakout
shown on the illustration/figure, which is prepared for a functional group, subfunctional group, or an assembly. A
"V" appearing in this column instead of a quantity indicates that the quantity is variable and quantity may change
from application to application.
EXPLANATION OF CROSS-REFERENCE INDEXES WORK PACKAGES FORMAT AND COLUMNS
1. National Stock Number (NSN) Index Work Package. NSNs in this index are listed in National Item Identification
Number (NIIN) sequence.
STOCK NUMBER Column. This column lists the NSN in NIIN sequence. The NIIN consists of the last nine digits
of the NSN. When using this column to locate an item, ignore the first four digits of the NSN. However, the
complete NSN should be used when ordering items by stock number.
For example, if the NSN is 5385-01-574-1476, the NIIN is 01-574-1476.
FIG. Column. This column lists the number of the figure where the item is identified/located. The figures are in
numerical order in the Repair Parts List and Special Tools List WPs.
ITEM Column. The item number identifies the item associated with the figure listed in the adjacent FIG. column.
This item is also identified by the NSN listed on the same line.
2. Part Number (P/N) Index Work Package. P/Ns in this index are listed in ascending alphanumeric sequence
(vertical arrangement of letter and number combinations which places the first letter or digit of each group in order
A through Z, followed by the numbers 0 through 9 and each following letter or digit in like order).
PART NUMBER Column. Indicates the P/N assigned to the item.
FIG. Column. This column lists the number of the figure where the item is identified/located in the Repair Parts
List and Special Tools List WPs.
ITEM Column. The item number is the number assigned to the item as it appears in the figure referenced in the
adjacent figure number column.
SPECIAL INFORMATION
UOC. The UOC appears in the lower left corner of the Description Column heading. Usable on codes are shown
as "UOC:" in the Description Column (justified left) on the first line under the applicable item/nomenclature.
Uncoded items are applicable to all models. Identification of the UOCs used in the RPSTL are:
Code Used On
FZF Cargo Bed Cover, Type IVA1 Camouflage
FZG Cargo Bed Cover, Type IVA1 Sand
0043-5
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0043
Fabrication Instructions. Bulk materials required to manufacture items are listed in the bulk material functional
group of this RPSTL. P/Ns for bulk material are also referenced in the Description Column of the line item entry
for the item to be manufactured/fabricated. Detailed fabrication instructions for items source coded to be
manufactured or fabricated are found in (enter applicable TM number).
Index Numbers. Items which have the word BULK in the figure column will have an index number shown in the
item number column. This index number is a cross-reference between the National Stock Number (NSN) Index /
Part Number (P/N) Index WPs and the bulk material list in the Repair Parts List WP.
HOW TO LOCATE REPAIR PARTS
1. When NSNs or P/Ns Are Not Known.

First. Using the table of contents, determine the assembly group to which the item belongs. This is necessary
since figures are prepared for assembly groups and subassembly groups, and lists are divided into the same
groups.
Second. Find the figure covering the functional group or the subfunctional group to which the item belongs.
Third. Identify the item on the figure and note the number(s).
Fourth. Look in the Repair Parts List WPs for the figure and item numbers. The NSNs and P/Ns are on the same
line as the associated item numbers.
2. When NSN Is Known.
First. If you have the NSN, look in the STOCK NUMBER column of the National Stock Number (NSN) Index WP.
The NSN is arranged in NIIN sequence. Note the figure and item number next to the NSN.
Second. Turn to the figure and locate the item number. Verify that the item is the one you are looking for.
3. When P/N Is Known.
First. If you have the P/N and not the NSN, look in the PART NUMBER column of the Part Number (P/N) Index
WP. Identify the figure and item number.
Second. Look up the item on the figure in the applicable Repair Parts List WP.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0043-6
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0044
FIELD MAINTENANCE
CARGO BED COVER (CBC) TYPE IVA1
Figure 1. Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Type IVA1 (Sheet 1 of 2).
0044-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0044
5 6
Figure 1. Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Type IVA1 (Sheet 2 of 2).
0044-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0044
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
ITEM SMR NSN CAGEC PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION AND USABLE QTY
NO. CODE ON CODE (UOC)
GROUP 00
FIGURE 1. CARGO BED
COVER (CBC) TYPE IVA1
CBC IVA1 CAMOUFLAGE
1 PBFHH 5411-01-559-8738 29381 7045250-501 1
CBC IVA1 SAND

1 PBFHH 5411-01-559-8741 29381 7045250-502 1
.ASSEMBLY, TOP,
2 PBFFF 81337 17-1-0301 FOR BREAK DOWN 1
SEE FIGURE 2
PBFFF .DOOR ASSEMBLY,

3 29381 17-1-0247-1 PERSONNEL, 1
FOR BREAKDOWN
SEE FIGURE 4
PBFFF .ASSEMBLY, BOTTOM,

4 29381 7045204-501 FOR BREAK DOWN 1
SEE FIGURE 3
5 PAFFF 5411-01-595-4082 29381 7045248-501 .VEHICLE MOUNTING KIT 1

M923, 5 TON CARGO TRUCK
FOR BREAK DOWN
SEE FIGURE 6
PAFFF .VEHICLE MOUNTING KIT

6 5411-01-595-4058 29381 7045255-501 M1083, 5 TON MTV FOR 1
BREAK DOWN
SEE FIGURE 6
PAFFF .VEHICLE MOUNTING KIT

7 5411-01-595-4072 29381 7045256-501 M1095, 5 TON MTV TRAILER 1
FOR BREAK DOWN
SEE FIGURE 6
END OF FIGURE
0044-3/4 blank
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0045
FIELD MAINTENANCE
ASSEMBLY, TOP
3 4 5
2 7 8
1 6 3
2
2
6
4
6
3
17 18
13
16
18 9
17
13
16
14 12
10
15
11
Figure 2. Assembly, Top (Sheet 1 of 2).
0045-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0045
22 30
19 26
11 24
20 23
21
25
29
28
30 11
31 23
26
22
27
Figure 2. Assembly, Top (Sheet 2 of 2).
0045-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0045
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
GROUP 01
FIG. 2 ASSEMBLY, TOP
1 PAFZZ 3940-01-485-1651 81337 17-1-0206-1 .RING ASSEMBLY, LIFT 4
2 PAFZZ 5310-00-582-5677 80205 MS15795-810 .WASHER, FLAT (1/4) 40
3 PAFZZ 5310-00-933-8121 80205 MS35338-139 .WASHER, LOCK (1/4) 40
4 PAFZZ 5305-00-068-0508 80204 B1821BH025C075N .BOLT, MACHINE (1/4-20 X 40

0.75)
5 PAFZZ 5325-01-408-8466 78276 AKS4-420-165 .INSERT, SCREW THREAD 32
6 XDFZZ 0VK23 S25B2714-1 .INSERT, SCREW THREAD 16
7 PAFZZ 5340-01-440-4800 81337 17-1-8555-1 .HANDLE,BAIL 1
8 PAFZZ 5305-00-071-1316 96906 MS51957-80 .SCREW, MACHINE (1/4-20 X 6

.625)
9 PAFZZ 81337 17-1-0215-1 .FILTERING PAD, AIR 2

COOLER
10 XDFZZ 39428 91744A242 .THUMBSCREW (#10-24 X 1

0.5)
11 PAFZZ 5310-01-544-6555 80205 NASM35338-138 .WASHER, LOCK (#10) 16
12 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0246-5 .PLATE,SLIDE 1
13 XDFZZ 0VK23 S31B3090-1 .INSERT, SCREW THREAD 3
14 XDFZZ 5325-01-545-9937 78276 AKS4-518-150 .RECEPTACLE,GUIDE PIN 1

1.125)

1.00)
18 PAFZZ 5975-00-990-5354 19220 575709 .STEP, POLE 2
0045-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0045
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
20 PAFZZ 5310-00-167-0814 80205 NAS1149C0532R .WASHER, FLAT (21/64) 4
21 PAFZZ 5305-01-597-3338 39428 91259A576 .SCREW, SHOULDER 4
22 PAFZZ 3940-01-484-6758 81337 17-1-0120-1 .LOCKING ASSEMBLY, LIFT 2
23 PAFZZ 5310-00-619-1148 80205 MS15795-808 .WASHER, FLAT (#10) 12
24 PAFZZ 5305-00-050-9230 96906 MS51957-64 .SCREW, MACHINE (#10-24 8

X 0.63)
25 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0268-1 .ZEE, DOOR STORAGE 1
26 PAFZZ 3940-01-487-8687 81337 17-1-0120-2 .LOCKING ASSEMBLY, LIFT 2
27 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0269-1 .ZEE, DOOR STORAGE 1
28 PAFZZ 5305-00-050-9233 96906 MS51957-67 .SCREW, MACHINE (#10-24 6

X 1.00)
29 PAFZZ 5315-01-597-3356 39428 92390A180 .PIN, CLEVIS 4
30 PAFZZ 5315-01-538-8427 39428 92391A034 .PIN, COTTER 8
PAFZZ PIN, CLEVIS 4

31 5315-01-597-3347 39428 92390A169
END OF FIGURE
0045-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0046
FIELD MAINTENANCE
ASSEMBLY, BOTTOM
3
2
Figure 3. Assembly, Bottom (Exterior) (Sheet 1 of 4).
0046-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0046
27 5
27
5 23
22 DOOR
OPENING
21
10
5 28
27 10
25 9
8 7
20
10 6
16
26
18 11
24 12
19
15
17
16
15 14
13
Figure 3. Assembly, Bottom (Interior) (Sheet 2 of 4).
0046-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0046
30
31
29
32
33
35
10
34
9
Figure 3. Assembly, Bottom (Corner Assembly) (Sheet 3 of 4).
0046-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0046
22
36
37
38
39
37
36
40
41
42
43
Figure 3. Assembly, Bottom (Carrier Mounting Angle and Blockout Panel) (Sheet 4 of 4).
0046-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0046
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
GROUP 02
FIG. 3 ASSEMBLY, BOTTOM
7045203-501
1 PAFZZ 5975-00-990-5354 19220 575709 .STEP, POLE 1
SEE FIGURE 3 (SHEET 1 OF
4)
3 PAFZZ 5310-01-499-3569 12867 20487 .NUT, LOCK (5/16) 2
.BOLT, MACHINE (5/16-18 X 2

4 PAFZZ 5306-00-226-4829 80204 B1821BH031C125N
1.25)
.WIRE ROPE ASSEMBLY 3
5 XDFZZ 4010-01-485-1647 81337 17-1-0113-1
(50.00 IN. LG)
6 XDFZZ 29381 7045200-1 .ZEE, TIE DOWN, SIDE 2
.SCREW, CAP, HEX (3/8-16 X 4
7 PAFZZ 5305-00-068-0511 80204 B1821BH038C125N
1.25)
.WINCH, DRUM, HAND 1
8 PAFZZ 3950-01-485-1649 81337 17-1-0173-1
OPERATED
.WIRE ROPE ASSEMBLY (3- 1
9 PAFZZ 4010-01-485-1644 81337 17-1-0191-1
TAPS, 355.12 IN. LG)
.WIRE ROPE ASSEMBLY 1
10 PAFZZ 4010-01-542-3601 81337 17-1-0169-1
(62.44 IN. LG)
.NUT, SELF-LOCKING (3/8- 4
11 PAFZZ 5310-01-475-9244 39428 91831A127
16)
.HANDLE, SOCKET WRENCH 1

13 PAFZZ 5120-00-230-6385 39428 7199A11
.SCREW, MACHINE (#10-32 4

14 PAFZZ 5305-00-059-3660 80205 MS51958-64
X 0.63)
.SCREW, PAN HD (#8-32 X 4

16 PAFZZ 5305-00-050-9230 96906 MS51957-64
0.63)
17 PAFZZ 5310-00-933-8120 80205 MS35338-138 .LOCKWASHER (#8) 2
19 PAFZZ 3950-01-484-6763 81337 17-1-0307-2 .COVER ASSEMBLY, WINCH 1

20 PAFZZ 3950-01-484-6762 81337 17-1-0307-1 .COVER ASSEMBLY, WINCH 1
0046-5
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0046
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
21 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0235-1 .ANGLE, MOUNTING 1
22 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0210-1 .ANGLE, TIE DOWN, FWD 1

END
4)
23 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0235-2 .ANGLE, MOUNTING 1
24 PAFZZ 1640-00-435-9371 96906 MS21251-A5L .TURNBUCKLE BODY 3
25 PAFZZ 1640-00-010-3090 96906 MS21256-2 .LOCKING CLIP 6
26 PAFZZ 5310-00-933-8119 80205 MS35338-137 .WASHER, LOCK 2
ASSEMBLY, CORNER 3
27 XDFZZ 29381 7048464-501
FITTING
28 XDFZZ 29381 7048466-501 .ASSEMBLY, CORNER 1

FITTING FOR BREAK DOWN
4)
29 XDFZZ 29381 7048465-501 ..RETAINER WELDMENT 1
30 PAFZZ 5305-00-889-2991 80205 MS24693C48 ..SCREW, MACHINE 1
31 PAFZZ 5305-00-057-0495 80205 MS24694S11 ..SCREW, MACHINE 1
32 XDFZZ 29381 17-1-0305-2 ..SPACER, CORNER FITTING 1
33 XDFZZ 29381 17-1-0089-1 ..PULLEY (1.50 DIA) 1
34 PAFZZ 5310-00-811-3494 80205 MS21044N08 ..NUT, SELF-LOCKING 1
35 XDFZZ 29381 17-1-0194-1 ..PULLEY (1.00DIA) 1
36 PAFZZ 5310-00-582-5677 80205 MS15795-810 WASHER, FLAT 13
37 PAFZZ 5310-00-933-8121 80205 MS35338-139 WASHER, LOCK 13
38 PAFZZ 5305-00-068-0508 80204 B1821BH025C075N BOLT MACHINE 13
39 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0106-2 COVER, BLOCKOUT 2
40 PAFZZ 5310-00-933-8120 80205 MS35338-138 WASHER, LOCK 8
41 PAFZZ 5305-00-984-6212 80205 MS35206-265 SCREW, MACHINE 8
42 PAFZZ 5310-00-167-0834 80205 NAS1149F0332P WASHER, FLAT 8
END OF FIGURE
0046-6
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0047
FIELD MAINTENANCE
ASSEMBLY, DOOR, PERSONNEL
1
2 5
19 4
18
3
17 16
14
13 15
6
7
16
15 8
9
14
13 10
12
11
20
21
29
15
30
28 31
22
32
34
27 23
33
26
24 31
25
Figure 4. Assembly, Door, Personnel (Sheet 1 of 2).
0047-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0047
35
36
37
42
39 38
39
40
43
46
41
36
45
42
36
42
20 44 43
39
46
Figure 4. Assembly, Door, Personnel (Sheet 2 of 2).
0047-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0047
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
GROUP 03
FIG. 4 ASSEMBLY, DOOR
PERSONNEL
17-1-0247-1
1 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0283 .HINGE 2
2 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0247-3 .WASHER, FLAT 2
3 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0247-2 .WASHER, FLAT 4
4 PAFZZ 5340-01-485-1650 81337 17-1-0291-1 .DOOR ACCESS (UPPER), 1

GENERAL PURPOSE
5 PAFZZ 5340-01-486-1343 81337 17-1-0171-1 .DOOR HOLDER ASSEMBLY 1

SEE FIGURE 4 (SHEET 2 OF 2)
FOR BREAK OUT
6 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0042-3 .SEAL, WEATHER – TOP 1

SECTION
7 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0042-4 .SEAL, WEATHER – BOTTOM 2

SECTION
8 PAFZZ 5340-01-485-8345 81337 17-1-0292-1 .DOOR ACCESS (LOWER), 1

GENERAL PURPOSE
9 PAFZZ 5320-00-097-6520 07707 AD55H .RIVET, BLIND 22
10 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0281-1 .RETAINER 1
11 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0288-1 .RAIN GUARD 1
12 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0245-1 .HINGE ASSEMBLY – BOTTOM 1

DOOR
13 PAFZZ 5306-00-226-4826 80204 B1821BH031C088N .BOLT, MACHINE 3
14 PAFZZ 5306-00-226-4827 80204 B1821BH031C100N .BOLT,MACHINE 3
16 PAFZZ 5310-01-389-6965 80205 MS15795-812 .WASHER, FLAT 5/16 6
17 PAFZZ 5305-00-068-0510 80204 B1821BH038C100N .BOLT, MACHINE 4
19 PAFZZ 5310-00-773-7618 80205 MS15795-814 .WASHER, FLAT 4
20 PAFZZ 5315-01-538-8427 39428 92391A034 ..PIN,COTTER 3
21 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0285-2 .ROD, DOOR LATCH, BOTTOM 1
0047-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0047
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
ITEM SMR NSN CAGEC PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON QTY
NO. CODE CODE (UOC)
22 PAFZZ 5355-01-242-0028 99862 CL-3A-HK2T .KNOB 3
23 XDFZZ 27182 311/105 .HANDLE, DOOR, INSIDE 1
24 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0285-2 .ROD, DOOR LATCH, BOTTOM 1
25 PAFZZ 5310-01-416-1851 39428 91831A029 .NUT,SELF-LOCKING, HEXAGON 4
26 PAFZZ 5310-00-582-5677 80205 MS15795-810 WASHER, FLAT 4
27 XDFZZ 27182 107 CENTER CONTROL 1
28 PAFZZ 5305-00-071-2511 80204 B1821BH025C200N SCREW, CAP, HEX HEAD 4
29 PAFZZ 5340-01-484-6760 81337 17-1-0290-1 .HANDLE, DOOR 1
30 PAFZZ 80205 NASM970-3 .WASHER, FLAT 1
31 PAFZZ 5310-01-544-6555 80205 NASM35338-138 .WASHER, LOCK 16
32 PAFZZ 5305-00-050-9230 96906 MS51957-64 .SCREW, PAN HEAD 12
33 PAFZZ 2540-00-421-1520 27182 105 .LOCK ASSEMBLY, DOOR 4
34 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0296-1 .STRAP HANDLE, UPPER DOOR 1
35 PAFZZ 5306-00-275-9688 88044 AN6C11 ..BOLT, MACHINE 1
36 PAFZZ 5310-01-773-7618 80205 MS15795-814 ..WASHER, FLAT 3
37 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0263 ..BAR, DOOR HOLDER 1
38 PAFZZ 5310-01-463-4929 39428 91831A011 ..NUT, SELF LOCKING 2
39 PAFZZ 5310-00-933-8120 80205 MS15795-808 ..WASHER, FLAT 6
40 PAFZZ 5315-01-355-1107 39428 92390A269 ..PIN, STRAIGHT HEADED 1
41 PAFZZ 5315-00-234-1863 80205 NASM24665-300 ..PIN,COTTER 1
42 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0263-2 ..DOOR HOLDER DETAILS 3
43 PAFZZ 5305-00-984-6212 80205 MS35206-265 ..SCREW, MACHINE 4
44 PAFZZ 5310-00-582-6058 88044 AN310-6 ..NUT, PLAIN, CASTELLATED 1
45 PAFZZ 5305-00-984-6218 80205 MS35206-271 ..SCREW, MACHINE 2
46 PAFZZ 5310-00-933-8120 80205 MS35338-138 ..WASHER, LOCK 4
END OF FIGURE
0047-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0048
FIELD MAINTENANCE
MOUNTING KIT, M923, 5 TON CARGO TRUCK
0048-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0048
6
4
7 thru 16
3
2
2
1
1
17
2
1
13
11 8
14
16
7
12
8
11
15
10
11 9
10
Figure 5. Mounting Kit, M923, 5 Ton Cargo Truck.
0048-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0048
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
GROUP 04
FIG. 5 MOUNTING KIT,
M923, 5 TON CARGO
TRUCK
7045248-501
.BOLT, MACHINE (5/16-18 12

3 PAFZZ 5306-00-226-4828 80204 B1821BH031C113N
X 1.125)

4 PAFZZ 5306-00-226-4830 80204 B1821BH031C138N
X 1.375)
5 PAFZZ 5310-00-952-3628 03481 S31B200 .NUT, PLAIN, BLIND RIVET 19
.LADDER, VEHICLE 1
6 PAFFF 81337 17-1-0315-7
BOARDING
7 PAFZZ 5340-01-486-3213 81337 17-1-0315-5 ..BRACKET, ANGLE 1
.. NUT, PLAIN, BLIND 10

8 PAFZZ 5310-00-763-0349 96906 MS27131-51
RIVET (1/4-20)…
10 PAFZZ 5310-00-933-8121 80205 MS35338-139 ..WASHER, LOCK (1/4) 8
..SCREW, CAP, HEX HD 10

11 PAFZZ 5305-00-068-0508 80204 B1821BH025C075N
(1/4-20 X .75 LG)
..LADDER VEHICLE 1
12 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0323-1
BOARDING
13 PAFZZ 5310-00-167-0766 80204 AN970-4 ..WASHER, FLAT (1/4) 4
14 PAFZZ 5340-01-440-1182 81337 17-1-3618-1 ..STRAP, WEBBING 2

17 PAFZZ 5306-00-226-4827 80204 B1821BH031C100N
X 1.00)
END OF FIGURE
0048-3/4 blank
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0049
FIELD MAINTENANCE
MOUNTING KIT, M1083, 5 TON MTV
0049-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0049
3
2 3
1
4
26
1
4
9
5
2 6
1 25
24
23
17
22 7
1
21
8
20
19 15 9
18 17 14 10
16 11
13
12
Figure 6. Mounting Kit, M1083, 5 Ton MTV.
0049-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0049
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
ITEM SMR NSN CAGEC PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION AND QTY

NO. CODE USABLE ON CODE (UOC)
GROUP 05
FIG. 6 MOUNTING KIT,
M1083, 5 TON MTV
7045255-501
3 PAFZZ 5310-01-524-7436 39428 95462A030 .NUT, PLAIN, HEX (5/16-18) 28
.BOLT, CARRIAGE (5/16-18 x 24

4 PAFZZ 5306-01-552-8677 39428 90185A583
1.00)
5 XDFZZ 29381 7045207-1 .PLATE, FWD END 1
6 XDFZZ 29381 7045220-1 .PLATE, SIDE 2
.NUT, SELF-LOCKING HEX 8

7 PAFZZ 5310-00-982-6816 80205 MS21044C5
(5/16-24)
8 XDFZZ 29381 7045205-1 .CHANNEL, MOUNTING 2
9 PAFZZ 5305-00-071-2081 80204 BN1821BH050C450N .BOLT (1/2-13 x 4.50) 4
.MOUNTING DETAILS, 2
10 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0314-2
SPACER
11 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0327-1 .CLAMP PLATE ASSEMBLY 2
.NUT, SELF-LOCKING, HEX 4

13 PAFZZ 5310-01-533-0511 39428 97135A250
(1/2)
.SCREW, MACHINE (5/16-24 4

14 PAFZZ 5305-00-781-6739 80205 MS24694C152
x 1.28)
15 XDFZZ 29381 6039017-1 .PLATE, MOUNTING PART OF 2
0049-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0049
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
16 PAFZZ 5305-01-533-3383 3A054 92865A632 .SCREW CAP, HEX HEAD 4

(3/8-16 X 2.00)
19 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0237-1 .PLATE,BOTTOM 4
20 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0197-1 .POST, TIE DOWN 4
21 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0313-1 .PLATE,SPACER 4
22 PAFZZ 5310-00-167-0767 80205 AN970-5 .WASHER, FLAT (5/16) 16
23 PAFZZ 5306-01-533-5601 39428 92865A589 .BOLT, MACHINE (5/16-18 X 8

1.75)
24 XDFZZ 29381 7045208-501 .PLATE, AFT END-DOOR 1
25 PAFZZ 5306-01-597-3318 39428 90185A589 .BOLT, CARRIAGE (5/16-18 x 4

1.25)
26 XDFZZ 39428 90272A580 .SCREW, PAN HEAD (5/16- 3

18x0.63)
END OF FIGURE
0049-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0050
FIELD MAINTENANCE
M1095, 5 TON MTV TRAILER MOUNTING KIT
0050-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0050
8
8
2
1
2
10
1
5
6
9
9
11
3 4 1
2 12
13
7
2
1
8
25
24
14
15
8
11
16
17
23
22 18
19
21 20
Figure 7. M1095, 5 Ton MTV Trailer Mounting Kit.
0050-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0050
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
NO. CODE CODE (UOC)
GROUP 06
FIG. 7 M1095, 5 TON MTV TRAILER
MOUNTING KIT
7045256-501
3 XDFZZ 39428 90272A580 .SCREW, PH (5/16-18 × .63) 3
4 XDFZZ 29381 7045220-1 .PLATE, SIDE 2
5 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0316-2 .BRACKET, LEFT 1
6 XDFZZ 29381 7045213-1 .PLATE, FWD END 1
7 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0316-3 .BRACKET, RIGHT 1
8 PAFZZ 5310-01-524-7436 39428 95462A030 .NUT (5/16-18) 28
9 XDFZZ 81346 B1821BH044C700N .BOLT (7/16-20 × 7.00 LG.) 2
10 PAFZZ 5306-01-552-8677 39428 90185A583 .BOLT, SQUARE NECK (5/16-18 × 24

1.00)
11 PAFZZ 5310-00-982-6816 80205 MS21044-C5 .NUT, SELF LOCKING, HEX (5/16-24) 14
13 PAFZZ 5310-00-225-6190 80205 MS21044C7 .NUT, LOCK (7/16-20) 2
14 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0316-4 .SPACER PLATE 2
15 PAFZZ 5305-00-781-6735 80205 MS24694-C148 .SCREW, MACHINE (5/16-24 × 1.03) 6
16 XDFZZ 29381 7045205-1 .CHANNEL, BRACKET 2
17 PAFZZ 5305-00-071-2081 80204 B1821BH050C450N .BOLT (1/2-13 × 4.50) 4
0050-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0050
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
NO. CODE CODE (UOC)
18 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0314-2 .SPACER 2
19 XDFZZ 81337 17-1-0327-1 .CLAMP PLATE/SEAL ASSEMBLY 2
21 PAFZZ 5310-01-533-0511 39428 97135A250 .NUT (1/2). 4
22 PAFZZ 5305-00-781-6739 80205 MS24694C152 .SCREW, MACHINE (5/16-24 × 1.28) 8
23 XDFZZ 29381 6039017-1 .PLATE, MOUNTING 2
24 XDFZZ 29381 7045214-501 .PLATE, AFT END-DOOR 1
25 PAFZZ 5306-01-597-3318 39428 90185A589 .BOLT, CARRIAGE (5/16-18 × 1.25) 4
END OF FIGURE
0050-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0051
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER INDEX
NATIONAL STOCK FIGURE ITEM NATIONAL STOCK FIGURE ITEM

NUMBER NUMBER
5305-00-050-9230 4 32 2540-00-421-1520 4 33
3 16 1640-00-435-9371 3 24
2 25 5310-00-582-5677 2 2
5305-00-050-9233 2 29 3 36
5305-00-057-0495 3 31 4 26
5305-00-059-3660 3 14 5310-00-582-6058 4 44
5305-00-068-0508 2 4 5310-00-619-1148 2 24
3 38 3 15
5 11 4 39
5305-00-068-0510 4 17 5310-00-763-0349 5 8
5305-00-068-0511 3 7 5310-00-767-9425 6 12
5305-00-071-1316 2 8 7 20
5305-00-071-2081 7 17 5310-00-773-7618 2 20
6 9 4 19
5305-00-071-2511 4 28 4 36
5320-00-097-6520 4 9 5305-00-781-6735 7 15
5310-00-167-0766 5 13 5305-00-781-6739 6 14
5310-00-167-0767 6 22 7 22
5310-00-167-0814 2 21 5310-00-811-3494 3 34
5310-00-167-0834 3 42 5310-00-880-5977 5 1
5310-00-184-8628 7 12 5310-00-880-5978 3 18
5310-00-225-6190 7 13 5305-00-889-2991 3 30
5306-00-226-4826 4 13 5310-00-933-8119 3 26
5306-00-226-4827 2 16 5310-00-933-8120 3 17
2 4 3 40
4 14 4 46
5 17 5310-00-933-8121 2 3
5306-00-226-4828 5 3 3 37
2 15 5 10
5306-00-226-4829 3 4 5310-00-952-3628 5 5
5306-00-226-4830 5 4 5310-00-974-6623 4 15
5120-00-230-6385 3 13 5 2
5315-00-234-1863 4 41 7 2
5306-00-275-9688 4 35 6 2
5310-00-407-9566 2 17 5310-00-982-6816 6 7
0051-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0051
NATIONAL STOCK FIGURE ITEM NATIONAL STOCK FIGURE ITEM

NUMBER NUMBER
5310-00-982-6816 7 11 5340-01-486-0256 5 15
5305-00-984-6212 3 41 5340-01-486-0257 5 9
4 43 5340-01-486-1343 4 5
5305-00-984-6218 4 45 5340-01-486-3212 5 16
5310-00-984-7042 4 18 5340-01-486-3213 5 7
6 17 3940-01-487-8687 2 27
5975-00-990-5354 5310-01-499-3569 3 3
2 18
5310-01-524-7436 6 3
3 1
7 8
5310-01-533-0511 6 13
5355-01-242-0028 4 22
7 21
5315-01-355-1107 4 40
5305-01-533-3383 6 16
5310-01-389-6965 3 2
5306-01-533-5601 6 23
4 16
5315-01-538-8427 2 31
6 1
4 20
7 1
4010-01-542-3601 3 10
5310-01-389-7014 3 12
5310-01-544-6555 2 11
5310-01-389-7976 6 18
4 31
5325-01-545-9937 2 14
5325-01-408-8466 2 5
5306-01-552-8677 6 4
5310-01-416-1851 4 25
7 10
5411-01-595-4074 1 7
5340-01-440-1182 5 14
5411-01-595-4078 1 6
5340-01-440-4800 2 7
5411-01-595-4090 1 5
5310-01-463-4929 4 38
5305-01-597-3338 2 22
5310-01-475-9244 3 11
5305-01-597-3347 2 32
3940-01-484-6758 2 23
5305-01-597-3356 2 30
5340-01-484-6760 4 29
5306-01-597-3318 6 25
3950-01-484-6762 3 20
5411-01-559-8739 1 1
3950-01-484-6763 3 19
5411-01-559-8740 1 1
4010-01-485-1644 3 9
4010-01-485-1647 3 5
3950-01-485-1649 3 8
5340-01-485-1650 4 4
3940-01-485-1651 2 1
2540-01-485-1653 5 6
5340-01-485-8345 4 8
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0051-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0052
FIELD MAINTENANCE
PART NUMBER INDEX
PART NUMBER FIGURE ITEM PART NUMBER FIGURE ITEM

AD55H 4 9 MS15795-812 4 16
AKS4-420-165 2 5 6 1
AKS4-518-150 2 14 7 1
AN310-6 4 44 MS15795-813 3 12
AN6C11 4 35 MS15795-814 4 19
AN970-4 5 13 4 36
AN970-5 6 22 6 18
B1821BH025C075N 2 4 2 19
3 38 MS15795-816 7 12
5 11 MS15795-818 6 12
B1821BH025C200N 4 28 7 20
B1821BH031C088N 4 13 MS21044C5 6 7
B1821BH031C100N 2 16 7 11
4 14 MS21044C7 7 13
5 17 MS21044N08 3 34
B1821BH031C113N 2 15 MS21251-A5L 3 24
5 3 MS21256-2 3 25
B1821BH031C125N 3 4 MS24693C48 3 30
B1821BH031C138N 5 4 MS24694S11 3 31
B1821BH038C100N 4 17 MS24694C148 7 15
B1821BH038C125N 3 7 MS24694C152 6 14
B1821BH044C700N 7 9 7 22
B1821BH050C450N 6 9 MS27131-51 5 8
7 17 MS35206-265 3 41
CL-3A-HK2T 4 22 4 43
MS15795-807 3 18 MS35206-271 4 45
MS15795-808 2 23 MS35338-45 2 17
3 15 MS35338-137 3 26
4 39 MS35338-138 3 17
MS15795-810 2 2 3 40
3 36 4 46
4 26 MS35338-139 2 3
MS15795-811 5 1 3 37
MS15795-812 3 2 5 10
0052-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0052

MS35338-140 5 2 17-1-0215-1 2 9
4 15 17-1-0235-1 3 21
6 2 17-1-0235-2 3 23
7 2 17-1-0237-1 6 19
MS35338-141 4 18 17-1-0245-1 4 12
6 17 17-1-0246-5 2 12
MS35338-45 2 17 17-1-0247-1 1 3
MS51957-64 3 16 17-1-0247-2 4 3
2 24 17-1-0247-3 4 2
4 32 17-1-0259-1 1 2
MS51957-67 2 28 17-1-0263-1 4 37
MS51957-80 2 8 17-1-0263-2 4 42
MS51958-64 3 14 17-1-0268-1 2 25
NASM24665-300 4 41 17-1-0269-1 2 27
NASM35338-138 2 11 17-1-0281-1 4 10
4 31 17-1-0283 4 1
NASM970-3 4 30 17-1-0285-2 4 21
NAS1149C0532R 2 20 17-1-0288-1 4 11
NAS1149F0332P 3 42 17-1-0290-1 4 29
S25B2714-1 2 6 17-1-0291-1 4 4
S31B200 5 5 17-1-0292-1 4 8
S31B3090-1 2 13 17-1-0296-1 4 34
105 4 33 17-1-0305-2 3 32
107 4 27 17-1-0307-1 3 20
17-1-0042-3 4 6 17-1-0307-2 3 19
17-1-0042-4 4 7 17-1-0313-1 6 21
17-1-0089-1 3 33 17-1-0314-2 6 10
17-1-0106-2 3 39 7 18
17-1-0113-1 3 5 17-1-0315-1 5 6
17-1-0120-1 2 22 17-1-0315-2 5 15
17-1-0120-2 2 26 17-1-0315-3 5 9
17-1-0169-1 3 10 17-1-0315-4 5 16
17-1-0171-1 4 5 17-1-0315-5 5 7
17-1-0173-1 3 8 17-1-0316-2 7 5
17-1-0191-1 3 9 17-1-0316-3 7 7
17-1-0194-1 3 35 17-1-0316-4 7 14
17-1-0197-1 6 20 17-1-0323-1 5 12
17-1-0206-1 2 1 17-1-0327-1 6 11
17-1-0210-1 3 22 7 19
0052-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0052

17-1-3618-1 5 14 91831A127 3 11
17-1-8555-1 2 7 92390A169 2 30
20487 3 3 92390A180 2 29
311/105 4 23 92390A269 4 40
575709 2 18 92391A034 2 31
3 1 4 20
6039017-1 6 15 92865A589 6 23
7 23 92865A632 6 16
7045199-1 3 6 95462A030 6 3
7045204-501 1 4 7 8
7045205-1 6 8 97135A250 6 13
7 16 7 21
7045207-1 6 5
7045208-501 6 24
7 24
7045213-1 7 6
7045214-501 7 24
7045221-1 6 6
7 4
7045247-501 1 5
7045249-501 1 1
7045249-502 1 1
7045253-501 1 6
7045254-501 1 7
7048464-501 3 27
7048465-501 3 29
7048466-501 3 28
7199A11 3 13
90185A583 6 4
7 10
90185A589 6 25
7 25
90272A580 6 26
7 3
91259A576 2 21
91744A242 2 10
91831A011 4 38
91831A029 4 25
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0052-3/4 blank
CHAPTER 7
SUPPORTING INFORMATION
FOR
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0053

REFERENCES
SCOPE
This Work Package lists all field manuals, forms, technical manuals, and miscellaneous publications referenced in
this manual.
PAMPHLETS
The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual ................................ DA Pam 750-8
FIELD MANUALS
Basic Cold Weather Manual............................................................................................................. FM 31-70

First Aid ......................................................................................................................................... FM 4-25.11
Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear
Decontamination ............................................................................................................................. FM 3-11.5
Mountain Operations ....................................................................................................................... FM 3-97.6
Northern Operations......................................................................................................................... FM 31-71
Packing of Materiel for Packing ..................................................................................................... FM 38-701
FORMS
Transportation Discrepancy Report (TDR) ............................................................................... DD Form 361

Equipment Control Record ................................................................................................... DA Form 2408-9
Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet ...............................................................DA Form 2404
Equipment Inspection Maintenance Worksheet (EGA) ....................................................... DA Form 5988-E
Product Quality Deficiency Report ...................................................................................................... SF 368
Recommended Changes to Equipment Technical Publications ………………………….......DA Form 2028-2
Report of Discrepancy (ROD) ............................................................................................................ SF 364
TECHNICAL MANUALS
Operator’s Field Level Manual for the M1095 Series 5 Ton Medium Tactical Vehicle Trailer (MTVT) and the
M1082 Series 2-1/2 Ton Light Tactical Vehicle Trailer (LMTV) Manual TM 9-2330-394-13&P
Operator’s Instructions Manual for M1083 Series, 5-Ton, 6X6, Medium Tactical Vehicles (MTV)
Volume 1 of 2) ....................................................................... TM 9-2320-366-10-1 and TM 9-2320-366-10-2
Operator’s Manual for Truck, 5-Ton, 6X6, M939, M939A1, and M939 Series Trucks (Diesel), Truck, Cargo: 5-
Ton, 6X6 Dropside, M923 (2320-01-0505-2084) .............................................................. TM 9-2320-272-10
0053-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0053
REFERENCES - Continued.
Operator’s Field Level Manual for the M1082 Series, 2-1/2 Ton Light Tactical Vehicle Trailer (LMTVT) Model
1082, (NSN 2330-01-449-1775) (EIC: CMN) and the M1095 Series , 5 Ton Medium Tactical Vehicle Trailer
(MTVT) Model 1095 (NSN 2330-01-449-1776) (EIC: CPK)
Procedures for Destruction of Equipment to Prevent Enemy Use (Mobility Equipment Command)
................................................................................................................................................. TM 750-244-3
MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS
Army Medical Department Expendable/Durable Items ..................................................................CTA 8-100

Expendable/Durable Items (Except Medical, Class V, Repair Parts, and Heraldic Items) ......... CTA 50-970
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0053-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0054

MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (MAC) INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
The Army Maintenance System MAC
This introduction provides a general explanation of all maintenance and repair functions authorized at the two
maintenance levels under the Two-Level Maintenance System concept.
This MAC (immediately following the introduction) designates overall authority and responsibility for the
performance of maintenance functions on the identified end item or component. The application of the
maintenance functions to the end item or component shall be consistent with the capacities and capabilities of the
designated maintenance levels, which are shown on the MAC in column (4) as:
Field - includes two subcolumns, Crew (C), and Maintainer (F).
Sustainment – includes two subcolumns, Below Depot (H) and Depot (D).
The maintenance to be performed below depot and in the field is described as follows:
1. Crew maintenance. The responsibility of a using organization to perform maintenance on its assigned
equipment. It normally consists of inspecting, servicing, lubricating, adjusting, and replacing parts, minor
assemblies, and subassemblies. The replace function for this level of maintenance is indicated by the
letter “C” in the third position of the SMR code. A “C” appearing in the fourth position of the SMR code
indicates complete repair is possible at the service maintenance level.
2. Maintainer maintenance. Maintenance accomplished on a component, accessory, assembly,
subassembly, plug-in unit, or other portion either on the system or after it is removed. The replace
function for this level of maintenance is indicated by the letter “F” appearing in the third position of the
SMR code. An “F” appearing in the fourth position of the SMR code indicates complete repair is possible
at the field maintenance level. Items are returned to the user after maintenance is performed at this level.
3. Below depot sustainment. Maintenance accomplished on a component, accessory, assembly,
subassembly, plug-in unit, or other portion either on the system or after it is removed. The replace
function for this level of maintenance is indicated by the letter “H” in the third position of the SMR code.
An “H” appearing in the fourth position of the SMR code indicates complete repair is possible at the below
depot sustainment maintenance level. Items are returned to the supply system after maintenance is
performed at this level.
4. Depot Sustainment. Maintenance accomplished on a component, accessory, assembly, subassembly,
plug-in unit, or other portion either on the system or after it is removed. The replace function for this level
of maintenance is indicated by the letter “D” or “K” appearing in the third position of the SMR code. Depot
sustainment maintenance can be performed by either depot personnel or contractor personnel. A “D” or
“K” appearing in the fourth position of the SMR code indicates complete repair is possible at the depot
sustainment maintenance level. Items are returned to the supply systems after maintenance is performed
at this level.
The tools and test equipment requirements (immediately following the MAC) list the tools and test equipment
(both special tools and common tool sets) required for each maintenance function as referenced from the MAC.
The remarks (immediately following the tools and test equipment requirements) contain supplemental instructions
and explanatory notes for a particular maintenance function.
0054-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0054
Maintenance Functions
Maintenance functions will be limited to and are defined as follows:
1. Inspect. To determine the serviceability of an item by comparing its physical, mechanical, and/or electrical
characteristics with established standards through examination (e.g., by sight, sound, or feel). This includes
scheduled inspection, gauging, and evaluation of cannon tubes.
2. Test. To verify serviceability by measuring the mechanical, pneumatic, hydraulic, or electrical characteristics
of an item and comparing those characteristics with prescribed standards on a scheduled basis, i.e., load testing
of lift devices and hydrostatic testing of pressure hoses.
3. Service. Operations required periodically to keep an item in proper operating condition; e.g., to clean
(includes decontaminate, when required), to preserve, to drain, to paint, or to replenish fuel, lubricants, chemical
fluids, or gases. This includes scheduled exercising and purging of recoil mechanisms. The following are
examples of service functions:
a. Unpack. To remove from packing box for service or when required for the performance of maintenance
operations.
b. Repack. To return item to packing box after service and other maintenance operations.
c. Clean. To rid the item of contamination.
d. Touch up. To spot paint scratched or blistered surfaces.
e. Mark. To restore obliterated identification.
4. Adjust. To maintain or regulate, within prescribed limits, by bringing into proper or exact position, or by setting
the operating characteristics to specified parameters.
5. Align. To adjust specified variable elements of an item to bring about optimum or desired performance.
6. Calibrate. To determine and cause corrections to be made, or to be adjusted on instruments of test,
measuring, and diagnostic equipment used in precision measurement. Consists of comparisons of two
instruments, one of which is a certified standard of known accuracy, to detect and adjust any discrepancy in the
accuracy of the instrument being compared.
7. Remove/Install. To remove and install the same item when required to perform service or other maintenance
functions. Install may be the act of emplacing, seating, or fixing into position a spare, repair part, or module
(component or assembly) in a manner to allow the proper functioning of an equipment or system.
8. Paint. (ammunition only). To prepare and spray color coats of paint so that the ammunition can be identified
and protected. The color indicating primary use is applied, preferably, to the entire exterior surface as the
background color of the item. Other markings are to be repainted as original so as to retain proper ammunition
identification.
9. Replace. To remove an unserviceable item and install a serviceable counterpart in its place. “Replace” is
authorized by the MAC and assigned maintenance level is shown as the third position code of the Source,
Maintenance and Recoverability (SMR) code.
10. Repair. The application of maintenance services, including fault location/troubleshooting, removal/installation,
disassembly/assembly procedures and maintenance actions to identify troubles and restore serviceability to an
item by correcting specific damage, fault, malfunction, or failure in a part, subassembly, module (component or
assembly), end item, or system.
0054-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0054
Maintenance Functions - Continued.
NOTE
The following definitions are applicable to the “repair” maintenance function:
Services. Inspect, test, service, adjust, align, calibrate, and/or replace.
Fault location/troubleshooting. The process of investigating and detecting the

cause of equipment malfunctioning; the act of isolating a fault within a system
or Unit Under Test (UUT).
Disassembly/assembly. The step-by-step breakdown (taking apart) of a

spare/functional group coded item to the level of its least component, that is
assigned an SMR code for the level of maintenance under consideration (i.e.,
identified as maintenance significant).
Actions. Welding, grinding, riveting, straightening, facing, machining, and/or

resurfacing.
11. Overhaul. That maintenance effort (service/action) prescribed to restore an item to a completely
serviceable/operational condition as required by maintenance standards in appropriate technical publications.
Overhaul is normally the highest degree of maintenance performed by the Army. Overhaul does not normally
return an item to like new condition.
12. Rebuild. Consists of those services/actions necessary for the restoration of unserviceable equipment to a like
new condition in accordance with original manufacturing standards. Rebuild is the highest degree of material
maintenance applied to Army equipment. The rebuild operation includes the act of returning to zero those age
measurements (hours/miles, etc.) considered in classifying Army equipment/components.
Explanation of Columns in the MAC
Column (1) Group Number. Column (1) lists Functional Group Code (FGC) numbers, the purpose of which is to
identify maintenance significant components, assemblies, subassemblies, and modules with the Next Higher
Assembly (NHA).
Column (2) Component/Assembly. Column (2) contains the names of components, assemblies, subassemblies,
and modules for which maintenance is authorized.
Column (3) Maintenance Function. Column (3) lists the functions to be performed on the item listed in column (2).
(For detailed explanation of these functions refer to “Maintenance Functions” outlined above).
Column (4) Maintenance Level. Column (4) specifies each level of maintenance authorized to perform each
function listed in column (3), by indicating work time required (expressed as man-hours in whole hours or
decimals) in the appropriate sub-column. This work time figure represents the active time required to perform that
maintenance function at the indicated level of maintenance. If the number or complexity of the tasks within the
listed maintenance function varies at different maintenance levels, appropriate work time figures are to be shown
for each level. The work time figure represents the average time required to restore an item (assembly,
subassembly, component, module, end item, or system) to a serviceable condition under typical field operating
conditions. This time includes preparation time (including any necessary disassembly/assembly time),
troubleshooting/fault location time, and quality assurance time in addition to the time required to perform the
specific tasks identified for the maintenance functions authorized in the MAC. The system designations for the
various maintenance levels are as follows:
0054-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0054
Maintenance Functions – Continued.
Field:
C Crew maintenance
F Maintainer maintenance
Sustainment:
L Specialized Repair Activity (SRA)
H Below depot maintenance
D Depot maintenance
NOTE
The “L” maintenance level is not included in column (4) of the MAC. Functions to this level of
maintenance are identified by work time figure in the “H” column of column (4), and an associated
reference code is used in the REMARKS column (6). This code is keyed to the remarks and the
SRA complete repair application is explained there.
Column (5) Tools and Equipment Reference Code. Column (5) specifies, by code, those common tool sets (not
individual tools), common Test, Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment (TMDE), and special tools, special
TMDE, and support equipment required to perform the designated function. Codes are keyed to the entries in the
tools and test equipment table.
Column (6) Remarks Code. When applicable, this column contains a letter code, in alphabetic order, which is
keyed to the remarks table entries.
Explanation of Columns in the Tools and Test Equipment Requirements
Column (1) - Tool or Test Equipment Reference Code. The tool or test equipment reference code correlates with
a code used in column (5) of the MAC.
Column (2) - Maintenance Level. The lowest level of maintenance authorized to use the tool or test equipment.
Column (3) - Nomenclature. Name or identification of tool or test equipment.
Column (4) - National Stock Number (NSN). The NSN of the tool or test equipment.
Column (5) - Tool Number. The manufacturer’s part number.
Explanation of Columns in Remarks
Column (1) - Remarks Code. The code recorded in column (6) of the MAC.
Column (2) - Remarks. This column lists information pertinent to the maintenance function being performed as
indicated in the MAC.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0054-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0055

MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (MAC)
Table 1. MAC for Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Type IVA1.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

MAINTENANCE LEVEL
FIELD SUSTAINMENT
GROUP COMPONENT/ MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND REMARKS
CREW MAINTAINER BELOW DEPOT
NUMBER ASSEMBLY FUNCTION EQUIPMENT CODE
DEPOT
REFERENCE
C F H D CODE
00 Cargo Bed Inspect 0.5 0.4 A

Cover (CBC)
Repair 7.0 2,3,4,5,11, G
Type IVA1
Replace 12,14,15,1
1.3
8,19,21
2,3,4,5,11,
12,14,15,1
6,17,18,21
01 Assembly, Inspect 0.5 0.3 21 A
Top
Repair 2.0 21 C
0101 Handle, Bail Inspect 0.1 0.1 A

Replace 1.5 21
0102 Step, Pole, Inspect 0.1 0.1 A

Upper
Replace 0.2 21
0103 Step, Pole, Inspect 0.1 0.1 A

Middle
Replace 0.8 21
0104 Assembly, Inspect 0.1 0.1 A

Ring, Lift
Replace 0.25 21
0105 Pad, Filter, Inspect 0.1 A

Cooler, Air
Service 0.1 0.1 D
Repair 0.1 0.1 D
Replace 0.7
21

Locking, Lift
Replace 1.5 21
0055-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0055
Table 1. MAC for Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Type IVA1- Continued.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
MAINTENANCE LEVEL
FIELD SUSTAINMENT
DEPOT
REFERENCE
C F H D CODE
02 Assembly, Inspect 0.4 0.4 13 A

Bottom
Repair 3.0 21 B
0201 Step, Inspect 0.1 0.1 A

Folding,
Replace 0.15 21
Bottom

Rope, Wire
Replace 1.5 21
0203 Winch, Drum, Inspect 0.1 0.2 13 B

Hand-
Replace 0.67
Operated
Service
0204 Angles, Inspect 0.1 0.1 21

Mounting,
Replace 0.25 A
Carrier
0205 Assembly, Inspect 0.1 0.2

Fitting,
Repair 1.0 21
Corner
03 Assembly, Inspect 0.5 21 E

Door,
Repair 0.1 0.2 A
Personnel
0301 Door, Repair 0.5 13 A, B

Personnel
Replace 0.15 11,12,21
(Upper)
Inspect 0.1 0.1 21
0302 Door Repair 0.5 13 A, B

Personnel
Replace 0.05 11,12,21
(Lower)
Inspect 0.1 0.1
21
0055-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0055
Table 1. MAC for Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Type IVA1- Continued.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
MAINTENANCE LEVEL
FIELD SUSTAINMENT
DEPOT
REFERENCE
C F H D CODE
0303 Assembly, Inspect 0.1 0.1 21

Holder
Replace 0.25 A
04 Mounting Kit Inspect 0.1 0.1

M923, 5 Ton
Repair 2.0 2,21 A
Cargo Truck
Replace 2.0 21 F

Ladder
Repair 0.5 21
Replace 2.0 21
05 Mounting Kit Inspect 0.1 0.1 A

M1083, 5
Repair 2.0 2,21 F
Ton MTV
Replace 2.0 21
06 Mounting Kit Inspect 0.1 0.1 A

M1095, 5
Repair 2.0 2,21 F
Ton MTV
Trailer Replace 2.0 21
0055-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0055
Table 2. Tools and Test Equipment for Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Type IVA1.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

TOOLS OR TEST MAINTENANCE NOMENCLATURE NATIONAL TOOL
EQUIPMENT LEVEL STOCK NUMBER NUMBER
REFERENCE
CODE
1 F Bit, Router, Carbide 51502 (0GXM3)

2 F Dispenser, Sealant 5120-01-322-3634 7565T4 (39428)
3 F Drill, Electric, Portable 5130-00-935-7354 6635 (55111)
4 F Drill Set, Twist 5133-01-047-0258 DBM125B (55719)
5 F Drill Set, Twist 5133-00-293-0983 GGG-D-751 (81348)
6 F Drill Stop Set 5133-01-383-7665 8959A16 (39428)
7 F End Mill, 1/4” (6.35mm) 36081 (33689)
8 F End Mill, 5/16” (7.94 mm) 36101 (33689)
9 F End Mill, 3/8” (9.53 mm) 37121 (33689)
10 F End Mill, 1/2” (12.7 mm) 35162 (33689)
11 F Gloves, Rubber, Industrial 8415-00-266-8675 ZZ-G-381 (81348)
12 F Goggles, Industrial 4240-00-052-3776 GG-G-531 (81348)
13 F Grease Gun 4930-01-347-4817 1060K52 (39428)
14 F Light, Floor 6230-01-339-9660 8439K51 (39428)
15 F Punch, Pin 5120-00-293-1408 3416A15 (39428)
16 F Riveter, Blind, Hand 5120-00-102-6847 C-845-2528L (0VK23)
17 F Riveter, Blind, Hand 5120-01-020-7814 C-722-3124L (0VK23)
18 F Riveter, Blind, Hand 5120-01-289-4310 HP-2 (10054)
19 F Router, Electric, Portable 5130-00-035-6160 A-A-482 (58536)
20 F Step Device/Ladder
21 F Tool Kit, General 5180-01-483-0250 12B470000-2

Mechanic’s
0055-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0055
Table 3. Remarks for Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Type IVA1.
(1) (2)
REMARK REMARKS
CODES
A Perform PMCS.
B Lubrication Required.
C Deburr helicopter rub strip prior to airlift.
D Clean or replace air filter as required.
E Weather seal should be removed and replaced when changing Carrier Mounting Angles.
Only one mounting kit applies to each installation. Ensure that the proper mounting kit is
F
being referenced.
G End mills must be machined as described in WP 0039 for use.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0055-5/6 blank
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0056

COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LIST
INTRODUCTION
Scope
This section lists COEI and BII for the Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) to help you inventory items for safe and efficient
operation of the equipment.
General
The COEI and BII information is divided into the following lists:
Components of End Item (COEI). This list is for information purposes only and is not authority to requisition
replacements. These items are part of the CBC. As part of the end item, these must be with the end item
whenever it is issued or transferred between property accounts. Items of COEI are removed and separately
packaged for transportation or shipment only when necessary. Illustrations are furnished to help you find and
identify the items.
Basic Issue Items (BII). These essential items are required to place the CBC in operation, operate it, and to do
emergency repairs. Although shipped separately packaged, BII must be with the CBC during operation and when
it is transferred between property accounts. Listing these items is your authority to request / requisition them for
replacement based on authorization of the end item by the TOE/MTOE. Illustrations are furnished to help you find
and identify the items.
Explanation of Columns in the COEI List and BII List
Column (1), Illus Number, gives you the number of the item illustrated.
Column (2), National Stock Number, identifies the stock number of the item to be used for requisitioning
purposes.
Column (3), Description, CAGEC, and Part Number, identifies the Federal item name (in all capital letters)
followed by a minimum description when needed. The last line below the description is the CAGEC (commercial
and Government entity code) (in parenthesis) and the part number.
Column (4), Usable on code, gives you a code if the item you need is not the same for different models of
equipment. These codes are identified below:
Code Used on
FZF Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Assembly, Type IVA1, Camouflage
FZG Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Assembly, Type IVA1, Sand
Column (5), UM (unit of measure), indicates how the item is issued for the National Stock Number shown in
column 2.
Column (6), Qty Rqr, indicates the quantity required.
0056-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0056
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) LIST
Table 1. Components of End Item List.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
ILLUS NATIONAL DESCRIPTION, LOCATION, USABLE U/M QTY
NUMBER STOCK PART NUMBER, AND (CAGEC) ON RQR
NUMBER CODE
The Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Type IVA1, 5 Ton Cargo Truck, MTV, and MTV
Trailer has no Components of End Item.
0056-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0056
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LIST
TM 10-5411-248-13&P P
1
TECHNICAL MANUAL

INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST (RPSTL)
FOR
5 TON CARGO TRUCK, MTV, AND
MTV TRAILER
NSN 5411-01-559-8738 (CAMOUFLAGE)
NSN 5411-01-559-8741 (SAND)
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A – Approved for public release;

distribution is unlimited.
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

19XX XXXXXXXXX
November 2008 2011
4 3 2
0056-3
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0056
Table 2. Basic Issue Items List.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
ILLUS NATIONAL STOCK DESCRIPTION, PART NUMBER AND CAGEC USABLE U/M QTY
NUMBER NUMBER ON CODE RQR
FZF
1 N/A TM 10-5411-248-13&P EA 1
FZG
FZF
2 5120-00-230-6385 HAND SOCKET WRENCH EA 1
FZG
FZF
3 5120-00-228-9506 WRENCH 1/2 INCH EA 1
FZG
FZF
4 5120-00-060-2004 SCREW DRIVER EA 1
FZG
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0056-4
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0057

EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS LIST
INTRODUCTION
Scope
This work package lists expendable and durable items that you will need to operate and maintain the CBC. This
list is for information only and is not authority to requisition the listed items. These items are authorized to you by
CTA 50-970, Expendable/Durable Items (Except Medical, Class V Repair Parts, and Heraldic Items), or CTA 8-
100, Army Medical Department Expendable/Durable Items.
Explanations of Columns in the Expendable / Durable Items List
Column (1) - Item Number. This number is assigned to the entry in the list and is referenced in the narrative
instructions to identify the item (e.g., “Use lubricating oil (WP0053, Table 1, Item 1)”).
Column (2) - Level. This column includes the lowest level of maintenance that requires the listed item
(C=Operator/Crew and F=Field).
Column (3) - National Stock Number. This is the NSN assigned to the item which you can use to requisition it.
Column (4) - Item Name, Description, Commercial and Government Entity Code (CAGEC), and Part Number
(P/N). This column provides the other information you need to identify the item.
Column (5) – Unit of Issue (U/I). This code shows the physical measurement or count of an item, such as gallon,
dozen, gross, etc.
Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

ITEM LEVEL NATIONAL STOCK ITEM NAME, DESCRIPTION, PART U/I
NUMBER NUMBER (NSN) NUMBER/(CAGEC)
1 F 8040-01-501-5557 Adhesive, RTV-732 (71984) TB
2 F 8040-00-900-6296 Adhesive, Two-Part Epoxy, FE-6026 (92528) KT
3 F Alodine, brush, MIL-C-5541 (96906) QT
4 F Aluminum Plate 2” × 2” × 1/8-inch EA
5 F Anti-Seize Lubricant, 1279K31 (39428) TB
Bag,Sand, A-A-52142 type 1& 2 color 2

6 F 8105-01-336-6163 EA
(58536)
Cartridges, 1/10 gallon, empty, 7579A44

7 F PK
(39428)
8 F 8040-00-097-6524 Catalyst, SRC18 (01139) KT
Core, 1.00 inch thick × 12 inches × 12 inches

9 F (hexcel acg honeycomb), acg-1/2-2.3p EA
(04621)
0057-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 0057
Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List - Continued.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

ITEM LEVEL NATIONAL STOCK ITEM NAME, DESCRIPTION, PART U/M
NUMBER NUMBER (NSN) NUMBER/(CAGEC)
Core, 1.50 inch thick × 12 inches × 12 inches

10 F EA
(hexcel acg honeycomb, acg-1/2-2.3p (04621)
11 C Detergent, mild GL
12 C 8415-00-634-5027 Gloves, Men’s and Women’s PG
Grease,general purpose,lithium, lubr1plate630-

13 C 9150-00-929-7946 CA
2 (73219)
14 C 9550-00-402-4478 Lubricant, Spray, MIL-L-23398 CN
15 F Mask EA
Nozzle, 2 1/2 in long with 1/8 in orifice, 7579a32

16 F PK
(39428)
17 F 9150-00-145--0112 Oil, Machine, A-A-59113 (58536) CN
18 C Pail, Mixing EA
19 C 7920-00-205-1711 Rags, Wiping, A-A-2522 (58536) BE
20 C 5330-01-529-3855 Rubber strip, 3/8 inch thk x 1.00 inch wide x 25 CA

feet long, adhesive backed, color black, closed
cell, epdm sponge rubber strip
21 F 5350-00-161-9044 Sandpaper, 100 grit, A-A-1201 (58536) PG
22 F Sealant, Type II, MIL-S-8802 (96906) TB

Sheet, aluminum, .032 inch × 12 inch × 12 inch
23 F (30003-h16, 5052-h34, or 6061-t6 aluminum EA
alloy)
Solvent, Methylethylketone, ASTM D-740
24 F 6810-00-687-8429 CN
(81346)
25 F 8020-01-382-7101 Stick, Mixing, Epoxy, 804-60 (6D887) EA
26 F 7510-00-015-0447 Tape, Masking (1 inch wide), 1-3m (2j209) RO
27 F Threadlocker, 75145A69 (39428) EA
28 F Wood, Section 2x4, 35 inches in length EA

29 C Wood Support Blocks 4x4x12 inches in length EA
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0057-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Subject WP Sequence No.—Page No.
A
Abbreviations/Acronyms ....................................................................................................................... WP 0001-4
Army Maintenance System MAC....................................................................................................... WP 0054-1
B
Basic Issue Items (BII) List... ................................................................................................................ WP 0056-1
C
Cleaning Intervals ................................................................................................................................. WP 0016-2
Common Tools and Equipment ......................................................................................................... WP 0001-6
Components of End Item (COEI) List................................................................................................... WP 0056-1
Controls and Indicators ......................................................................................................................... WP 0004-1
Corrosion Prevention and Control (CPC) .......................................................................................... WP 0001-3
D
Decals and Instruction Plates ............................................................................................................... WP 0006-1
Description and Use of Operator’s Controls and Indicators ................................................................ WP 0004-1
Destruction of Army Materiel to Prevent Enemy Use .......................................................................... WP 0001-3
Description of Major Components ........................................................................................................ WP 0002-1
E
Equipment Characteristics, Capabilities and Features ........................................................................ WP 0002-1
Equipment Data .................................................................................................................................... WP 0002-5
Equipment Improvements and Recommendations, Reporting (EIR) ................................................ WP 0001-3
Expendable and Durable Items List .................................................................................................. WP 0057-1
Explanation of Columns in the MAC .................................................................................................... WP 0054-3
Explanation of Columns in the Tools and Test Equipment Requirements ......................................... WP 0054-4
Explanation of Columns in Remarks ................................................................................................. WP 0054-4
F
Field Manuals…………………………………………………………………………………………………WP 0053-1
Forms .................................................................................................................................................... WP 0053-1
INDEX-1
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
G
General Information .............................................................................................................................. WP 0001-1
H
How to Locate Repair Parts .................................................................................................................. WP 0043-6
How to Use This Manual..............................................................................................................................xii
I
Introduction to Components of End Item (COEI) and Basic Issue Items (BII) List ............................. WP 0056-1
Introduction to Maintenance Allocation Chart ................................................................................... WP 0054-1
L
List of Abbreviations/Acronyms ... ........................................................................................................ WP 0001-4
Location and Description of Major Components .................................................................................. WP 0002-1
Lubrication Requirements ..................................................................................................................... WP 0017-9
M
Maintenance Allocation Chart ............................................................................................................... WP 0055-1
Maintenance Forms Records and Reports .......................................................................................... WP 0001-3
Maintenance Functions ......................................................................................................................... WP 0054-2
Malfunction Symptom Index ... ............................................................................................................. WP 0008-1
N
National Stock Number Index ............................................................................................................... WP 0051-1
Nomenclature Cross-Reference List ................................................................................................. WP 0001-4
O
Operations under Usual Conditions ... ................................................................................................. WP 0005-1
Operating Procedures ... ....................................................................................................................... WP 0005-1
P
Pamphlets .............................................................................................................................................. WP 0053-1
Part Number Index ................................................................................................................................ WP 0052-1
Preparation for Movement .................................................................................................................... WP 0005-36
Preparing CBC and Associated Equipment for Storage ...................................................................... WP 0005-37
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) ..................................................................... WP 0017-1
R
References ............................................................................................................................................ WP 0053-1
Remarks for CBC .................................................................................................................................. WP 0055-5
Repair Parts and Special Tools List .................................................................................................. WP 0043-1
Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations (EIRs) ........................................................ WP 0001-3
Reporting Errors and Recommending Improvements………………………………………………………………i
S
Safety, Care and Handling .................................................................................................................... WP 0001-6
Service Upon Receipt ........................................................................................................................... WP 0008-1
Special Tools List .................................................................................................................................. WP 0043-1
INDEX-2
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
T
Table of Contents……………………………………………………………………………………………………...ii
Technical Manuals ............................................................................................................................. WP 0053-1
Theory of Operation .............................................................................................................................. WP 0003-1
Tools and Test Equipment .................................................................................................................... WP 0055-4
Troubleshooting Procedures ............................................................................................................. WP 0009-1
U
Usable on Code .................................................................................................................................... WP 0043-5
W
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes............................................................................................................ WP 0001-6
Warning Summary……………………………………………………………………………………………………...a
INDEX-3/4 blank
These are the instructions for sending an electronic 2028
The following format must be used if submitting an electronic 2028. The subject
line must be exactly the same and all fields must be included; however only the
following fields are mandatory: 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 13, 15, 16, 17, and 27.
From: "Whomever" <whomever@avma27.army.mil>

To: TACOMLCMC.DAForm2028@us.army.mil
Subject: DA Form 2028
1. From: Joe Smith

2. Unit: home
3. Address: 4300 Park
4. City: Hometown
5. St: MO
6. Zip: 77777
7. Date Sent: 19-OCT-93
8. Pub no: 55-2840-229-23
9. Pub Title: TM
10. Publication Date: 04-JUL-85
11. Change Number: 7
12. Submitter Rank: MSG
13. Submitter FName: Joe
14. Submitter MName: T
15. Submitter LName: Smith
16. Submitter Phone: 123-123-1234
17. Problem: 1
18. Page: 2
19. Paragraph: 3
20. Line: 4
21. NSN: 5
22. Reference: 6
23. Figure: 7
24. Table: 8
25. Item: 9
26. Total: 123
27. Text:
This is the text for the problem below line 27.
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND Use Part II (reverse) for Repair Parts and Special Tool DATE
Lists (RPSTL) and Supply Catalogs/Supply Manuals
BLANK FORMS (SC/SM). 21 October 2003
For use of this form, see AR 25-30; the proponent agency is ODISC4.
TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form) (Include ZIP Code) FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code)
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command,
PFC JANE DOE
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP / TECH PUBS
Co A 3RD Engineer Br.
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000
Ft Leonard Wood, MO 63108
PART I – ALL PUBLICATIONS (EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM) AND BLANK FORMS
PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER DATE TITLE
TM 10-1670-296-20&P 12 December 2008 Unit Manual for Ancillary Equipment for Low Velocity Air
Drop Systems
ITEM PAGE PARA- LINE FIGURE TABLE RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON
NO. NO. GRAPH NO. * NO. NO. (Provide exact wording of recommended changes, if possible).
0036 00-2 1 In Table 1, Sewing Machine Code Symbols, the second sewing machine code
symbol should be MDZZ not MD22
Change the manual to show Sewing Machine, Industrial: Zig-Zag; 308 stitch;
medium-duty; NSN 3530-01-181-1421 as a MDZZ code symbol.
*Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph.

TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS SIGNATURE
EXTENSION
Jane Doe, PFC (508) 233-4141 Jane Doe Jane Doe
DSN 256-4141
DA FORM 2028, FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED. USAPPC V3.00
TO: (Forward direct to addressee listed in publication) FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP DATE
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command, Code)
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP / TECH PUBS PFC JANE DOE 21 October 2003
6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000 Co A 3RD Engineer Br.
Ft Leonard Wood, MO 63108
PART II – REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS/SUPPLY MANUALS
PUBLICATION NUMBER DATE TITLE
TM 10-1670-296-20&P 12 December 2008 Unit Manual for Ancillary Equipment for
Low Velocity Air Drop Systems
TOTAL NO. OF
PAGE COLM LINE NATIONAL REFERENCE NO. FIGURE ITEM MAJOR ITEMS
NO. NO. NO. STOCK NO. NO. SUPPORTED RECOMMENDED ACTION
NUMBER
0066 00- 4 Callout 16 in figure 4 is pointed to a D-

Ring.In the Repair Part List key for Figure
4, item 16 is called a Snap Hook. Please
correct one or the other.
PART III – REMARKS (Any general remarks or recommendations, or suggestions for improvement of publications and
blank forms. Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed.)
TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS EXTENSION SIGNATURE
UASPPC V3.00
BLANK FORMS
(SC/SM).
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECHPUBS
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 01 OCTOBER 2011 Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Type IVA1 5 Ton Cargo Truck,
MTV, and MTV Trailer

EXTENSION
TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form) (Include ZIP Code) FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code) DATE
TM 10-5411-248-13&P 01 OCTOBER 2011 Cargo Bed Cover (CBC) Type IVA1 5 Ton
Cargo Truck, MTV, and MTV Trailer
TOTAL NO.
PAGE COLM LINE NATIONAL STOCK REFERENCE NO. FIGURE ITEM OF MAJOR
NO. NO. NO. NUMBER NO. NO. ITEMS RECOMMENDED ACTION
SUPPORTED
PART III – REMARKS (Any general remarks or recommendations, or suggestions for improvement of publications and blank
forms. Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed.)
USAPPC V3.00
BLANK FORMS
(SC/SM).

EXTENSION
TOTAL NO.
SUPPORTED
USAPPC V3.00
BLANK FORMS
(SC/SM).

EXTENSION
TOTAL NO.
SUPPORTED
USAPPC V3.00
TM 10-5411-248-13&P
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
RAYMOND T. ODIERNO
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
JOYCE E. MORROW
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
1125502
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with initial distribution number (IDN) 257886 requirements for TM 10-5411-248-
13&P.
The Metric System and Equivalents
Linear Measure Liquid Measure
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters = .39 inch 1 centiliter = 10 milliliters = .34 fl. ounce
1 decimeter = 10 centimeters = 3.94 inches 1 deciliter = 10 centiliters = 3.38 fl. ounces
1 meter = 10 decimeters = 39.37 inches 1 liter = 10 deciliters = 33.81 fl. ounces
1 dekameter = 10 meters = 3 2.8 feet 1 dekaliter = 10 liters = 2.64 gallons
1 hectometer = 10 dekameters = 328.08 feet 1 hectoliter = 10 dekaliters = 26.42 gallons
1 kilometer = 10 hectometers = 3,280.8 feet 1 kiloliter = 10 hectoliters = 264.18 gallons
Weights Square Measure

1 centigram = 10 milligrams = .15 grain 1 sq. centimeter = 100 sq. millimeters = .15 5 sq. inch
1 decigrarn = 10 centigrams = 1.54 grains 1 sq. decimeter =100 sq. centimeters = 15.5 sq. inches
1 gram = 10 decigrams = .035 ounce 1 sq. meter (centare) = 100 sq. decimeters = 10.76 sq. feet
1 dekagrarn = 10 grams = .35 ounce 1 sq. dekameter (are) = 100 sq. meters = 1,076.4 sq. feet
1 hectogram = 10 dekagrams = 3.52 ounces 1 sq. hectometer (hectare) = 100 sq. dekameters = 2.47 acres
1 kilogram = 10 hectograms = 2.2 pounds 1 sq. kilometer = 100 sq. hectometers = .386 sq. mile
1 quintal = 100 kilograms = 220.46 pounds
1 metric ton = 10 quintals = 1.1 short tons Cubic Measure
1 cu. centimeter = 1000 cu. millimeters = .06 cu. inch
1 cu. decimeter = 1000 cu. centimeters = 61.02 cu. inches
1 cu. meter = 1000 cu. decimeters = 35.31 feet
Approximate Conversion Factors

To change To Multiply by To change To Multiply by
inches centimeters 2.540 ounce-inches newton-meters .007062
feet meters .305 centimeters inches .394
yards meters .914 meters feet 3.280
miles kilometers 1.609 meters yards 1.094
square inches square centimeters 6.451 kilometers miles .621
square feet square meters .093 square centimeters square inches .155
square yards square meters .836 square meters square feet 10.764
square miles square kilometers 2.590 square meters square yards 1.196
acres square hectometers .405 square kilometers square miles .386
cubic feet cubic meters .028 square hectometers acres 2.471
cubic yards cubic meters .765 cubic meters cubic feet 35.315
fluid ounces milliliters 29.573 cubic meters cubic yards 1.308
pints Iiters .473 milliliters fluid ounces .034
quarts Iiters .946 liters pints 2.113
gallons Iiters 3.785 liters quarts 1.057
ounces grams 28.349 liters gallons .264
pounds kilograms .454 grams ounces .035
short tons metric tons .907 kilograms pounds 2.205
pound-feet newton-meters 1.356 metric tons short tons 1.102
pound-inches newton-meters .11296
Temperature (Exact)
_F Fahrenheit 5/9 (after Celsius _C
temperature subtracting 32) temperature
PIN: 086964 -000

TM 10-5411-248-13P

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

TM 10-5411-248-13P

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

TM 10-5411-248-13&P

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A – Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

FIRST AID DATA

For First Aid information, refer to FM 4-25.11, First Aid.

EXPLANATION OF SAFETY WARNING ICONS

GENERAL SAFETY WARNINGS DESCRIPTION

GENERAL SAFETY WARNINGS DESCRIPTION - Continued.

GENERAL SAFETY WARNINGS DESCRIPTION - Continued.

GENERAL SAFETY WARNINGS DESCRIPTION - Continued.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DESCRIPTION

METHYLETHYLKETONE, ASTM D-740

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DESCRIPTION - Continued.

EPOXY COATING KIT, MIL-PRF-22750

SEALANT, MIL-S-8802, TYPE II, CLASS 8

LUBRICATING OIL, MACHINE TOOL, A-A-59113

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DESCRIPTION - Continued.

ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND, P/N 1279K31

LUBRICANT, SOLID FILM, MIL-L-23398

PRIMER, EPOXY, MIL-P-53022

POLYURETHANE COATING, MIL-DTL-53039

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DESCRIPTION - Continued.

RTV ADHESIVE, MIL-A-46146

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES

Page/WP No. Change No. Page/WP No. Change No.

CARGO BED COVER (CBC) TYPE IVA1,

REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A – Approved for public release. Distribution is unlimited.

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued.

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued.

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued.

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued.

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued.

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued.

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued.

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued.

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

HOW TO OBTAIN TECHNICAL MANUALS

Instructions for Unit Publications Clerk

ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL

Text and Illustrations.

There is not a Glossary at the back of this Manual.

GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION, AND

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE

Figure 1. Cargo Bed Cover (CBC), Points of Reference.

Figure 1. Cargo Bed Cover (CBC).

VEHICLE MOUNTING PLATE

VEHICLE MOUNTING PLATE

Figure 2. CBC Mounting Plates.

MAINTENANCE FORMS, RECORDS, AND REPORTS

NOMENCLATURE CROSS-REFERENCE LIST

Table 1. Nomenclature Cross-Reference List.

Common Name Official Nomenclature

Folding Step Pole Step

M1083, 5 Ton MTV 5 Ton Medium Tactical Vehicle

M1095, 5 Ton MTV Trailer 5 Ton Medium Tactical Vehicle Trailer

Table 2. List of Abbreviations and Acronyms.

Abbreviation/Acronym Meaning Abbreviation/Acronym Meaning

List of Abbreviations/Acronyms - Continued.

Table 2. List of Abbreviations and Acronyms - Continued.

Abbreviation/Acronym Meaning Abbreviation/Acronym Meaning

List of Abbreviations/Acronyms - Continued.